o+9Í,rrr-&

l*:..$ál?s

ffiwPreliminary English Test

ffiwffiffiffiffi mffi

WMffiffiffi, ffi-ffiffi ffiffi Řlncludes 2oo4 exam speciÍications

Louise HashemiBarbara Thomas

#-rffi

TEST 1

Part Topic

Part 1 Signs/notes/messages

Language practice Page

1 Grammar: modal verbs (rnay, 8*9mustl mu6tn't, shouldl shouldn't,needn't)

2 Writing: words left out

3 Grammar: if/unless sentences(real situations)

PaÍt 1 Short talks .l Vocabulary: word sets

2 Grammar; saying when thingshappen

3 Speaking: habits and routines

1 Vocabulary: -ing and -ed 39-40adjectives

2 Grammar: verbs Ío||owed bvÍo + infinitive

3 Speaking: journeys

Part 3 Radio talk 1 Grammar: prepositions 42

37

Parl2 A boatJourney

ParI2 Hotelfacilities

.| Vocabulary: hote| Ťaci|ities

2 Grammar: linking words

3 Vocabulary: prepositions

4 Grammar: present perÍect andpast simple

5 Speaking: your experiences

12-13

about amuseum

2 Vocabulary: compound nouns

3 Vocabulary: places to visit

4 Speaking: places to visit

Part 3 Activityholidays

1 Vocabulary: negative adjectives 16-172 Vocabulary: words with similar

meanings

3 Grammar: the passive

4 Vocabulary: sports

5 Speaking: your experiences

1 Language focus: feelings 20*21

2 Grammar: expressions with -lng

3 Functions: giving opinions

4 Vocabulary: jobs

5 Speaking: jobs

PaÍt 5 Book review 1 Vocabu|ary: simi|ar meanings 24.252 Grammar: comparative Íorms

3 Grammar: toolveryl enough,so/such... that

4 Vocabulary: books

5 Speaking: books and magazines

Part 1 A guesthouse 1 Grammar: matching patterns

2 coÍrectino mistakes

Part 4 Boy and girl 1 Vocabulary: words with similarin music meaningssnoP 2 Grammar: r7sentences

(unreal situations)

3 Speaking: shopping

Part 1 Sample 1 Sample interviewinterview 2 Spelling

3 Exam Task

Part 4 Workingfrom home

Part2 Sampleinterview

1 Sample interview

2 Functions: making plans

3 Exam Task

PaÍt 3 Samp|einterview

1 Describing where things 47-48are in a picture

2 Describing people

3 Describing how people are {eeling

4 Sample interview

5 Exam Tásk

Part 4 Sampleinterview

1 Samp|e inteÍView 49

2 Thinking about study habits

3 Vocabulary: television plogrammes

4 Exam TaskPart 2 Responding 1 Grammar: ÍutuÍe p|ans

Io an 2 Function: different kinds oÍinvitation messages

3 Exam Task

29

Pan 3 Letter:Íree timestoÍy: ÁÍ slxo'clock...

Grammar: narrative tenses

w CONTENTS

TEST 2Part Topic

Part'l Signs/notes/messages

Language practice

'I Grammar: time wordsand phrases

2 Vocabulary: words you see insrgns

3 Grammar: before I after + -ing

4 Vocabulary: money words

5 Speaking: Are you a spenderor a saver?

Part 2 Films on TV 1 Vocabulary: expressions withsimilar meanings

2 Grammar: present perÍect

3 Grammar: time expressions

4 Vocabulary: word sets

5 Speaking: films

6 Writing: an e-mail or letter abouta ÍiIm

Part 3 Student 1 Vocabu|ary: student |iŤe 60_61We|Íare. 2 Speaking: your schoo|/col|egeNewsletter

3 Grammar: adverbs oí frequency(how often?)

4 Speaking: everyday activities

5 Grammar: relative clauses

Part 1 Short ta|ks 1 Vocabu|ary: WeatheÍ

2 Functions: giving andrnderstanding directions

3 Vocabularv: clothes

Page

52-53

ParI2 A tour guide 1 Grammar: possessives

2 Grammar: reported questions

3 Vocabulary: the environment

4 Speaking: the environment

83-84

56-57Part 3 Radio

competition1 WÍiting dates and numbers 86

2 Grammar: expressions of purpose

3 Vocabulary: computer words

4 Speaking: communicatingwith other people

Part 4 Conversationat work

1 Functions: agreeing anddisagreeing

2 Vocabulary: traÍíic prob|ems

3 Speaking: where you live

88

89PaÍt 1 Sampleintervaew

1 Giving persona| inÍoÍmation

2 Vocabulary and pronunciation:school subjects

3 Exam Task

Part2 Sampleinterview

1 Vocabulary: presents (1)

2 Functions: choosing a present

3 Vocabulary: presents (2)

4 Exam Task

90Part 4 Watersports 1 Function: expressing attitudes

on a 2 Grammar: reported speechreservotr

3 Grammar: patterns aÍterreporting verbs

4 Vocabulaíy:get

5 Speaking: past habits (used to)

64-65

Part 3 Sample. interview

1 Talking about things youdon't know the name of

2 Describing photos

3 Exam Task

9l

Part 5 The airport 1 Grammar: preposition or noman preposition aÍter a verb

2 Grammar: words that describehow much at how many

3 Vocabu|ary". lÍkel as4 Vocabulary: at the airport

5 Vocabu|ary: WoÍds that gotogether

6 Speaking: travelling

Part 1 Cinema 1 Grammar: matching patterns

2 Correctino mistakes

68-69

Part 4 Sampleinterview

1 Ta|king about youÍ own oÍ 92other people's experiences

2 Ta|king about some oÍ thepeople in a group

3 Telling someone about yourselfand people you know

4 Exam Task

Parl2 A noteto a Íriend

1 Grammar: possessives

2 Grammar: verbs Ío||owedby . ing or inÍinitive

3 Exam Task

1e

Part 3 LetteÍ:a new home

Story:'The surprise'

1 Vocabulary: describing houses 75-77and flats

2 Vocabulary: things in your Íoom

1 |mproving youÍ story: usinglinking words

2 lmproving your story: addinginformation

CONTENTS WX

Part lPaÍt 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

TEST 3Part Topic

TEST 5PartPage

Page

Signs/notes/ messages

English courses

LiÍe on a sma|l is|and

JamesWeather

Having a haircut

Writing a thank-you card

Letter: your holidayStory: 'My lucky day'

Short talks

Radio programme: What's on

The city oÍ Cork

A conversation between neighbours

Giving persona| inÍormation, spe||ing

Planning a celebration

Horse-riding

Ta|king about |ikes' dis|ikes and preÍerences

94-9596-9798-991 00-1 01

102

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Pafi 4

Part 5

127-128

128-129

130-131

IJZ_lÓJ

134

Page

Page

Topic

Signs/notes/ messages

Museums and galleries

Hotel inÍormation

Waiter!

Modigliani - an ltalian artist

A sports centre

Writing an apologyl Ó1lAr. 2 n2rŤ\/

Story: / had just Íinished...

Short talks

An evening class

Fashion show

Talking about a holiday

Part I

ParI2Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

PaÍt 2

Part 3

Part 4

Short talks

A fashion designer

Visit to a shopping centre

A school play

Giving personal iniormation, spelling

Talking about a coach journey

Ta|king about spoÍt

Ta|king about |ikes, dis|ikes and preÍerences

Topic

Signs/notes/messagesBooks

A holiday in Tasmania

The businessman

Olympic hopes

A house

An invitation

Letter: staying With a Íami|y in Eng|andStory: 'A new friend'

103

104

104

1 05-1 06

107

108

109

110

1l0110'1 10

Part I

Part 2

Part 3

.135

136lea

1 37-1 38

139

140

141

142

142

t+z

'142

Part 1

PaÍt 2

Part 3

ParI 4

TEST 4

Part

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

TEST 6Part

Giving personal inÍormation, spe||ing

A day trip to London

Talking about music

Talking about likes and dislikes

Topic

Signsi notes/messages

Summer jobs

Unusual women of the past

Living in the lce Age

Fashions go round and round

A pop group

Writing about arÍangements

Letter: shoppingStory: / got off the train.-.

Part 1

Parl 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 1

PaťI2Part 3

Part 1

Parr 2

PaÍt 3

ParI 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

PaÍÍ 4

111-112112-113114-t15

1 16-1 17

118

Part l

Part 2

Part 3

ParI 4

Part 5

143-144144-145146-147

148-1491s0

121-122123

124

125

119

120

120

126

tzo

126

126

Part 1

PaÍ1 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part l

Paň 2

Part 3

151

t3z

152

1 53-1 s4

155

156

157

PaÍt.'|

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Short talks

A teenage inventor

Cycling holidays

Work experience

Giving personal in{ormation, spelling 158

Ta|king about diÍferent courses 158

Talking about shopping 158

Ta|king about |ikes' dis|ikes and preÍerences 158

Extra practice Íor Writing Part 1

Exlra language Íor the Speaking Test

Visuals Íor Speaking Test Part 2

Visua|s Íor Speaking Test Part 3

Answer sheets

Teacher's guide and answer key

Assessment and marking guide

Tapescripts

159

1 60-1 61

162-1671 68-1 73

174-176177-201

202-203204-216WW CONTENTS

i ,)\r\l

PAPER í Reading and Writing(l hour 30 minutes)

Reading Parts í.5

Five short texts (signs, notes, messages, e-mails,notes, postcards, etc.) each with a three-optionmultiple-choice question.

Five short texts which describe a person or group

oÍ peop|e to match to eight short texts.

One longer factual text with ten correct/incorrectquestions.

One longer text giving opinions or attitudes with

five Íour-option multipIe-choice questions'

One factual or narrative cloze text with tenfour-option multiple-choice questions.

Five sentence transÍormations a|| re|ated to acommon theme.

One short communicative message, e.g. postcard,

e-mail, note, etc. of 35-45 words.

PAPER 2 Listening(about 30 minutes)

Seven short monologues or dialogues each with

a three-option multiple-choice question based onpictures.

One longer monologue or interview with sixthree-option multiple-choice questions.

One longer monologue with six questions completinggaps in notes.

One longer informal dialogue with six correct/incorrectquestions.

PAPER 3 Speaking(10-12 minutes for two candidates together)

The examiner asks each candidate questions in turn

about personal information, present situation, past

experiences and future plans. (2-3 minutes)

The candidates discuss pictures together, usinglanguage to make and respond to suggestions,make recommendations, and agree or disagree.(2-3 minutes)

Each candidate ta|ks on hisi her own about one oÍ apair oÍ photographs for up to one minute. (3 minutes)

The candidates and the examiner discuss a subjectrelated to Part 3. (3 minutes)

Writing Parts í-3

Either an inÍormal |etter or a storv oÍ about 100 words.

EXAM ovERVTEW WW

) st."tesy1 Read the instructions to the Exam Task on

the opposite page.1 How many questions do you have to answer?

2 What do you have to decide?3 Where do you mark your answers?

2 Look at the example.1 What kind of text is this?

a) a message on a board b) a sign c) a label2 Where might you see it?

3 The correct ans\ /er is A. Let's decide why.

Look at A. Underline the words which meanIt is forbidden.Underline the words which mean from thisroom.

Underline the words which mean withoutpermission.

4 Why is B wrong? Is the sign about using thecomputers in this room?

5 Why is C wrong? Is the sign about movingcomputers into this room?

.. EXAp tiD! ... . . ... .. .. .. .. . ....... . . .ota

! When choosing the correct explanation for :i each text, look at each option A*C and decide :! if it means the same thing as the text. :3....... a a a a aaooa a.............. a 4a. a 1

3 Look at Question 1.

1 What kind of text is this?a) an e-mail b) a phone messagec) a Post-it note

2 Will Katie pay for Emily's ticket?3 Does Katie have a student card?4 What does Katie advise Emily to do? Why?5 Will Katie and Emilv buy their tickets on

the train?6 Where will they meet?7 Look at A, B and C. Which one means the

same as the message? Mark it. What wordsin the message tell you? Underline them.

8 Look at the other sentences. Decide whythey are \ /rong.

4 Look at Questions 2-5.For each question:o decide what kind of text it iso choose the correct ans\ /er

o mark the answer on VouÍ ans\^/eÍ sheet.

.. EXA6 tiD! ... . .... . ..... . .... . .. .... .ota

i lf you prefer, you can mark your answers on :! the paper and copy them onto the answer sheet :! when you have finished this part. :

,aaaa!

W TEST 1, READING PART 1

Part íQuestions 1-5

Look at the text in each ouestion.What does it say?Mark the correct letter A. B or C on vour answer sheet.

Example:

0

IT IS FORBIDDEN TOMOVE COMPUTERS FROM

THIS ROOM WITHOUTPERMISSION FROMTHE HEADTEACHER

You mustn't take the computers out of this roomwithout asking the headteacher.

You shou|d check with the headteacher beÍoreusing the computers in this room.

You must ask the headteacher Íor permission tomove comouters into this room.

A

B

c

Answer: nlA B C-ln

*,From l,

I Emilv

I Katie

|Í you bring your Student card tomorrow,your train ticket wi|| cost Iess. |'ve Íoundmy card. See you in queue at ticket oÍfice.

LOCKERS IN THIS AREAARE RESERVED FOR USEBY VISITING TEAM ONLY

?arlla

Do your want to go to the concert wiih Jawres

ionight? King hiwr belove six to tell hinn, He'll

go with some-ot\e else i{ he doesn't hear {ram

your by then, y-

A Katie wilI buy Emi|y's train ticket Íor her.

B Emily's train ticket will be cheaper than Katie's.

C Katie will meet Emily before they get on the train.

Anyone who takes part in a swimming competitionmay use these lockers.

Swimmers from visiting teams needn't pay to uselockers.

Members oÍ the |oca| swimmino team can't usethese lockers.

Paola won't be able to go to the concert unlessshe phones James by six.

James wants Paola to find someone to go to theconcert with him.

James can no longer go to the concert with Paolaat six' lTurn over

A

B

c

A

B

c

TEsr 1, READTNG PART 1 &X

THIS DOOR MAY ONLY BE USEDBY STAFF AFTER 5 P.M.

Chril-I've prittrn this letter to Sam' but I

can't f nrl his adlress' Have you got it?

tf ,oi, co, gou ring Mum anr/ ask her?

Then please Post it'

Sarah

A You must ask a member of staÍf to un|ock this door.

People who work here must leave the buildingby 5 p.m.

You may use this door in the evening if you worknere.

Chris should

A phone Sam if he doesn't know the address.

B send the letter when he has Íound out the address'

C ask Mum to write the address and send the letter.

B

c

Grammar: moda| Verbs (may, ÍT|UStt

mustn't, shouldl shouldn't, needn't)

Moda|verbs oÍ|en appeař in Reading Part 1, so il isimportant to understand what they mean. Modal verbs

are also tested in Writing Part 1.

Find and underline examples of the modal verbsmay, must lmLrstn't, should lshouldn't, needn't inthe Exam Task on pages 7-8.

Look at the meanings of the verbs below.o It is forbidden to move the computers.

You must not move the computers.. Anyone who takes part in a swimming

competition may use these lockers.Anyone who takes part in a swimmingcompetition is allowed/permitted to usethese lockers.

o People who work here must leave by 5 p.m.It is necessary/essential that people whowork here leave by 5 p.m.

o Swimmers from visiting teams needn't pay touse lockers.It isn't necessary for swimmers fromvisiting teams to pay to use lockers.

o Chris should phone Sam.

Chris is advised to ohone Sam.

c) Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first. Use one of the verbs inthe box.

may must mustn't should shouldn'tneedn't sheuld

I advise you to catch the early train.You .. ...qh.qp\.d...... catch the early train.

It is essential to check in your luggage an hourbefore your flight.You .. .. check in your luggage an hourbefore your flight.Smoking is forbidden in the youth hostel.You.......... smoke in the youth hostel.It isn't necessary to take your o\ /n towel to thatswimming pool.You ........ take vour own towel to thatswimming pool.Customers are advised to check their changebefore leaving the shop.You ....... check your change beforeleaving the shop.Visitors are permitted to use the school canteen.Visitors ........ use the school canteen.Students are advised not to leave all their revisionuntil the day before the exam.Students .... leave all their revisionuntil the dav before the exam.

0a)

b)

WW rEsr 1, READTNG PART 1

2 Writing: words left out

Words like the and a(n), pronouns (1, you, etc.) and

parts oÍ verbs (ls, are, e|c.) are oÍten leít ou| in

messages, signs and notices.

Read the texts below and find places where wordsare missing. Write them in to make full sentences.

1 ?- ry!!--xt

t

IN EMERGENCY USETELEPHONE IN HALL TOCALL HOSTEL MANACER

READ INSTRUCTIONS

BE,FORE E,QUIPME,NT IS

SWITCHE,D ON

Having /o"e/g

time in Spain.Weatherwonderfu/.

lf receipt needed,

a)

3 Grammar= if lunless sentences(real situations)

|n Part 1, you otten see sentences with iÍor unlessgiving inÍotmation, advice or instructions.

Look at the following sentences.What is the verb tense in each part?What does unless mean?

If you bring your student card, the ticket willcost less.

He'll go with someone else if he doesn't hearfrom you.He'll go with someone else unless he hears fromyou.

b) Match the sentence halves.

1 If you miss your appointment,2 We'll be home by lunchtime3 If they invite us to stay with them,

4 I'Il have time to talk to you5 If you aren't outside the restaurant,

6 I'll collect them from the station

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

c)

b

if you come back later.

@I'll go inside.if they need a lift.unless the traffic is verv heaw.we'll accept.

Now complete the following sentences with yourown ideas.

1 I'll go to the cinema at the weekend if

2 Unless you help me with my homework, .............

3 I'll lend you this CD if ...............

4 If we finish lessons earlv, .........

5 If I stay up late tonight, ...............

Read your answers out. Did anyone have thesame answers?

d)

Froser. Don't f orget to toketowel with you to footbollproctice toníght. Dod

ask assistant when paying,

TEsr 1, READTNG PART 1 fn

) strategy1 Read the instructions to the Exam Task

opposite.1 How many questions are there?

2 What do all the people want?3 What are the descriptions about?4 How many descriptions are there?

5 What do you have to decide?6 Where do you mark your answers?

2 Look at the pictures.Each question describes a different person or groupof people. rvVhat kind of people do the pictures show?

3 Look at Questions 6-10.

a) AII the people are Iooking for something different.Look at the underlined parts of Question 6.

What is important for Felipe and Gabriela?

1 Where should the hotel be?

2 Are they alone?3 What do they want to do?4 Where will they eat?

b) Now underline the important parts ofQuestions 7-10.

4 Look at texts A-H to Íind the importantinÍormation.

a) Look at Question 6 again.

1 Which hotels are neaÍ the city centre?2 Which ONE of the hotels is best for Felipe

and Gabriela? (Remember: they want to walkaround the city centre!)

b) Check your answer.

o Is the hotel near the railway station?o Do Felipe and Gabriela want to eat at the hotel?o Is the hotel suitable for the baby?

c) Mark the letter (A, B, C, etc.) by Question 6 onyour answer sheet.

d) Look at the important points you underlinedfor Questions 7-10. Use them to decide whichhoteIs are the most suitable Íor the other people.Mark your answers on your answer sheet.

.. EXO6 tlp! ............ ..... . o. o o o... .

! You must have a different answer for each 3

: . : ::'j':: : ::: :1T:: ::: :1'. :1T : :':: ::':: . . :

Part 2

Questions 6-10

The people below all want to find somewhereto stay.On the opposite page there are descriptions ofeight hotels.Decide which hotel would be the most suitablefor the Ío||owing peop|e.For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter(A-H) on your answer sheet.

Felipe and Gabriela want tospend the weekend in the citycentre near the railway stationwith their one-year-old son.They want to be able to walkeverywhere. They plan to eatin restaurants.

Giorgos wants to be able toswim, but is not interested in

other sports. He'd like to spendthe weekend somewhere quietin the country. The hotel musthave a car park.

Monica would like to staysomewhere in the countrysidewhere there are organisedactivities so that she can meetother people. As she has somework to do, e-mai| Íaci|itiesmust be available.

Julia and Robert are travellingby car and want to park attheir hotel. They don't want tobe further than ten kilometresfrom the city. They want toswim every day and havedinner at the hotel.

Adam and Barbara need tostay somewhere in the citywhich orovides lunch anddinner and has a car park.Their three children all enjoysport.

X&X TEST 1, READING PART 2

A

B

c

D

The Star Hote! is a five-minute drive from the city centre, and all rooms have theirown television and telephone. Guests can eat all their meals here - breakfast, lunch

and dinner.The hotel has its own large car park.There is a gym and two tennis courts.Entertainment is available at weekends.

York House is between two farms. The hotel arranges dances and other events

which you can attend if you wish, or you can walk in the gardens and enjoy the

scenery. lt is especially popular with people travelling alone and also has a fully

equipped business room and internet café.A|| mea|s are avai|able on request.

The Grange Hotel is outside the city, but hotel staff can collect you from the

station and arrange trips in the area by coach.lt is close to all the main roads and has

a large car park.Although only breakfast is served, there are two good restaurants

nearby. Fax, e-mail and photocopying are available.

Rosewood Guesthouse is about one kilometre from the city centre. lt is easy toreach the cityš shopping and entertainment areas or drive into the surroundingcountryside.There is a swimming pool in the next street. Dinner is available if booked

in advance, and there is a large car park.

The Blue Lion Hote! is on the south side of the city and is just a short taxi ride

from the railway station and places of interest. Breakfast only is provided. Events such

as talks and shows are organised every evening and are popular both with local

people as well as the hotel's guests. Free parking is available in nearby streets.

Twenty kilometres from the city, in the middle of the hills, Blantyre Manor was

previously a family home. lt is a peaceful place to spend a few days, with very good

sports facilities including golf, tennis and a swimming pool. There is a restaurant

serving breakfast, lunch and dinner, and plenty of car-parking space.

G Victoria House is a family hotel five minutes' walk from the railway and tram

station and close to all the city's facilities. lt is in the city centre near the shopping

mall, where a range of restaurants is available. No car parking or meals exceptbreakfast. Bicycles can be hired from reception.

H Just five kilometres from the city centre, The Spring Park Motel is very near the

motorway with plenty of parking space, so it is convenient for drivers, although it isin the countryside. Meals are not available, but only two kilometres along the

motorway there is an exce||ent café where breakfast, |unch and dinner are availab|e.

TEsr 1, READTNG PART 2 WXK

1 Vocabulary: hotel facilities

Match the words and phrases in the box with thehote! signs below.

restaurant gym swimming pooltelephone in room car park golfbicycles for hire lift television in roomentertainment garden city centre - 3kmsrailwav station - 5 mins tennis courts

7 --lm\=-

ll I lle

il_r_il

tont*T<),

^Ú.bc

The words but, although and while introduce

a contrasling idea.

Giorgos wants t0 be able t0 swim, but is nut

interested in other sports.

Although only breakÍast is served, there aÍe

two good restaurants nearby.

The word so introduces a resull.Felipe and Gabriela have a one-year-old son,

so they need a Íanily hotel.

a) Read the sentences below and choose thecorrect word for each space.

'N

2 Grammar: linking words

Thete are severa| diÍÍetent ways to connect ideas in a

sentence.1 The words fecause. as and slbce answel the

question !t/fy?As she has some work to do, e-mail Íacilitiesmast be available.

The Grange Hotel only serves breakfastthere are two good restaurants nearby.

A so B because qL lyt

' uu(l

ffi

It is popular with visitors travelling by carit is close to all the main roads.

A but B since C althoughThe Spring Park Hotel is very near the motor\ /ay

it is convenient for drivers.A so B since C but

the restaurant is verv small, it servesexcellent meals.

A Although B ButThis hotel is near the airportbusiness travellers stay there.

A while B because

The hotel is closed in Tanuarvgo on holiday.A but B because C althoughThe Blue Lion Hotel has talks and shows,York House has dances.

A so B while C because

Join these sentences using linking words fromabove.Parking is available in the street. It is sometimesdifficult to find a sDace.

The rooms at the front are very popular. Theyhave lovely views of the sea.

I like to eat dinner in my hotel. I choose hotelswhich have a restaurant.

4 Hotels usually offer lunch and dinner.Guesthouses often serve only breakfast.

1't

C Because

a lot of

Csothe owners

b)

Ip[ TEST i, READTNG PART 2

3 Vocabulary: prepositions

Prepositions are important in Reading Part 2 and

are oÍten tested in Reading Par| 5, Writing Part 1

and Listening Part 1.

a) Complete each sentence with a preposition fromthe box. They are all used in the same way in thetexts about hotels on page 11.

between €l€€€ from in (x3) nearof &2) on with

I

L

My house is .Q.lQ.qe. to the shops, so it's veryconvenient.

It's .......... the north side .......... the town.It's also a big park, where I can play tenniswith my friends.My best friend lives .......... the next street to me,so she often comes to my house.

My school is .......... the sports hall and thetheatre.I go to school by bus, and it's about ten minutes'walk .......... the bus station to the school.

There are many places interest .......... myto\ /n.

The sports centre is very popular youngpeople.My parents would prefer to live .......... thecountryside.

Rewrite the sentences in your notebook so theyare true for you.

Grammar: present pedect and past simpleRead the postcard and answer the questions.

How long has Barbara been at the hotel?How often has she played tennis? swum?

How many times has she ridden a moped?

Has she ever ridden a moped before?

When did she go sightseeing?

Match the sentence halves 1, 2 and 3 with thecorrect ending a), b) or c).

1 We use for2 We use since

3 We Úse ago

a) when we mention the time something started.

b) to say how far back in time something happened.

c) to talk about a period of time.

c) Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first, using no more than threewords.

0 It's a long time since I wrote to my penfriend.r .......1.1.aYpn1!.wri.tIpn........ to mv penfriend for a

long time.

1 We haven't stayed in this hotel before.

This is the first time thatin this hotel.

2 We arrived here a week ago.

We ............ ......... here for a week.

3 This is the first time I've ever ridden a horse.

I ................ ..... a horse before.

4 I haven't played tennis for a long time.

It's a long time sincetennis.

5 The last time I had a holiday \ /as t\ /o years ago'

I ................. .... a holiday for two years.

5 Speaking: your experiences

Work with a partner. Ask and answer thesequestions.

1 Have you eveÍ Stayed in a hotel?2 What is the best hotel you have ever stayed in?

Where was it? What facilities did it have?

3 Where do you usually go on holidaY?4 Have you ever been to Scotland? AustÍalia?

France? When did you go there? Why did you go?

5 Have you ever ridden a moped? gone sailing?When was the first time you did it?

6 What do you like doing best on holiday? Why?

1

L

3

4

5

b)

b)

4

a)

,l{,i ?eter,J,m havíng a 7reať tíme, We,re

stayíng ať a sufer hotef ín the

míííft of the hift, ťflere,s bts to

ío here. ,|4)e,ye

6een frere for a weeÉ,

aní,l,ve yfayed tennís anc[ swum

every day sínce we arríyeí, 1,ye a[so

rídc{en a mo7eí rwíce! 1t,s the fírsttíme 1'ye ever rídíen a moyeí, ťwodays ago we went rc the nearby

town tO do some síg|tseeíng,

Ťo-orro* we,re goíng on a coacr.L

tríy to see 50n1e cayes,

See you soon. tsarbara

TEST 1, READING PART 2 XXI

) strategy

1 Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.

1 How many sentences are there?2 What are the sentences about?3 What do you have to read?

4 What do you have to decide?5 When do you mark A on youÍ ans\^/er sheet?

6 When do you mark B on your answer sheet?

2 Read Sentences 11*20 to get a goodidea what the text is about.

Match the sentences to the following topics.a) places to stayb) how the day isc) cancellationsd) what happense) what you needf) when to payg) when they are openh) staff qualificationsi) method of payment

i) who the courses are suitable for

3 Read the text to Íind the informationyou need.

For each sentence (11-20)' mark the part oÍ thetext where you think the answer is. The Íirst twoare done for you.

Look at the sentences again.Compare them with your underlined text.Decide whether the sentence is correct orincorrect.

. Mark your answer on your ansv/er sheet.

i. EXO6 tip! ... o.................. o....I You don't need to understand every word in the :3 text to answer the questions. Some parts of the :i text aren't tested, so don't worry about them. :!aaaaaaa a aaa aaaa a a aaa aaao aaa aaaaaaaaaaa a

17

organised

if it rainsto take

4a

a

Part 3

Questions 1't-20

Look at the sentences below about a companywhich organises sports camps.Read the text on the opposite page to decideif each sentence is correct or incorrect.lf it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet.lf it is not correct, mark B on your answersheet.

11 Some centres are ooen all winter.

12 The activities available depend onweather.

Action Sports Camps courses areunsuitable for people who are excellent atsport.

You need to have your own sportsequipment.

Children and adults spend some timetogether each day.

16 Some of the staff are unoualified.

17 Action Sports Camps only recommendaccommodation of a high quality.

You have to pay the tota| Íee one monthafter you book.

Action Sports Camps charge you more if

you pay with your credit card.

|f you cance| three weeks beÍore yourcamp, you will get half your money back.

the

13

14

15

18

19

20

Xř1X TEST 1, READING PART 3

Action Sports Camps

fi ction Sports Camps provide activity holidays forAchildren aged over five and adults. We offertraining in over twenty sports at ten differentcentres throughout the UK. All the centres areopen from April until October, and some openduring the winter for weekend courses. The sportsoffered differ from one centre to anothel so if you

want to do something in particulal you should checkour colour brochure.

The camps are not just limited to outdoor sports - we cover a wide range of indooractivities as well. So if the rain comes, the camps continue, although you may have to takeoff your football boots and pick up a squash racket instead. With the experience we'vegained over the years, we put together the right mix of sport and activities providing sportfor all, not just for those who are brilliant at athletics. lt is unnecessary to bring any

equipment because it is all provided.

We work in small groups, children working with others of their own age, but we do all

come together for social activities and meals. So different members of a family can make

their own individual choices, but they get a chance to exchange their experiences later on.

Our centres offer first-class accommodation, food and facilities - and the staff are first-class

too. Qualified teachers or professionals receive training from us, and many work with us

year after year. We always employ qualified staff for activities such as swimming,

trampolining and gymnastics, but some of the assistants organising the children's games are

students, many of whom came to the camp themselves when they were younger.

At most of our centres, accommodation is in a hostel or tents. lt is not possible for us toarrange other accommodation, but we can send you a list of what is available in the area.

Most of the places are recommended to us, but not all, so we are not responsible for thequality of the accommodation on this list. Luxury accommodation is not available near

our camps.

To book a place at a sports camp, complete the form and send it with a cheque for thedeposit to the address below. The rest of the fee can be paid at any time, but we must

receive it at least one month before your camp. Please note, to keep costs down, you are

charged 2.5o/o extra by us if you pay with your credit card. You will receive a letter ofconfirmation within ten days of sending your form. Cancellations made up to a monthbefore the camp are refunded in full apart from a 5% administration fee. Fifty per cent ofthe fee is refunded if a cancellation is made up to two weeks before the date of the camp.

After that, no refunds can be given.

TEST 1, READING PART 3 WW

1

a)

0

1

aL

3

b)

Vocabulary: negative adjectives

Look at Sentence 13 from page 14.

Action Sports Camps courses are unsuitable for peoplewho are excellent at sports.

Unsuitable means the same as not suitable.

So, Courses are unsuitable for ...

= Courses aren't suitable for ...

Rewrite these sentences using the negative formoÍ the underlined adjective. You wil| need to use:im-, in- and un-.

It isn't necessary to bring equipment..!!l s..q.r,.q.e p p ?.q a N. .T<a. .?.ti n q. a %vi W ar!,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . ......

Some of the staff aren't qualified.

It isn't possiblc for us to arrange otheraccommodation.

Luxury accommodation isn't available near ourcamps.

4 Some of the other guests weren't tidy people.

5 It isn't safe to go on a boat if you can't swim.

6 His ans\ /er v/asn't correct.

Vocabulary: words with similar meanings

ln Part 3, lhe sentences oÍten contain words and

phrases which are diÍÍetent Írom those in the text but

which have similar meanings.

Look at the words in bold in Sentence 20. Theymean the same as one word in the text.

Sentence 20: If you cancel three weeks before yourcamp, you will get half your money back.

Text: Cancellations made up to a month before the

camp are refunded ...

b) Use a word or phrase from the box to replaceone word in each Sentence 1-8 withoutchanging the meaning.

advises book closed employees fill inless expensive not allowed pteas,a*ttake back

6

7

8

v|eaeanŤ,There are several nice parks in the city.

The schools are shut at weekends.

All the staff had a pay rise last month.Don't forget to return your library book whenyou're in town.The concert is going to be very popular so weshould reserve seats.

The CDs in the supermarket are cheaper than theones in the music shop.Drivers are forbidden to stop on the motor\ /ay.

Please complete this form using a pencil, not a pen.

The college recommends that students shouldapply early for popular courses.

Grammar: the passive

Look at Sentence 19 from page í4. How do weÍorm the passive?Sentence I9:. Action Sports Camps charge you moreif you pay with your credit card.

Text: You are charged 2.5o/o extra by us if you paywith your credit card.

Rewrite these sentences using the words given.

This pop festival \/as recommended to me by mybrother.My b roth e r r.q 9 9.Y.||.9.M.e l. ý' hjg .

p g?.'! egliy. a! .!.q. .r,,q .

Bands from all over the world are invited.The organisers .............

Every year the festival is attended by at least10,000 people.At least 10,000 people

3

a)

b)

0

a)

Xm TEsr 1, READTNG PART 3

c)

Tickets are sold at our local music shop.

Our local music shop ..........

But I was given a ticket by my friend.But my friendI was also offered a lift in his car.

He also

Now rewrite these sentences using the wordsgiven. Put the verb into the passive and decideif you need to use by.

A man told us where to put our tent.We............The campsite o\ /ner provided water for cooking.Water for cookingIt rained, but the bad weather didn't spoil ourweekend.It rained, but our weekendThe organisers asked us to take all our rubbishaway with us.

We............The people in the next tent woke us up too early.

We............

Vocabulary: sports

Put the letters in the right order and label thepictures. Write on the line provided.

sentin blate signial gwsndifuni blicgnmilblyavlelo erohs-idgnri

M'

b) Match one piece oÍ equipment Írom the box toeach sport pictured ln Exercise 4aand write iton the line provided.

boat rope board bat net hat

c) You are going on an activity holiday. Which threeof the sports in the pictures would you chooseto do on holiday? Why?

Speaking: your experiences

Look at the table below. Tick the boxes to showwhich of these adjectives you could use todescribe staff, accommodation, activities andweather. The first one is done for you.

b) Which of the adjectives above can you makenegative by using un-? Write them here.

c) Now work with a partner.You both recently wenton a different activity holiday. Compare yourexperiences. Use the language in the table aboveto help you.

Student A: You had a great time.

5

a)

4

a)

staff accommodation activities weather

boring

cold

comfortable

\ rarm

helpful

interesting

ralny

sunny

friendly

The acŤiviŤiee were rea||yinŤereet.inq. You cou|d qoeailinq and climbing.

Student B: Your camp \ /as awful.

AL my camv,Ť,hea cŤiviti es w er e b o rin q.

TEST 1, READING PART 3 nrnn

) str"tesy

1

2

3

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposlte.What do you have to read?

What do you have to do?

Where do you mark your answers?

Read the text quickly to get a goodidea oÍ what it is aboÚt.What sort of work does the writer do?

Where does he work?Does he \ /ant to change his life?

1

2

3

3 Read Questions 21-25,

It is important to understand the questionsbefore reading the text in more detail.This exercise will help vou to think aboutthe questions.

Underline the best word or phrase to completeeach sentence.

1 Question 21 asks about whenlwhylwhere thewriter wrote the text. (This is always ageneral question.)

2 Question 22 asks about the writer's

feelingslplanslknowledge. (This is always a

question about detail or opinion.)3 Question 23 asks about the writer's

picture s I conver s ations I thoughts. (This is alwaysa question about detail or opinion.)

4 Question 24 asks about what the writer hopes

to dolusually doeslused ťo do. (This is always aquestion about detail or opinion.)

5 Question 25 asks about what the writer willAolmight dolhas done. (This is always ageneral question.)

4 Read the text and answer Questions21-25.

. Read the text again more carefully.

. Choose the correct answer for each question.

. Mark youÍ anSWerS on youl ansvřer sheet.

.. EXO6 tiD! ... o o. . o......... o. o. o.. ...ara

! Questions zr and 25 are always about the whole !3 text. Don't try to answer them by looking at the :i beginning and end of the text only!

:

Part 4

Questions 21-25

Read the text and questions below.For each question, mark the correct letterA, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

The ArtistPeople think being an artist must be awonderful way to earn one's living. And ofcoufse, there are lots of great things aboutworking for oneself, at home alone, even ina cold studio like mine.W-hatI really like isthat nobody tells me what time to start inthe morning.I like to paint as soon as I wakeup, which is always early, but isn't the same

time every day. And nobody tells me whatto weat or whether I can take the afternoonoff and go to a football match.

But then,I have no one to chat with whenI'm bored, no one to discuss last night'smatch with during the office lunch hour.Sure,I can spend the afternoon doingsomething I enioy like cycling or gardeningif I choose. But the work will still be therewhen I do finally get back home.

Uďortunately, working at home means thatpeople can always find me , whether I'mbored or not, and once I've answered thedoorbell, it's too late - my thoughts have beeninterrupted. No one would dream of callingin if I worked in an office, but I find myselflistening to friends'troubles. As they talk, myideas disappear and I feel increasingly stressed

thinking of my work waiting to be done.

However, when I hear the traffic news oÍlthe radio, and imagine my friends sittingmiserably in their cars in a jam,feeling bored,or waiting unhappily for an overcrowdedtram in the rain,I realise that I really haven'tgot much to complain about.I find a CDwhich will start me thinking, turn it up really'loudly and begin another picture.

XreX rEsr 1, READTNG PART 4

21 What is the writer trying to do in the text? 25 Which oÍ these notices wou|d be most

A encourage readers to work at home

B explain why he has changed his job

C describe his working |iÍe

D say how he would like to work

useÍuI for the writer to out on his door?

A|,m Wo rkíngpLeose don't

dist urb

22 What does the writer like about his life?

A He has plenty of opportunities for sport. B

B He is his own boss.

C He needn't work in the morning.

D He has a comfortable place to work.

Please ca// at ruyofftce. for a,aPť0íntruent

29 What does the writer imagine he might do C

with colleagues?

A have meals in restaurants

B go to the swimming pool

C spend time in the countryside

D talk about sport

PXemxe kmwekbeřorg ěm&eř&xxw

24 The writer plays loud music because

A the traffic outside is noisy.

B it helos him to have ideas.

C it prevents him from Íee|ing bored.

D he dislikes listenino to the radio.

NO ITISITOIISAILOIYIID DIJITING

0trlrICB n0l]lts

TEST 1, READING PART 4 WW

1 Language focus: feelings

ln the text on page 18, the writer says what he likesand dislikes about his liÍe. Which oÍ these phrasesÍrom the text are about feeling good (+) and whichare about Íeeling bad (-)?0 a wonderful way to earn one's living

1 lots of great things2 What I really like is

3 when I'm bored4 doing something I enjoy5 Unfortunately6 it's too late7 I feel increasingly stressed

B sitting miserably9 waiting unhappily

10 I haven't got much to complain about

3 Functions: giving opinionsri*,.l$r Extra Language for the Speaking Test, Section16, page 167

a) Read these conversations. Who do youagree with?

2 Grammar: expressions with -mg

Here are some more ways you can say what youthink or Íee|. They can a|l be Íol|owed by the -ingÍorm of the verb. Complete the sentences withinÍormation about yourself.

1 I really like ............

2 I don't enjoy

c)

b)

3 I often spend the evening

I really like reading novels. What about you?I like doing that too.Do you really? I don't! I prefer watchingfootball on TV.

I don't enjoy doing tests.

No, neither do I.

I do. I'm good at tests.

I hate getting up early.

So do I.

Me too.

I really enjoy playing computer games.Do you?Not much. But I like watching films.Yes, I do too.

1

Ann:

Jon:Sam:

zMary:Peter:

Jane:

a.)

Joe:Bob:

Kate:

4

Micky:

Shirley:Micky:

4 I'm looking forward to ..............

Work with a partner. Compare the things youwrote in Exercise 2. Use the language inExercise 3a.

Tell the class which things you and your partneragree about and which you disagree about.

5 I hate

6 I'm bored with

7 I sometimes worry about

8 I'm ouite keen on ............"

9 I really dislike

10 I feel very happy about

Oabriella really likeeewimminq' buL I don,Ťland eo do l.

Nick doeen'Ť enjoy doinqmaÍhe, and' neiŤher do |/

but.l do.

W TEST 1, READING PART 4

4 Vocabulary: jobs

ln the exam, you oÍ|en have to read, wrile ot speakaboul iobs.

a) Write the names of the jobs under the pictures.

b) Match each job í-6 with a verb and a noun fromthe box. Use them to write a sentence about the

iob.

Verbscook d€+j+e+ design play Serve Scole

Nounsbuildings records CuStomeIS goals pa{€ebmeals

A p o st m anl wo m a n .... d.e)iv.e.ra . p. a rQ.Q.l.q,

A shop assistantA disc jockeyA chefA footballer ................

An architect ................

Can you make sentences about these jobs?

actor pilot manager dentist detectivedoctor farmer firefighter hairdresser

iournalist lawJzer librarian nursepolice officer model bank clerk

Speaking: jobs

Discuss these questions.Have you got a job or aÍe you a student?

What job do you do?/What job would you liketo do? Why?

b) Work with a partner.

Student A: Choose a job from Exercise 4. Don'ttell your partner which one. Imagine what you doevery day.

Student B: You have to find out what job yourpaÍtner does. Think of some questions to ask. Youcan use the ideas below to help you. How quicklycan you guess your partner's job?o what time/get up?o how many hours/spend at work?o best/worst thing aboutljob?o wear/uniform?o travel?o well/badly paid?Wc) Now change roles.

1

z3

4

5

6

c)

5

a)

1

aL

r,ld,r\lr t\.:-!ca-)-

TEST 1, READING PART 4 w

nTunntr

3 Read the text quickly and check yourguesses.

Don,t vioÍry about the numbered spaces fornow. Which of your guesses were correct?

4 Look at the example (0) and read thesentence of the text careÍuIIy.

1 What is the answer to the example?

2 Why are the other answers not possible?

5 Look at Questions 26*35 and choosethe answers for lhe ones you are certainabout.

For each question:. read the whole of the sentence which

contains the space. write the word you choose in the space

- it may help you to understand the text.

.. EXO6 tip! .. o o.. ......... .. . ... o o. ...3 Look carefully at the words after each space as :I well as the words before it. The word you need :! must fit the grammar of the space as well as :

:.:t:.T:::::'.... .... ......... ....... .. I

6 Go back and guess the other answers.

7 Check your work.When you have finished, read the text again allthe way through. Do your answers make sense?

I Mark your answers on your answersheet.

Check that you have put them in the rightplace.

1asea1d .aur ro; p€oJ aq} Jo arupu aq1 11ads noÁ ue3 l

ZuI ]€q} sI ppoJ qJIqM 9

Za}IJno^PJ rnoÁ sr doqs ql1q14 s

28u1ddoqs o3 Á1pnsn no.{ op alaqM Ý

ZuI leq} st Á}r: eq} Jo ued teq^^ t2a'rq noÁ op aJaqM Z

Zau]Pu rnoÁ s.1eq14 l

.suousanb aseq} Jauued rnoÁ {se ,V ]uapn]s

$v a8aď) >lsDJ uuXI ,L uu(I&ut>pad;

) str"tesy1 Read the instructions to the Exam Task on

the opposite page.

1 What do you have to read?

2 What do you have to choose?

3 Where do you mark your answers?

2 Look at the title of the text and makeguesses about the text.

Can you guess what you will learn about thebook? Tick three questions you think you willÍind answers to.

1 When was it written?2 Is it fiction or non-fiction?3 How many pages does it have?

4 Why does the reviewer like it?5 Are there any pictures in it?6 What is it about?

Íirst

&&X rEST 1, READTNG PART 5

Part 5

Questions 26-35

Read the text below and choose the correct word for each space.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Example:

0 A enjoyed B oleased C amused D delighted

Answer: nlA B C D-l-

A BOOI( I RECOMMEND

I found Escape from Time byAndyTreen very exciting and I really (0) .............. reading

it.It's a story (26) .............. a boy calledTroy who goes on a journey to (27).............. for

his friend Zyra.It 'wasn't what I had expected, although I am interested (28)

science fiction.I ťhought this stofy worrld be like films I had seen, but I (29)

aÍter a few pages that it was (30) interesting than a film.

Troy goes to many places and times. He (31) his knowledge with different

(32) .............. of people and learns new skills from them.Then he moves on.The last

part of the book (33) .............. the meeting betweenTroy and Zyrawhet they are both

caught by some space criminals from the future. But that's enough information from

me (34) I don't want to spoil it for you.It's really quite (35) .............. , too,

with some excellent jokes about time travel in it.

26 A from

27 A ask

28Aby29 A explained

30 A even

31 A divides

32 A kinds

33 A shows

34 A when

35 A Íunny

B about

B follow

B with

B realised

B more

B joins

B variety

B discovers

B because

B sad

ConC look

coÍC showed

C much

C shares

C range

C describes

ciÍC shocking

D with

D find

DinD believed

D too

D adds

D qualities

D says

D unless

D frightening

TEST 1, READING PART 5 WX

1 Vocabulary: similar meanings

Part 5 tgsts words which look similar or have similarmeanings.

Questions 30, 31 ,32 and the example on page 23all contain words with similar meanings, but onlyone word is right.Read these sentences. Choose the word whichbest fits each space. You can use youř dictionaryto help you.

0 This story is about a murder. It's toofor small children.A fearful B nervous C afraid D frightenin

1 This old book belongs to my father. He says it'sinteresting, but it's very boring, in myA opinion B thought C idea D feeling

2 There weren't enough computers for everyone inthe class to have one. so thev had to .......... witheach other.

A divide B join C add D share

3 Good dictionaries aren't cheap. How much didyou .......... on your new one?A spend B buy C charge D pay

4 I enjoy reading all kinds of stories. We have tolearn a lot of facts at school, so I readwhenlwantachange.A novel B thriller C fiction D adventure

5 I work hard every day, so I need a change in theevening. Going to the cinema with friends is agreat \/ay to .......... .

A rest B relax C enjoy D entertain6 Teaching isn't as easy as it looks. You have to do

a .......... CouÍSe before you Can work as a teacher.

A study B training C learning D practice7 I promised to phone my friend tonight, so I

mustn't forget. Please me to phone himtonight.A remember B revise C report D remind

8 Our teacher encouraged us to study at home.She .......... us to read more books.A told B talked C said D spoke

9 My sister enjoys travelling round differentcountries. She is going on a .......... of Scotlandthis summer.A journey B voyage C tour D trip

10 You had to wait for us/ so you're annoyed. We'relate because the train was cancelled, it's not our

A problem B mistake C fault D cause

2 Grammar: comparative forms

Reading Par| 5 and Writing Part 1 oÍten test ways oÍ

making comparisons.

a) Look at these ways of making comparisons.Complete each sentence with the correct word.

1 My new music teacher is friendlier .......... mylast one.

2 I love going to the cinema. I wish I could gooften.

3 The film about the robbery wasn't excitingthe book.

4 Paul's new motorbike was expensivemine because it has a smaller engine.

5 She doesn't like Chinese food as .......... as I do.

b) Complete these sentences so that they meanthe same as the ones above, using no morethan three words.

1 My previous music teacher was ..................... mynew one.

2 I can't go to the cinema .. I'd like to.

3 The book about the robbery was ..................... thefilm.

4 My motorbike \ /as ........... Paul's because ithas a bigger engine.

5 I like Chinese food .......... she does.

3 Grammarl. too/very/enough;so/such ... that

These words are used lo say how much?

a) Complete the sentences with foo, very oÍenough.

1 The test \ /as difficult, but I passed it.

2 The test \ /as difficult, and I failed.3 This suitcase is .......... small for all the clothes

I want to take.

4 The swimming pool isn't big .......... forinternational competitions.

5 I haven't got .......... money to buy a new coat.

ng TEsr 1, READTNG PART s

b)

1

z.1

ÁŤ

5

Match the sentence halves.It's so hot in here thatThe programme \ /as so boring thatMy cousin walks so fast thatIt was such hot weather thatShe is such a bossy person that

b) Work with a partner. Can you guess what typesof books these are?

Useful languageIt could be .../It's probably ... because ...

I think it might be ...

I don't think it's ... because ...

1

2

3

Speaking: books and magazines

Think about the following questions. When youare ready, discuss the questions with a pařtner.

What kind of books do you have to read? Why?Do you prefer reading books or magazines? Why?Do you ever read books or magazines about films?

Useful languageFor school, I have to read books about ...

I prefer reading ...

I'm not very keen on ...

I'm very interested in ...

I enjoy finding out about ...

I like the kind of magazines which ...

b) Think about a book you have read recently. Askand answer questions about each other's book.Use these questions to help you.

What sort of book is it?What is it about?Why did you choose it?What did you like about it?What didn't you like about it?

a) I have to run when I'm with her.

b) nobody wants to be friends with her.

c) we couldn't study.

d) I feel very sleepy.

e) I switched it off.

c) Complete the second sentence so that itmeans the same as the Íirst, using no morethan three words.

1 That bike is too expensive for me to buy.

I haven't got............ ........ to buythat bike.

2 The film was very good, and I'd like to see itagain.The film \/as ........... that I'dlike to see it again.The students made such a lot of noise. They hadto leave the café.

The students \/ere .. thatthey had to leave the café.

This coat is very \ /arm. I don't want to wear itin the summer.

This coat is ............... ...... to wear inthe summer.The music is very quiet. I can't hear it.

The music isn't .......... for meto hear it.

Vocabulary: books

Look at these kinds of books. For each one,decide if it is fiction or non-Íiction' Write F or

I

Z

.)

4

5

6

7

8o

NF next to each book.a science-fiction story

a cookery booka romantic novela book about sporta travel booka historical novela book about animalsa horror storya history booka detective story

5

a)

4

a)

o

a

a

a

a

TESr 1, READTNG PARr 5 WW

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskbelow.How many sentences are there?What are the sentences about?What do you have to do?How many words can you use?

Where do you write your answers?How much do you write there?Where can you do your rough work?

Compare the two sentences in theexample.Read the first sentence. What information doesit give you about the guesthouse?

Now read the second sentence. Does it give youthe same information as the first sentence?

Answer Question 1.

Read the first sentence. What information doesit give you about the guesthouse?Now read the beginning and end of the secondsentence. How does it begin? How does it end?How can you complete it? Write your ans\ /er.

4 Check your answer.o Does your sentence give the same information

as the first sentence?. Is the 8Íammal correct?. How many words have you used?

5 Answer the other questions in the sameway.

Write the answers to Questions 2-5 on youransweř sheet.

Remember: you can write your answers onthe exam papeÍ first if you wish and thencopy them.

.. EXO6 tip! ....... o...................! ln this part of the exam, you will lose marks if :i your grammar is not correct. lf you are not sure :i about your answer, write it on the exam paper :! first and read it carefully before you copy it onto :

! Vout answer sheet.aaa

) st."tesy

1

21J

4

5

67

31

aaaa oa a a a aaaa aaa a a aa a laoa aa a aooa a o a a aa

Part í 1 The guesthouse is called'Sunshine Cottage'.

The name ..... is'Sunshine Cottage'.

Questions 1-5

Here are some sentences about a guesthouse. 2 | haven't stayed here before.

For each question, complete the second This is the first time that ........ here.sentence so that it means the same as the first.Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer 3 | was told about it by my sister.sheet.You may use this page Íor any rough work. My sister about it,

Example:4 lt is essential to book your room in advance.

0 There is a games room in this guesthouse. you ........... .... your room in advance.This guesthouse a games room.

Answer: F-l-;a5 My room is bigger than my friend's room.

My friend's room isn't ...... my room.

resx TEST 1. WRITING PART 1

a)

Grammar: matching patterns

ln Part 1, the same gÍammaÍ pal|erns are oÍten lested.

It is a good idea to study these patlerns so that you

can recognise them.

Read the twelve sentences below. Find the sixpairs which have similar meanings.

1 Her name is Jane.2 I was told the news by Jane.3 It was essential to talk to Tane about

the news.

4 I haven't met Jane before.

5 I had to talk to Jane about the news.

6 Jane is taller than me.

7 She is called Jane.8 Jane told me about the news.

9 This is the first time I've met Jane.10 There are twenty people in Jane's class.

11 I'm not as tall as Jane.12 Jane's class has t\/enty students.

b) Match each pair of sentences above with thesepatterns.

0 ... ls calleci... ) ... name is ... .....1.... and

a) Itwas + adjective + modal verb ......... and

b) I haven't ... before ) This is the

firsttime ... ......... and

comparrsonactive verb + passive verb

there is/are > has/have

c) Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first, using no more than threewords.

1 It isn't necessary to pay if you are a student.

You.......... .... if you are a student.

2 Alana was given a moped by her parents.

Alana's parents a moped.

3 It's a good idea to rest until your leg is better.

You .......... .... until your leg is better.

This is the first time I've been to a nightclub.I .............. to a nightclub before.

There are lots of CDs in the library.

The library lots of CDs.

The bus was delayed by an accident.

An accident.............. the bus.

The name of the singer was Dermot.The singer Dermot.There aren't any good clothes shops in this town.

This town any good clothesshops.

My new computeÍ is smaller and lighter thanmy old one.My old computer was bigger and

than my ne\ / one.

This book is more interesting than that one.

That book isn't ......... ..... that one.

2 Correcting mistakes

Read these pairs of sentences.There is a mistakein the second sentence of each pair. Can youcorrect it?0 He is called Robert.

i-l3

Hie name M Kobert.

1 This car is too small for mv familv.

Thie car ien'N enouqh biq for my family.

2 That factory is owned by my uncle.

My unc|e ie owned ŤhaŤ f actory,

3 The town has several pleasant parks.

There ig eevera| p|eaeanŤ parks in Ťhe town,

4 I haven,t visited an internet café before.

Íhie ie Ťhe firgŤ, Ť,ime |,m vigiŤinq an inŤernetcafé,

5 It isn't necessary to book a ticket for this show.

You mugŤ,n,Ť' book a lickeŤ, for Ť,hie ghow.

10

d)

e)

......... and

......... and

......... and

TEsr 1, wRrrrNG PART 1 Xm

Part 2

Question 6

An English friend of yours called Charlie hasinvited you to go clubbing next Saturday, butyou can't go.

Write an e-mail to Charlie. In your e-mail, youshould

. thank him for inviting youo tell him you can't go. suggest meeting another time.

Write 35-45 words on vour answer sheet.

) str"tesyÍ Read the instructions to the Exam Task

opposite.1 What are you going to write?2 Who are you writing to?3 How many things must you write about?4 How many words must you write?5 Where do you write your answer?

2 Planning your answer

BeÍore you begin to write, look at the words in theinstructions. Mark the words that tell you whatinformation you should include. Think about whatextra information you can add.

1 What has your friend invited you to do?2 When?3 How will you start your e-mail?4 Wtty can't you go?

5 Where will you suggest meeting? When?

3 Writing your answer

Read the e-mails A, B and C opposite.

1 Which is the best ansr4/er to the task? Why?2 What is wrong with the other two answers?

4 Checking and correcting your work

a) Read this e-mail. lt has eight grammarmistakes. Flnd and underline the mistakes.

b) Work with a partner and compare the mistakesyou Íound. Correct the mlstakes together.

A Dear Charlie

I'm inviting you to go clubbing with me nextSaturday. I hope you can come, but please tellme if you can't. If I don't see you on Saturday,we could meet another day. Are you free onFriday?

Sara

Dear Charlie

Thank you for inviting me to go clubbing withyou next Saturday. I'm sorry, but I can't gobecause I'm going to Edinburgh for theweekend with my cousins. I'd like to see younext week, Are you free on Monday evening?

Ivana

Dear Charlie

I can't come clubbing with you on Saturday.Can we meet another time? I am free onTuesday. We cou|d go to a café.

Patricia

B

c

Dear Sv|vÍeThank you for asking me coming with you to the citycentre on Tuesday. I sorry, but I can't come becauseI go to the dentist this afternoon. What about wemeet on another time? Do you like to go the Fridayafternoon ?

mW rEsr 1, wRrrrNG PART 2

a)

1

L

3ÁŤ

Grammar: future plans

ln Part 2, you oÍten write about p|ans. lt is important

to use the correct tense Íorms.

Read Sentences 1-4 and match the verb formsto the descriptions in the box.

We're visiting France next summer.

The football match starts at 3 p.m.

I'm going to cook a meal for my friend tonight.I'11 have a coffee, please.

A We use present simple for fixed events in atimetable.

B We use present continuous or going tofor personal plans.

C We use will when we decide as we speak.

b) Underline the best form oÍ the verb in thesesentences.

1 I have to go to the station to meet my friend. Hertrain arivesl's arriving at 6.45.

2 A: Do you \ /ant anything to eat?

B: Yes, I'm going to havell'il have an apple, thanks.

3 I meetl'm meeting my friends for coffee nextSaturday afternoon. Would you like to come?

4 We're not going to catchldon't catch the traintomorro\ / because my father's lending us the car.

5 Our course is finishinglftnishes tomorrow, so \,rr'e're

planning a party.

6 A: I've got terrible toothache!B: Oh, deal have you? I'm going to phone I I'll

phone the dentist for you.

7 I'm not sure whatl'm going to doldo when I finishmy course. But I,m not getÍingldon,t get a jobimmediately.

2 Function: different kinds of messages

Look at lnstructions 1-9 and match them to thesentences a)-i) below.

ln Writing Part 2, the instructions tell you to write

diÍÍerent kinds oÍ messages.

1 accept an invitation2 apologise for something you didn't do

3 arrange to meet someone somewhere

4 ask someone to do something for you

7

8

say you can't do something withsomeone and explain whyinvite someone to do somethingwith youthank someone and refuse an invitationsuggest that someone should dosomething

9 tell someone how to do something

a) Unfortunately I can't go swimming with youbecause I have to revise for an exam.

b) I can see you at half past ten outside the library.

c) You need to go the ticket office and show themyour student card in order to get a discount.

d) I'm really sorry I forgot to post your card.

e) Would you like to come to a concert with usnext month?

0 I think you'd better phone the college and askfor more information.

g) I'd love to come to New York with you.

h) I'm sorry I won't be able to come to your party,but thank you for inviting me.

i) Could you possibly collect my jacket from thedry cleaners?

3 ExamTásk

a) Now write your answer to this question.

An English friend of yours called Hannah isvisiting your to\ /n on Saturday. Write an e-mailto Hannah. In your e-mail, you shouldo invite Hannah to meet you. arrange where you will meet. ask what time she is arriving.Write 35-45 words on your ans\/er sheet.

b) When you have finished, check your workcarefully.

. Have you included all the information?o Have you written no more than 45 words?. Is your Srammar correct?. Is your spelling correct?

TEST 1, WRITING PART 2 W

) str"tesy1 Read the instructions to Part 3 opposite.1 How many questions do you answer?

2 How many words do you write?3 Where do you write your answer?4 Where do you put the question number?

) Stt"tegyr letter

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.Who are you going to write to?What does your penfriend ask you to writeabout?

3 Where must you write your answer?

2 Planning your answer

a) Write down three ideas for your Ietter.

Example:shoPP//1,

.

c /,,bb;lÍ

f oa./ba// ),:

b) Write down five useful words and phrases touse ln your letter.

Example:- C,f C€n/t€ca{<c

in ./Áe ,elellill7

I Jotl,Ť et|o/t:rt SttnJays

In Part 3 there arean informal letterONE task only.

two writing tasks:and a story. You answer

c) Decide how your answer will begin and end.Match the sentence halves.

1 Thank you very much2 I hope3 It was great

4 Write back soon5 I'm looking forward to6 I've just read

a) hearing about your hobbies.

b) and tell me what you like doing.c) your interesting letter.

d) to get your letter.

e) for your letter.

f) you'll write back soon.

d) Which three sentences can you use at thebeginning oÍ a |etter? Which three sentencescan you use at the end of the letter?

3 Writing your letter

Read Answers A and B to Question 7 opposite.

1 Which letter has unnecessary information?2 Which letter is the right length?3 Which letter has a good beginning?4 Which letter copies whole sentences from the

question?5 Which letter answers all parts of the question?6 Which is the best answer?7 Can you find three grammar mistakes in

Letter B?

4 Checking and correcting your work

Work with a partner and compare the mistakesyou Íound. Correct the mistakes together.

i. EXO6 tip! .. o... .. .. .. o e. ........ . ...i Check that you give all the information you are :! asked for. :

1

2

2aseald.aul lo; ppoJ aq} Jo alueu aq1 11ads noÁ ue3

Zur looqJs rnoÁ sr pPoJ }€qM

21ou Áq672Áq,14 1qst13ug 8u{pn1s ÁoÍua noÁ oqaqs113ug palpn]s noÁ a'req 3uo1'r'l.o11

Zsuossel }re}s noÁ op JluI} }Pq14 g

ZIooqJs o} o3 noÁ op alaqM Z

Zau€u rnoÁ s.1eq,14 I

.suopsanb asaq} Jauued rnoÁ {sP ,fl ]uepn}s

$v a?od) \SaI uDXg ,[ ]nď 3ut4aad3

L

9

b

rex TEST 1, WRITING PART 3

Part 3Write an answer to one of the questions (7 or 8) in this part.

Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet.

Question 7

o This is part of a Ietter you receive Írom an EngIish penfriend.

lnyour next /ette4 p/ease tel/ me about whatyou /ike doing in

yo"r |ťree ttme. Do you stay at home or doyo, /ike yin7 out?

a

Now write a letter, telling your penfriend what you like doing.

Write your Ietter on your answer sheet.

BADear Max

we don)t /o that.go swin^Yr^ing When

ř:ea'r 7uJirÁ

Tha,lK /au /€f/ nucÁ for your/eŤ.fer' IŤ úas lreaŤ ÁearÍtl| abouŤ

/c,ctr Ác,bbies. Ýo,t u'la/?Ť Ťo Ltlc,ul ,'haŤI /i,te JoirtX in n/ free ltne.t,l)1://, { /",',e 7oill7 c,uŤ *ilÁ frtenJs.J JonŤ en)Ó/ slz.t/ a.Ť hc'n€, U/)

Scrt.ur,lays 1 u)€ ofren 2o Ťo lÁe ci.t.7

cenŤre anJ /Č'c,,L arou,1J lÁe sÁoys,y'Áen *e 3o t'o lÁe 1:ar,( anJ Aavea.,,l ice Čr€(1'/),t, TÁere,s café in lheparK uÁicÁ ;s rea//7 qooJ' o,l lÁeelenin7 ul€ 5olll€y'7ÚI€s ,c, c/ubbitlx,

Crt SurtJays t p,/ay fc,c,,rea// ifÍ,u ,loŤ Ťoo ŤireJ,

P/ease ulriŤ€ brlcK sČ,o/),

lovtePie /rc

sWirrnrrning, h^tSovnetivrnes 1

L VroTe your'll write bac!- soov'T,ve been a* schoo| řoday and itv,las boving, I áon,t |ike Thursdaysbecalse vte do s7orŤ in therl*evwoon and t have to Tlayvalleyball. I'r'n not v".l tall, soI nevev get the ball. 1 Tvelev

I'vrn an holiday. 1 want to leavu todive next yeav. 1 like gaing out i{the weather is good and sitting inthe park with vny {riends. hle ca"''

buv ven qood 'tce creawt at theIl.)

ctlé,In yaur next letter,, please tell

vrne abaut what you like doing in,\t

Icl.liv Sree tivrne. Do you stay athovrne ov do your like going out?

Best wishesAora

TEsr 1, wRrrrNG PART 3 WXX

) st."tegy: story

1 Read the instructions to the Exam Taskbelow.

1 How must you begin your story?

2 Where must you write your answer?

2 Flanning your answerBefore Starting youÍ Stoly, it is important tomake a plan. Your story must be simple enoughto finish in about 100 words.

a) Write down some ideas Íor the story. Thinkabout these questions.

1 Who answered the telephone?2 Who was the call from?3 Why did she/he call so early in the morning?4 What did she/he say?

5 What happened next?

b) How will your story end? Think about thisquestion.

How did she/he feel?

c) Write down Íive useÍulwords and phrases tha|you can use in your story.

Examole: -/^^/??, ) /t/

erv./ler .,+f^r17l ('"le ) €XP€C ,.t€J

í'r ,.fa's 1ttic {/./ .t'.S ťc,5 S ib/<:

,€./ r €.\J/

3 Writing your storyRead Answers A and B to Question 8 on page 33.

1 Which story is better? Why?2 '\Nhy is the other story not so good?

3 Can you find five grammar mistakes in thatanswer?

4 Checklng and correcting your workWork with a partner and compare the mistakesyou Íound. correct the mistakes together.

i. EXO7 tip! ..... ... . . .... ... . . . . ......! tt is better to telt a simple story in correct :3 English. Don't try to write a complicated story :3 ttrat needs words you don't know. :

,aaaa!

Part 3

Question 8

Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

Your story must begin with this sentence:

At six o'clock in the morning, the telephone rang.

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

ffi TEST .I , WRITING PART 3

BA

At six o'cloch i.n the morning, the telephonerong. I wos veru sleepg becouse I'd been out todinner the night beJore.'Who's thot?' I soid.

'It's Azito. I'm ot the roilwog stotlon.'It wos mg sister. She wos home o dog eorlg

Jrom o job lnterview ln London.'OK, I'[[ get reodg os quicklg os possible ond

come to Jetch gou.' I told her.

White I wos drlving to the stotion, I reollsed

thot I hodn't oshed her obout the job. Butwhen I sow her, she looked so happg thot I

knew the onswer. I soid'Conqrotulotionsl'

At six ob/ock in the morning, the telephone rang.

It was mg brother Sami. 'Whok tltat?' t said.

He was at the airpoft.

'O/<, /'// fetch gou' I to/d. t was ./er! hrec/ because

/'d been in a party the nrght before. t got ready as

yickly as possible, While / hare c{riren to the

airport, t realised t/rat / had forgot to ask him about

his ínterview, He went to Park t'or a universitg

intervíew and had returned ear/3,

But he looked so hopp! ruhen / saw him that t

knew tlte answer 'Congratu/ations!'I said.

Grammar: narrative tenses

a) Read Sentences 1-8 and find examples of verbsto match the descriptions in the box.

1 At six o'clock in the morning, the telephonerang. I ran down the stairs.

2 While I was running down the stairs, I fell overthe cat.

3 When I reached the bottom of the stairs, thephone had stopped ringing.

4 But the noise had woken my baby brother, andhe was crying.

5 I was talking to him when the phone startedringing again!

6 I walked down the stairs carefully.

7 When I answered the phone, it was my friendTom.

8 I had completely forgotten that we had agreed togo fishing.

We use:

A past simple for a completed action in the past.

B past continuous for a continuous action inthe past.

C past continuous for an interrupted action inthe past.

D past perfect for an action completed beforeanother action in the past.

Put the verbs in brackets in the correct forms:past simple' past continuous or past peďect.

While I ................ ..... (walk) to thecity centre, L........... (see) an advertisement fora concert on Saturday.

A lot of other people ..............(already/see) the advertisement before me.

They ......... (stand) outside thetheatre when I ................ ..... (arrive)

there.We ............ ........ (wait) for a longtime.At last a man .. (come) outof the theatre and ........... ......... (put)

up a notice.They ......... (sell) all the ticketsfor Saturday!We ............ ........ (wait) so long that\/e............. ........ (feel) angry.

Why......... (not/tell) usearlier?

b)

TEST 1, WRITING PART 3 XSX

) Str"tegy: choosing your question

Read both the Exam Tasks below.Write down two ideas for your letter.

Write down five useful words or phrases thatyou can use in your letter.

Write down two ideas for your story.

Write down five useful words or phrases thatyou can use in your story.

Look at your notes. Which question is easierfor you?

Make a plan on your exam paper.

3 Write your answer.

1

a

a

a

a

2

4 Check and correct your work.

Question 7

r Does your letter have a good beginning andending?

o Have you answeÍed all parts of the question?. Have you used your o\ /n words (not copied

sentences from the question)?. Is your letter the right length?. Have you added unnecessary information?

Question 8o Is the story clear?o Is the story the right length?. Can you find any mistakes? Underline any

grammar mistakes and correct them.

.. EXO6 tiO! ... . ....... o.. ....... o... ..ara

3 Practise writing about roo words. You don't :! need to write exactly roo, but it is usefut to :

i . i::: :::: :::::::l:::::::':.'::: tj ]T. .,

Part 3Write an answer to one of the questions (7 or 8) in this part.

Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet.

Question 7

o This is part of a letter you receive from an English penfriend.

o Now write a letter, answering your penfriend's questions.

o Write your letter on your answer sheet.

Question Io Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must begin with this sentence:

I checked that my ticket was in my bag and locked the front door.

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

I went Ťo o greot concert |osŤ week wifh some friends. Do you ever go

to concerts ond do you co||ect CDs? Te|| me obout Ťhe musicions you |ike.

t&gx TEST 1, WBITING PART 3

) stratesy

1 t a Listen to the introduction to the test.1 How many parts does the Listening test have?2 How many times will you hear each part?3 Where do you write your answers?4 What will you do at the end of the test?5 How long will you have?

1

2

ó J Read and listen to the instructions ÍorPart 1 below.How many questions are there?How many pictures are there for eachquestion?What do you have to do?

ó J Look at the examp|e and listen to therecording.What is the question?What is the answer?How do you know?

1

z3

4

1

2

Look at Question 1. Think about whatyou are going to hear.What information must you listen for?Look at the three pictures. What differentways aÍe there of saying the times in picturesA, B and C?

3 Listen to the recording for Question 1.

Which of the times did you hear?4 Listen again and mark your ans\ /er.

5 Why is A wrong?6 Why is C wrong?7 Tď}:ry is B the coÍrect answer? What does

Paula say?

5 Do Questions 2-7 in the same way.

.. EXO6 tip! ............. o. o o..........! Use the pictures to help you. You can guess a 3

3 lot about what you are going to hear by tooking ::

:.::ti:::.............................r

2

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.Choose the correct picture and put atick({) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

cnITurn over

Aa Btr

TEST 1, LISTENING PART 1 WK

ffi ffi1 What time will Paula Pick Julie uP?

An2 What will they get first?

B c

Atr3 Where did the woman leave her keYs?

! c!

,ryffiň+

WffiAtl

4 What does the man decide to eat?

Btr cn

Atr BL_-]

5 What time is the woman's new appointment?

n

ffiAn

6 What was cancelled?

Btr ctr

A L_-] B

7 What did Jason enjoy doing on Saturday?

! ctl

ffi

lr:"7rŇ'\*12*-\4/

r'fiť{...iť;"-.._i}lt-\**i$' ffi

eX.W rEsr i, LlsrENlNG PART 1

a)

Vocabulary: word sets

ln Listening Parl 1, there is a range oÍ queslions about

diÍÍerent topics, so you need to revise the vocabularyyou know.

Work with a partner. Put the words in the boxinto groups. Decide what heading to give eachgroup of words. How many other words can youadd to each group?

neck cheque horse football credit cardsankle stomach duck tennis volleyballchicken purse wallet thumb swimmingshoulder sheep coin cycling turkey

b) Compare your lists with the rest of the class tosee who has the most words in each group.

Grammar: saying when things happen

Complete the sentences with a linking word fromthe box.

while during after before as soon as

u*til since

4

5

6

The film doesn't start .!r.f.?i1.. 8.15.

I want to get a film for my CameÍa in this shopwe're here.

We'll get the fruit last, .......... v/e've bought yourtrainers.We'll buy your trainers first, we get thefruit.It's hours we had lunch.It rained heavily the afternoon.We only just arrived in time. The coach left

we arrived.

Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first, using no more than threewords.Our train arrives at midnight.Our train doesn't arrivemidnight.The last train left hours ago.

It's hours .. the last trainleft.

When I arrive at the station, I'll phone my sisterimmediately.I'll phone my sisterI arrive at the station.We found a seat and then we went to thebuffet car.

We went to the buffet car .............finding a seat.

We couldn't get on the train until we'd shownour tickets.We had to show our ticketsi /e got on the train.

3 Speaking: habits and routines

$p Extra Language for the Speaking Test, Section 5,

page 160

a) Work in groups. Find out what time everyone:. gets upo has breakfasto has luncho arrives homeo goes to bed.

Example:

2

a)

0

1

b)

ffi\d;aÁ,,řlW:9 WgNow tell the class.Who gets up/goes to bed the latest/the earliest?Who has breakfast at the same time?Who has lunch before/after one o'clock?Who arrives home first/last?

b)

a

a

a

o

TEST i, LrsrENrNG PARr 1 &Xř

) str"tesy

1

L1J

4

5

6

7

ó J Read and listen to the instructions tothe Exam Task below.How many questions are there?Who will you hear?What will she talk about?Who is Robert?Who is Ben?What do you have to do?How many times will you hear the recording?

Read the questions and make guessesabout what you will hear.

Which oÍ the foI|owing points do you think thewoman will talk about? Put a tick next to them.

t how long the journey took2 how they prepared for the journey

3 problems on the journey

4 where they stopped

5 Robert's father

6 meeting other families7 what she is doing now

3 fi li"t"n to the recording the Íirst time.

a) Look at Question 8. Listen to what Vanessasays about last year and tick the correctanswer.

CLUE: What word that you hear means thesame as travel by boat?

b) Look at Question 9. Listen to what Vanessawas worried about. Tick the correct answer.

CLUE: What word does Vanessa use whichmeans the same as worried?

c) Now do Questlons 10-13 in the same way.

4 áJ li"t"n to the recording again.

Check the answers you have marked and tryto do any you missed the first time. |Í you stilldon't know, guess! Do not leave any questionsunanswered.

i. EXO7 tip! ...... .... ..... .. o........ .

! The questions always follow the same order :i as what you hear on the recording. Use the :I questions to help you understand the recording. !aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaaooaaaaaaaaa!

!!!!n!!

Part 2

Questions 8-13

You will hear a woman, Vanessa, talking about a journey she made with her husband,Robert, and her baby, Ben.For each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

8 What did Vanessa and Robert decide A get marriedto do last year? B travel to England by boat

C look for new jobs

!!!

9 Vanessa was worried that A they wouldn't be prepared.

B the conditions would be bad.

C the baby would get ill.

!n!

W TEST 1, LISTENING PART 2

10 How did Vanessa fee| when they reached A She wondered if she shou|d Í|y home.

singapore? B she was worried about the boat.

C She enjoyed the break from travelling.

11 Why was Vanessa's father-in-law particularly A He was a good cook.helpful? B He looked aÍter the baby.

C He heloed to sail the boat.

12 Because of spending so much time on the A learnt to walk late.

boat, the baby B doesn't play by himself.

C only likes certain food.

13 What is Vanessa's advice for people sailing A Don't take more than one child.

with chi|dren? B Go Íor a short time.

C Don't let children get bored.

n!!

!!tr

nDtr

!!!

1 Vocabulary:. -ing and -ed adjectives

a) Look at these examPles.o We gave up our jobs because we were getting boted.. We spent six boňng weeks in Singapore.

Which adjective describes how they felt?

b) For each sentence, choose the correct word foreach space.

amazed/amazing1 My brother cooked an ..................... meal last

night.2 My neighbour was .. to find her

brother at the door because she thought he wasin Australia.

surprised / surprising

3 I was .. to win the competition.4 It's ......... that Anthony got the iob, since

he has no experience of working in a hotel.

i nte re sted / i nterest i ng

5 The Modern Art museum is much morethan the National Museum.

6 I was so ..................... in what I was reading that I

forgot to have lunch.

tired / tiring7 I'm really .. today because I went to

bed too late last night.8 It can be very .. to sPeak a foreign

language for a long time.

excited/exciting

9 For an adventure film, it wasn't very ...........

10 When I was little, I was always verythe night before \ /e \ /ent on holiday.

c) Work with a partner. Ask and answer thesequestions.

1 Do you enjoy going to museums or do you thinkthey are boring?

2 What do you do if you get bored at the weekend?

3 What free-time activities do you think are mostinteresting?

TEsr 1, LrsrENtNG PART 2 Xfr

3

a)

2

a)

a

a

a

b)

Grammar: verbs followed by to + infinitive

Look at these examples from the Exam Task.What do you notice about the form of thesecond verb in bold?... we decided to sail back to England.

How long did it take you to get ready for the trip?

I hadn't expected to hit bad weather so soon.

Complete these sentences with a suitable verbÍrom the box.

pass travel buy paint study playreply tell swim meet come

0 My brother expects ....'..Í/9''?a.a?........ his drivingtest because he's had lots of lessons.

1 I learnt .. in the sea when I was ten.

2 Would you likeSaturday?

3 My mother hopes .. round the worldwhen she retires.

4 I've decided .. chemistry at university.5 I had planned .. my bedroom at the

weekend, but I didn't have time.

6 Sara promised .. to my e-mailimmediately, but I still haven't had an ans\ /er.

7 If she offers ........ her violin to vou, findan excuse to leave!

8 We had intended .. him the truth, butwe weren't brave enough.

9 I wanted ... that new CD, but I'd spentall my money.

10 I've arranged ... my friend after classtomorrow.

c) Work with a partner. Ask and answer thesequestions.

1 Have you arranged to do anything this weekend?

2 What do you hope to do when you leaveschool/college?

3 What do you plan to do during the holidays?

Speaking: journeys

Complete these sentences about some iourneysyou make regularly.

I get to .. (work/school/etc.) by.. . It takes about

When I go on holiday, I travel by .............My favourite way of travelling is bybecause

Tell a partner about an interesting iourney.It can be a real journey you've made, or youcan invent one. Use these questions and thelanguage in the box below to help you.

Who did you go with?Where did you go? (to an island? to themountains? to a foreign city?)

How did you get there? (by train? by plane?by car? by boat?)

What was good and bad about your journey?

Useful languageI went by myself/with ...

I/We went to ... because I wanted ...

We travelled by ...

The most interesting thing was ...

... \/as very exciting.I was very surprised by ...

... was a little boring.

After listening to you, your partner must decideiÍ the journey Was real or invented.

2

.1

b)

a

a

c)

W-ď]x TEsT 1, LIsTENING PART 2

) stratesy

1,

z

3

4

t J BeaO and listen to the instructionsto the Exam Task below.How many questions are there?

What sort of word is Willingham? How do youknow?Who will you hear? What will they talk about?

What do vou have to do?

Look at the Exam Task and guess whatkinds of words are missing.Look at Questions 1.4, "1.5, t7 and 18. Whatkind of word can go in each space? How doyou know?Look at Question 16. What kind of informationdo you need here? How do you know?Look at Question 19. What kind of word cango here? How do you know?

3 fi li"t"n to the recording the Íirst time.

Try to answer as many questions as you can.|Í you miss a 9aP, don't worry. You can fill it

in the second time you Iisten.

4 ó j Listen to the recording agaln.

Check the answers you wrote the first time.Fill in any answers you mlssed.

5 Check your answers.. How many words did you write in each space?

. Is the meaning correct?r Is the glammaÍ correct?r Is the spelling correct?

.. EXO7 tiO! ... . . .. o o o...... .. .. . .. ....ara

3 A small spelling mistake in a difficutt word is :! oK, for example caste! Íor castle. But simple :

I words, for example green, must be correct. :aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa!

Part 3

Questions 14-19

You will hear someone talking on the radio about the Willingham Museum.For each question, Íi|| in the missing inÍormation in the numbered space.

Witlingham Museumln the museum. visit:

. a rgth-century (14)

. a 195os dining room

. a new exhibition about (15) ......... which will open

on (15)

The museum is:

o in a buitding which was a (17) ..........

. near the (18) ......... outside the town

To get there:. follow the (19) .....'... signs from the town centre.

TEST 1, LISTENING PART 3 em

1 Grammar:prepositions

ln Part 3, ptepositions can oÍ|en heIp you to decide

what sorl oÍ w0rd can go in a gap, so lt's important topractise understanding and using them correctly.

a) Look at Gap 16 Írom the Exam Task on page 41.

16 open + on is followed by a day or date.

b) Underline the correct preposition in each pair.

A Visit to Historic Willingham

Cars are not allowed (O) intolto the centre ofWillingham, so it is very pleasant to walk(7) above I around the town. If you come bycar/ you have to leave it in the car park just(2) next loutside the centre. A free bus servicetakes you (3) flom I in there (4) to I at the lr'ainsquare.

There are lots of interesting things to see(5) in lat Willingham. If you want to goshopping, be sure to visit the new shoppingmall (6) inlinto the centre. When you havefinished your shopping, why not see a film(7) in I by the new multiplex cinema? It is easyto find the cinema because there is a big signin front (8) of lÍ|om it. You can buy tickets byphone or from the box office. It is open everyweekday (9) byluntil l0 p.m. and closes later(IO) onlin Saturdays and Sundays.

2 Vocabulary: compound nouns

a) Look at this example from the notes on theWillingham Museum.If you visit Willingham Museum, you can see a1950s dining rootn.

What do you notice about the spelIing ot dininý

b) Add -ingto the verbs in the box and fill in thegaps to form a compound noun. Be carefulabout spelling!

sleep drive wash swim fry waitwalk write

1 My sister passed her .......... test last week.

2 The hotel has a pool, so take your ..........costume.

3 Do you have a ..........bag for when \/e gocamping?

XPX rEST 1, LrsrENrNG PARr g

+

{

I usually wash my clothes in the machine.Please take a seat in the .......... room. The doctorwill see you soon.We can cook the sausages in this .......... pan.I wrote to my aunt on my ne\ / paper.

My father is using a .......... stick because he hasa bad knee.

6

7

8

3 Vocabulary: places to visit

ln the exam, you oÍten have to řead, Wřile or speak

about p|aces to visit. lt's useÍul to know lhe names oÍ

thinos you Íind in them.

Complete the text with a word or phrase from the box.

a*tiq1ls{rl+nit+*re café guided tourold books sculptures cloakroom paintingsfast-food kiosks jewellery funfair ridesgift shop pottery exhibition souvenirs

Wellington Hall offers you the chance to visit abeautiful house and garden. In the 18th-centuryhouse, you can see rooms filled with (q ..A.fiYqqA.....

'!'a.rntŤ.'u.re.''. and a wonderful collection of(1) ............. ....... on the walls. Thereare three gardens which contain some interesting(2\ ............. You can havelunch in the old kitchen which is now a(3) ............. The old dining roomis used as an art gallery, and there is a new(4) ............. ........ there every month.If you \^/ant to know more about the history ofthe house, take a (5) .............They leave every half an hour from the library.While you're there, have a look at the(6) ............. some of them havebeen there for several hundred years. A wide rangeof (7) ......... can be bought in the(B) .............. ...... next to the main entrance.

4 Speaking: places to visit

Work with a partner. Tell them about a museum, artgallery, theme park or other interesting place youhave visited. Use these questlons to help you.o Where is it?o What is it called?o What can you see and do there?. Did you have a good time?o What was the best thing about it?

) stratesy'l tt I Read and listen to the instructions

to the Exam Task below.1 How many sentences are there?

2 How many people will you hear?

3 What is the boy's name?

4 What is the girl's name?

5 Where are they?6 What do you have to do?

2 Read the six sentences. Underline thenames in each sentence.

.. EXA6 tlO! ... . . .. .. o. o o..... . . .. .....c'o

i The instructions tell you the names of the :! peopte and who they are. Make sure you know :! which speaker is which, as this is important for :! answering the questions. :aooa aaaaaa a aa aaaaaa aaa oa aaaaaaaaaaa aa !

3 Make guesses about what you wil! hear.

a) Underline six nouns which tell you whatWilliam and Sophie's conversation will beabout.

b) Gompare your list of words with anotherstudent.

4 t J Listen to the recording and answerthe questions.

Mark the answers you are sure of. lf you missone, don't worry. You can listen for the answerwhen you hear the recording again.

5 ť, J Listen again and check your answers.

Try to fil! in any answers you missed the firsttime. If you're still not sure, guess! Don't leaveany questions unanswered.

Part 4

Questions 20-25

Look at the six sentences Íor this part.

You will hear a conversation between a boy, William, and a girl, Sophie, in a music shop.Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect.|Í it is correct, put a |ick (/ ) in the box under A Íor YES.|Í it is not correct, put a tick (/)in the box under B for No'

20 Sophie's mother works in the town where they live.

21 Sophie enjoys shopping in Birmingham.

22 William feels confident about finding his way around Birmingham.

23 Sophie thinks the band 521 has improved.

24 Wi||iam persuades Sophie to buy a diÍferent CD from him.

25 Sophie is disappointed to have her birthday present early.

ABYES NO

!tr!tr!n

!trtr!!tr

TEST 1, LISTENING PART 4 xxx

a)

Vocabulary: words with similar meanings

|n Part 4, you hear people talking abou| their Íee|ings,giving opinions, and agreeing or disagreeing with

each othet. They use diÍÍerent words Íot the samemeaning.

Look at this example from the Exam Task onpage 43.

Sophie says: Their music has got a lot better recently.

Question 23 says: Sophie thinks the band 521 hasimproved.

Does has improved mean the same as has got a lotbetter recently?

b) Complete the second sentence so it meansthe same as the first, using a word or phrasefrom the box. Remember to put the verb in thecorrect form.

feel think persuade €*i€y be disappointedsuggest prefer be keen recommend

'I really like shopping for clothes.'She .....9il9Y9..... shopping for clothes very much.

'I'm sure I can climb to the top of the mountain.'He ..................... confident about climbing to thetop of the mountain.'The Riders'new CD is better than their old one.

He ..................... The Riders' new CD to their oldone.

'Why don't \ /e go away for the weekend?'She ..................... going away for the weekend.'In my opinion, this book is really boring.'He ..................... the book is really boring.'I really want to visit the market while I'm here.'She ..................... to visit the market while she'shere.,If I were you, I,d try the físh soup.,He ..................... the fish soup.

'I hoped to go sailing this weekend, but theweather is bad.'She ..................... that she can't go sailing.'I'm going to a really good club tonight. Whydon't you come?'He tried to ..................... her to come to a clubwith him.

2 Grammar: if sentences (unreal situations)

a) Look at the Ío|lowing sentences from Williamand Sophie's conversation.

William: If we had a map/ itwouldn't be a problem

for me.

Sophie: If we were together, it would be OK.

b)

1

z3

4

5

6

Match the sentence halves.If I earned more money,If my brother wasn't so shy,

If they lived in the country,Iflhadabicycle,If we knew his address,

If the ciý \^/aS nearer/

L,'

d)

e)

f)

c)

1

a) he'd join my band.b) they'd miss the shops.

we'd go there more often.l'd go to work by taxi.I'd get more exercise.

we'd visit him.

Complete these sentences with your own ideas.If I had lots of monev,

2 If I was a film star, ...........

3 If I could live an)'where in the world,

4 If I met a famous pop star,

5 If my friends gave a party for ffi€, ............

6 If my hair was green,

3 Speaking: shopping

Work with a partner. Answer the followingquestions.

1 What sort of shops do you often go to?2 When do you usually go shopping?3 Do you like going shopping?4 Who helps you choose your clothes?5 Do you decide quickly what to buy?6 Do you like buying presents?

XXX TEsr i, LrsrENrNG PART 4

) stratesy

The test begins with a general conversationbetween the examiner and the candidates.Be ready to:. ans\^/er questions about personal details,

e.g. where you live. ans\ /er questions about your daily life,

likes/dislikes, habits, etc.. spell out words (e.g. names, addresses)

1 il Sample interview

S@ Extra Language for the Speaking Test, Section 5,

page 160

You are going to hear two candidates doing Part 1

of the test.

a) Read these questions, then listen once. Whichquestions does the examiner ask? Tick the onesyou hear.

1 What's your name?

2 What's your family name?

3 How do you spell that?

4 Where do you come from?5 How long have you lived there?

6 What do you study?

7 What do you do there?

B What do you enjoy doing in your free time?

9 What did you do last weekend?

10 Do you think English will be useful foryou in the future?

b) Listen again and answer these questions.

1 What does the examiner ask for first?

2 Who does the examiner introduce?3 What word are the students asked to spell?

4 What does Anna say when she doesn't understand?

5 Anna says: 'I work in an office.'Then she adds:

'I'm a secretary'. This is extra information. Whatextra information does Carlo give the examiner?

.. EXO6 tip! ..... o............... o.........I Practise spetling words in English untiI you can say ii the letters of thó alphabet easily. :

aa a a a a a a a aa a.... a a aaa a a a a 3

!!trutr!!!n!

2 Spelling

a) Look at the |etters oÍ the alphabet below.

1 What are the names of the letters?

2 What do you say when a letter is repeated, forexample the m in grammar?

IEXKQUOVWHRAZSCGJY

b) Work with a partner.

Student A: Look at the bottom of page 47.

Student B: Write down what your partner says inyour notebook. When you have finished, show yourwords to Student A. Are they spelt correctly?

c) Change roles.

Student B: Look at the bottom of page 48.

Student A: Write down what your partner says inyour notebook. When you have finished, show yourwords to Student B. Are they spelt correctly?

d) Now take turns to spell the names of the placeswhere you live and study. Write the names inyour notebooks and then check them.

3 ExamTask@S fxtra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections4 and 5, page 160

a) Work with a different partner.

Student A: You are the examiner. Ask yourpartner the questions at the bottom of page 22.

For Question 7, write down what your partnersays so that you can check it later.

Student B: Answer the questions your partnerasks you.

When you have Íinished, check the answer toQuestion 7. ls it spelt correctly?

b) Change roles.Student B: You are the examiner. Ask yourpartner the questions at the bottom of page 30.For Question 7, write down what your partnersays so that you can check it later.

Student A: Answer the questions your partnerasks you.

When you have finished, check the answer toQuestion 7. ls it spelt correctly?

TEST 1, SPEAKING PART 1 XW

) str"tesyIn Part 2, the examiner describes a situation, andyou and yoÚ partner talk about it for two orthree minutes. The examiner gives you somepictures to help you. Be ready to:o make suggestionso explain your opiniono agree or disagree.

1ti Sampleinterview

You are going to hear two candidates doing Part 2of the test.

a) Look at page 't62.There are some pictures ofplaces to visit. Listen to the first part of therecording. What does the examiner tell thecandidates to do?

b) Listen to the candidates. Where do they decideto go? Tick the places they choose.

2 Functions: making plans

a) While doing the task, the candidates used someof these expressions. Tick the ones you heard.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

72

13

t415

What do you want to do?Right, we'll do that.Shall we go to ... ?Where would you prefer to go first?That sounds good. Let's do that.Can we try something else?

Where would you like to go?

What shall we do ... ?

Let's go to ...

How about going to ... ?Right, we'll do that.That's a great idea.

Sure, I'd like to do that.I'm not so sure about that.All right, let's do thatl

b) Match the expressions Í-15 above with thedescriptions a)-e) below.

a) finding out what your partner wants to dob) making a suggesl.ion

c) agreeing with a suggestiond) disagreeinge) agreeing that a decision has been made

XW TEST 1, SPEAKING PART 2

n!tr!!!!!!n!T!n

c) Read the following conversation between Jeanneand Martin who are planning their day. Fill eachspace with a suitable word.

Jeanne: Let's plan our day.

Martin: OK. Where shall we (O) ......q.9.......... first?

Jeanne: How (1) going to look roundthe market?

Martin: What can \/e (Z) ................... there?

Jeanne: We might buy a few souvenirs.Martin: I'm not so (3) ........ about that. If we

buy anything, we'll have to carry it all day.

Jeanne: That's true. So where (4) ................... youlike to go first?

Martin: What (5) ................... the castle?

Jeanne: Well, what can \/e (6) ................... there?Martin: They have lots of old paintings there.

Jeanne: OK. And what (7) we do afterthat?

Martin: (B) ................... go somewhere for lunch.

Jeanne: That's a great (9) ................... . Where shallwe go?

Martin: Shall we go for a burger?

Jeanne: Sure. I'd (10) ................... to do that. Andwhat shall we do after lunch?

Martin: Well, then we could go to the funfair.

Jeanne: All right. (11) ................... do it!Martin: OK. I'm ready.

d) i,r'd Listen and check your answers.

e) Work with a partner. Practise reading theconversation aloud.

3 ExamTaskS.p fxtra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections6-10, pages 160-16I

Work with a partner.Turn to page 162 and lookat the pictures. Decide together which threeplaces you are going to go to and which youwill go to first.

i. EXA6 tip! .............................. .

! Listen carefully to what your partner says, so that you ::

a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a aa a a a a a a aaaal

lto'L]

) strategy

In Part 3, the examiner gives you a photograph.You talk about it by yourself for about a minute.Then your partner talks about another photo onthe same topic.

1 Describing where things are in a picture

Work with a partner.

a) Look at the pictures (A-C).What does eachpicture show?

Picture A shows a boy studying in his bedroom.

Picture B is probably a room in ..............Picture C

Label the numbered parts of the pictures. lf youdon't remember the names of all the things, lookin your dictionary.

Take turns to say where things are in eachpicture. Use the phrases in the box to help you.

on one side (o0 on the left (ofon the right (of) on top of next toin the/one corner in the other cornerbetween in front of by (the window)in the middle (of)

b)

c)

Be ready to say:

o what you can see in different parts of thephoto

o what is happening/what people are doingo what people look like and what they are

wearingo how people are feeling and why.

d) Write four sentences describing where thefurniture is in the room where you are now.

PIanZauJ^ 9 a]JJJ9 ý}dl8a g eII€J}SnV Z Áueurag 1

'rauped rnoÁ ro; SalJ}unof,3ur.,rno11o; aql Jo sarueu aq] ilads :y luapqs

$v a8ad) Z aSDJaXI ,L uaď 8uryaad;

A

TEST 1, SPEAKING PART 3 effix

2 Describing people

a) Work with a partner. Look at the pictures on You are going to hear a candidate doing Part 3 ofpage 47 for a few moments. the test.

Now cover page 47. Can you remember what the a) Look at Photographs 1A and 1B on pages 168

1 In Picture A, a boy is sitting on the bed. I think the photographs?he's about 15 years old. There's a boolt.op"t lt b) Listen to Carlo and Anna talking about theirfront of him, but he isn't studying' He's watching photographs. Mark the points in the list belowTV. He's wearing a dark iumper. There's a computer *ni"n they talk about.on the table.

people are doing in each picture? Correct themistakes in these descriptions.

2 In Picture B, a boy and a girl are playing tablefootball. The boy is on the right and he's wearinga striped T-shirt and jeans. The girl's wearing aT-shirt and a pair of jeans. There's a picture onthe wall.

b) Now look back at page 47 and check youranswers.

c) Write a similar description of Picture C.

3 Describing how people are feeling

a) Look at the words in the box. Which could youuse to describe the people in Pictures A, B andC? Which don't fit any of the pictures?

busy calm excited tired happycheerful worried depressed anxiousamused cross unhappy thoughtfulmiserable lonely impatient gratefuldisappointed astonished nervous

b) Now make sentences about each of the people.Say how you think they are feeling and give areason for your opinion. Use the language in thebox to help you.

Example: The boy in Ticiure A looke bored andmieerab|e, | Ťhink he,s vrobab|y eŤ,uáyingtor a Ť,egŤ,, buŤ he'd raIher qo ouŤ, andbe wiŤh hig friende'

Useful languageHe/She seems/looks ...

They look as if ...

He/She/They might/could be ...

4 6) s"rple interview

and 171. Listen to the Íirst part of the recording.What does the examiner ask Carlo to do with

Carlo Annawhat kind of room it iswhat people he/she can see

what the people are wearingwhere the people are in the roomwhat things he/she can see

his/her opinion about the thingswhat the people are doinghow the people are feeling

5 ExamTaskS@ Extra Language for the Speaking Test, SectionsLI-L6, page 161

Work with a partner. Do the Exam Task below.

Candidate A: Look at Photograph 1'{ onpage 168.

Candidate B: Look at Photograph 18 onpage 177.

Think about your photograph for a few seconds.Describe it to your partner for about one minute.Use the points in Exercise 4b to help you.

. . EXO7 tip! ... . . . . . . .. ... .. . . . . . ....... . ..3 tatt about the place as well as the peopte and give :a..a. an Oplnlon. .a'aaa a a a aa a a a a a aaaa a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a aa aaaa a a

Puuel^ 9 saJIV souanfl řpuolaJJeg g suaQlv z alrua I

.rau1red rnoÁ ro;saqro Suu,r,olloJ eql Jo srrueu aq1 11ad5 :fl luepnls

19v a8aď) Z asD"LaXl ,[ ]nď 3w4oad5

reX rEsr 1, sPEAKTNG PARr 3

) stratesy

In Part 4, the examiner asks you to talk to yourpartner about a topic for about three minutes.The topic is the same as the pictures in Part 3.

DO give your opinions and explain what youprefer.

Do ask your paÍtner questions and respond towhat he/she says.

DO NOT talk to the examiner, only to yourpartner.

3 Vocabulary: television programmes

a) What kind of TV programmes do you watch?Write how many times a week you watch thedifferent kinds of programmes below.You willuse your answers in the Exam Task in Exercise 4.

b) Work with a partner. Compare the kind of TVprogrammes you like. Are your partner'sanswers in Exercise 3a similar to your own?

4 ExamTaskS@ nxtra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections77 and 18, page 161

Work with a partner. Look at the Exam Taskbelow, then look back at your answers toExercises 2 and 3.Take turns to shut your bookwhile your partner asks you these questions.

Ask and answer these questions:

1 Which of the photographs on pages 168 and171 looks more like the way you study?

2 When and where do you study?

3 Do you ever watch television at the sametime?

4 What kinds of TV programmes do you prefer?

5 Do you spend more time studying or watchingTV?

Programme Number oftimes I watchper week

the newspolitical documentariesnatuÍe programmes

comedy series

quiz showsconcerts/music programmes

competitionssports programmes

filmsTV dramassoap operas

1 il Sample interview

You are going to hear two candidates doing Parl4of the test.

a) Listen to the first part. What does the examinerask the candidates to do?

b) Anna and Carlo ask each other's opinions.How does Anna ask Carlo's opinion?How does Carlo ask Anna's opinion?

c) Which of these expressions do Anna and Carlouse to agree with each other?

1 Yes.

2 Me too.3 That's OK sometimes.

4 That's correct.5 No.6 I agree.

7 That's my opinion too.

8 You're right.

2 Thinking about study habits

Write down the answers to these questions. You willuse your answers in the Exam Task in Exercise 4.

1 Where do you usually study?

2 Do you listen to music while you study?

3 Do you study alone?

4 Do you watch TV while you study?

5 Do you use a computer to write your work?

6 Do you use the internet?

| ]ike waŤ,chinq evoríe? r o qr arnrrt e e, e e p e ci allYfooŤba||' WhaŤ, abouŤ you?

!!!trtrn!!

. . EXO6 tiD! ... . . . . . . . . . . . o . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ..c'a

I Don't worry if you can't think of much to say at first. :

3 The examiner will help you by asking you questions. :aaaaa a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a o a a a a a ao a a a a a aa a

TEST 1, SPEAKING PART + W

Read the instructions to the Exam Task onthe opposite page.

How many questions do you have to answer?

What do you have to decide?Where do you mark your answers?

Look at the example.What kind of text is this?a) a message on a board b) a signc) an e-mailWhere might you see it?

A is the correct ans\ /er. Let's decide why.

Look at A. Underline the words which meanphoning the cinema.

Underline the words which mean contact Nell.Why is B wrong? When shouldJohn ring Nell?Why is C wrong? How should John find outwhen the film starts?

Look at Question 1.

What kind of text is this?a) an e-mail message b) a noticec) a phone message

Where might you see this sign? What wordshelo vou to decide? Underline them.

3 Can 'saver' tickets be used on the 10.15 train?4 Can you use 'saver' tickets on later trains?

How do you know?5 Can you use 'saver' tickets on earlier trains?

6 Look at A, B and C.Which one means the same as the message?Mark it.What words in the message tell you?Underline them.

7 Look at the other sentences. Decide whv thevare WÍong'

4 Look at Questions 2-5.For each question:o decide what kind of text it iso choose the correct ans\ /er

o mark the answer on youÍ answer sheet.

.. EXO6 tip! ......................... o.

! Some of the words in the incorrect sentences are !! often the same as in the text. Don't choose too :! quickly. Make sure you understand the meaning :3 of the whole sentence before you decide. :la.... a. aa a a a a...... a a a aa a......a a a a a l

.IJoMaIIIoq uo puads noÁ op 3uo1 ruto11 L

zÁq''lt i]JJlqns a}IJno^PJ rnoÁ s,1eq14 9

2Áup qrea looqJs qs]ulJ noÁ op aruq }Pq714 9

1asea1d taqlua1 sq}€ru rnoÁ;o erueu aq} 11ads noÁ ue3 v

.ur no^ eJe sselJ l{rlqM E

2o1 o3 noÁ op looqJs }€qM Z

.Jtrreu rnoÁ s,1zq14 t

.suoqsanb JSJq] Jauuud rnoÁ {sP ,V ]uapn]s

$g a?ad) >lsal uDXl 'I Uu(I Sur4aadg

2

1

) str"tesy

1

L

3

Z

.J

ÁŤ

3

1

TEST 2, READING PART 1

Part íQuestions 1-5

Look at the text in each ouestion.What does it say?Mark the correct letter A, B or C on vour answer sheet.

Example:

0 John should

A contact Ne|| aÍter phoning the cinema.

B ring Nell after arriving at the cinema.

c go to the cinema to check when the Íi|m starts.

Joh n

Can you call the cinema from home andcheck film time before leaving? Let me knowwhat time we should get there.

NeII

Answer: nlA B C'1ffi

SAVER TICKETS CANBE USED ON THE

10. I5 TRATN ANDANY TRAIN AFTER THAT

A The Íirst train you can trave| on with a.saver'ticket is the 10.15.

B

c

'Saver' tickets cost extra if vou travel after 1 0.15.

The 10.15 is the only train you can travel on witha'saver'ticket.

Do not leave the waiting room until thereceptionist calls your name.

Do not go to the waiting room before telling thereceptionist you are here.

The receptionist will tell the dentist that you havearrived.

Dear affWe,re stayíng 6y tfre sea

for a ýw íays at 1resentínsteac{ of goíng straíg|t rcthe mountaíns, 1t,s veryrefaxíng after c{ríl,hg forrwo c[ays to get here. . ,

Míc|neL

Michael has spent two days driving to themountains.

Michael visited the mountains before going tothe coast.

Michael is having a break from travelling at themoment.

ITurn over

TEST 2, READING PART 1 W

THIS OFFICE CAN ONLY TAKEBOOKINGS AT LEAST

TWENTY-FOUR HOURSIN ADVANCE OF DEPARTURE

This office doesn't take bookings for the sameday as you travel.

lf you book tickets here, you'll receive them aday later.

c You can book tickets at this ofÍice twenty-fourhours a day.

Students should

A pay the exact amount Íor the trip in cash.

B make sure they have a credit card for the trip.

C take enough change with them on the trip.

A

eiP *'i*e

Students wanting to 9o. on

lň" t'ip should 9o to theoffice tittt:'tt the next two

áays wi-th the correct money.

We no longer accept tt"dit r,,,,,,,,,

cards or give change ' i{;:.;,

Grammar: time words and phrases

ln Part 1, time words and phrases, Íor examp|e after

Ihat, at present, Ialerand until can be very important

when you are choosing youÍ answer'

Find and underline examples oÍ time expressionsin the Exam Task on pages 51-52.

Rewrite the sentences below in your notebookusing the expressions from the box instead ofthe words underlined.

later a+Ť{€s€nt every fifteen minutesin advance within a fortnight no longeruntil in time at the moment

1

2

3

The restaurant is not open no\^/.

I h p. re?.t q.vr a n! . ! ?. . r 9! . 9 B 9 | s!. p !.?.?.q.ft ,. . . . . . . . .

I'm on holiday from now to Tuesday.

That film is not showing any more.

The museum is closed for lunch, but it will beopen afterwards.There,s a tÍam from here to the city centre fourtimes an hour.I promise I'll reply to your request in less thantwo weeks.

6 Harry's not here no\ r', can I take a message?

7 We need to know how many people are comingto the performance before it starts.

8 You must be here early enough to catch the ferry.

TEST 2, READING PART 1

Vocabulary: words you see in signs

The words in the box below often appear on thesigns and notices in Part 1. Choose the correctword or phrase for each gap in the notices below.

assistant available arrival cancelledcredit card discount emergency en*+anee

forbidden t{€ga€€ responsible permittedon time out of order reception securitystaff urgent

THIS....... enlrance IS FOR PASSENGERS

THtS LIFT lS ................

PLEASE ASK AN ........... FOR

HELP !FYOU CANNOT USETHE STAIRS.

on group bookings....'.'.Á

Pay by

2

a)

a)

b)

2 $ffi$

ffi tor very

ffi lle.t, ring the

tl

IAII the trains are running ....... todaytl

except the 1O,O5 which ts ............... . iI

At weekends the doctor is onlv

ln an

SM0K!]{G 1S.............. DURII{G

LECTURES, BUT IS

DURII{G THE GOFFEE BREAK.

Fon ............ REasoNs, ONrv ..........Ann Arrowro BrvoNo THIs GRrr,.

b) Where might you see the signs (1-8) above?

2

3

Grammar: beforelafter + -ing

Signs and mBssages oí|en talk about things happening

beÍore or after each other. They sometimes use the

wofis betore ot aÍter + -ing,

Find and underline examples oÍ before or after +

-ing in the Exam Task on pages 51-52.

Make sentences in your notebook using beforeor after + -ing.

Always read the instructions/use the equipment(before)

h)w.ay.q..read.ý.hp. jnEIr.v.sýjpng'he!pra..u.?i.r,.q.Ť<b'a....

q.qv.i.?.wq!!,

You must take a shower/use the swimming pool(before)

Please clear the table/eat a meal (after)

You'llhave to ask permission/use this telephonefuefore)

Don't forget to pick up your rubbish/finish yourpicnic (after)

Employees must wash their hands/prepare a mealfuefore)

Remember to lock the door/put out the rubbish(after)

Passengers must buy a ticket/get on the train(before)

8 Switch off your mobile/enter the theatre (before)

4 Vocabulary: money words

The texts in Part 1 are oÍten about buying things.

You need to know words Íor ta|king about money,

Íot example:

Saver tickets cnst extra iÍ you travel after l0.15'We no longer accept credit cards or give change.

Complete the text with a word or phrase fromthe box.

b+tŤ change cheaper corlect moneycost extra credit card discountexpensive pay sell

When you go to London on the train you can(0) ......h!]y......... youÍ ticket at the local station usinga (1) .......... . Sometimes you can get a(2) ..................... ticket, because there is a(3) ..................... on the fare at certain timesof the day. Make sure you have plenty of(4) ..................... with you, because whenyou arrive in London, you can use it to(5) ..................... for your underground ticket from a

machine. If you don't have the (6) ..i....!...........r. ,

you may have to queue at the ticket office. Youcan also go to London by coach. This is less(7) ..................... than the train, although it takeslonger. The driver can (8) ..you a ticket,and it doesn't (9) ..................... to travel at busy timesof the day.

5 Speakingi Are you a spender or a saver?

a) Work with a partner. Discuss some of thequestions below. Look again at the languagein Exercise 4 beÍore you start.

1 Do you get pocket moneY?

2 Do you earn money? How?3 Do you often run out of moneY?

4 Do you ever borrow or lend moneY?

5 Do you have a bank account?

6 Do you have a credit card?

7 Can you save money, if You have to?

8 Are you a spender or a saver?

b) Tell the rest of the class whether your partneris a spender or a saver, and saY whY'

a)

b)

0n .............. visiting students must wait here

to be met by the teacher who is .......... Íor sports.

TEST 2, READING PART 1 reSX

) Stratesy

1 Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.

1 How many questions are there?2 What do all the people want?3 What are the reviews about?4 How many reviews are there?5 What do you have to decide?6 Where do you mark your answers?

2 Look at the pictures.Each question describes a different person or gÍoupof people. \tVhat kind of people do the pictures show?

Look at Questions 6*10.Allthe people are Iooking for somethingdiÍferent. Look at the underlined parts ofQuestion 6. What is important for Ryan?Does Ryan like modern films?What is his favourite kind of film?What kind of actors does he like?What kinds of film doesn't he like?

Now underline the important parts ofQuestions 7-10.

4 Look atTexts A-H to find the importantinÍormation.

a) Look at Question 6 again.

1 Which films are comedies?2 Which of these films is best for Ryan?

b) Check your answer.o Is the film funny?o Is it old-fashioned?o Are the actors famous?o Is it a musical or a thriller?

c) Mark the letter (A, B, C, etc.) by Question 6on your answer sheet.

d) Look at the important points you underlinedfor Questions 7-10. Use them to decide whichfilms are the most suitable for the other people.Mark your answers on your answer sheel.

Z. EXO6 tip! .. !............ o. o........! Remember there are eight texts and onty five :ar'

! People, so three texts are not needed. .) a a aaaaaa aa a aa a a a a a a al

3

a)

1

2

3

4

b)

Part 2

Questions 6-10

The people below all want to watch a film on TV.On the opposite page, there are reviews of eightÍiIms.

Decide which Íi|m wou|d be the most suitab|e Íorthe following people.For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter(A-H) on your answer sheet.

Ryan likes watching old-fashioned films on TV. HepreÍers comedies, particuIar|ythose with famous actors. Heis not keen on musicals orthrillers.

Tom's hobby is reading and heenjoys watching films on TVwhose stories are taken ÍromIiterature. His Íavourite booksare those by Íamous authorsof the past. He reads booksabout the cinema, too, andlikes watching famous actors.

Elena likes to relax bywatching the latest romanticfilms on Tý especial|y iÍ theymake her laugh. Sheparticularly likes those whichhave some music in them.

Belinda enjoys watchingthrillers. She orefersadventures which actuallyhappened to people in real|iÍe, as she is interested in thelives of other people.

Carol loves listening to popmusic and reading magazinesabout it. She doesn't mindwhat sort of fi|m she sees, iÍ

it's a new one about pop starsor their music.

eX& TEsr 2, READTNG PART 2

Darius Alexander reviews this week's Íl|ms on TV

See you in SicilyThis is about a journey across Europe in the 1960s. A group of young people travel across Europe

in an old van, but nothing really exciting happens to them and it isn't actually very funny. It's a

weak comedy film with singing. I had never heard of the actors before, although some of them

could certainly sing.

The moon ond storsThis follows the usual love story - boy meets girl, they fall in love and sing some songs about it.

It's an enjoyable film, although there's nothing special about the singing, and it has its amusing

parts. It comes to the TV screen very quickly, as it was only made a year ago.

Mad for rnusicThis film came out last month, and all the young people are queuing to see it. There will be a

whole generation of fans watching because the music of this gÍoup, Sure Fire, is everyone's

favourite at the moment.

The house by the loke ........

Although the main roles are all acted by well-kno\^/n StaIS of film or Tý I got bored by the dialogue

which seems so slow compared to modern films. However, people who like Henrietta Browne's

writing will enjoy it because it is beautifully filmed, and the story keeps perfectly to the novel

written two hundred years ago.

Seoside storyThis funny film was made in the past, but is still as good as it was 25 years ago when I first saw

it. The main actors, who were already famous when it was made, made several more filmstogether later on. The story takes place in a very unusual hotel at the seaside where the guests

have lots of problems.

Shooting for freedom .............

Photographer Valerie Maine planned to work ip a dangerous part of the world for six weeks. This

adventure film tells how she escaped from the people who held her prisoner for over a year. It is

difficult to believe that this actually happened to someone who is still alive.

Escape to lupiter.This film about adventures in space isn't supposed to be funny, but I'm afraid I wanted to laugh

sometimes. Although this is one of several very similar films made recently, it's one of the better

ones, as it certainly holds your attention.

Another port of town........This film manages to show some serious problems of a family in modern Britain without depressing

the audience. If you haven't read Michael Stone's book of the same name yet, you'll be pleased to

watch this excellent film. And you'll still enjoy the film if you have already read it. There is some

excellent acting from some completely unknown actors.

TEST 2, READING PART 2 ExX

1 Vocabulary: expressions with similarmeanings

ln Part 2, it's important to understand when diÍÍerent

words or phrases have similar meanings.

The phrases on the left are from Questions 6-10 onpage 54; those on the right are Írom the texts on page

55. Match the ones with similar meanings.

a) funnv filmb) well-known stars

c) film with singingd) love storye) this actually happened

0 adventure filmg) film made in the past

c) Complete each sentence with a word or phrasefrom the box.

ago already during for in just last monthlater sis€e still yet

0 We've been on holidayof June.

the end

1 old-fashioned film2 musical3 thriller4 romantic film5 comedy film6 in real life7 famous actors

2 Grammar: present peďect

a) Match the questions in A with the answers in B.

O Have you spoken to Mary recentlY? h

1

L

3ÁŤ

5

6

7

Have you finished thatHave vou alreadv seen

book yet?

this film?Have you booked your plane ticket?

Have you just changed your clothes?

Have you seen lan?Have you had some lunch?Have you studied Spanish for along time?

a No, let's watch it.

b Yes, I've already had some sandwiches, thank you.

c No, I'm only half way through.d No, I still haven't decided when I need to leave.

e No, I began last year.

f Yes, I'm going out in a minute.g No, he's been away recently.

h

b) Which time words are used with the presentperfect? Underline them.

1 I ordered that CD a month ..................... , buthasn't arrived.

it

2 We get lots of tourists here ..................... thewinter, but not so many .. the summer.

3 You've finished your homework .........

but I've .. started mine!

4 I don't want to stop work .. , so I'llmake myself a snack

5 I saw that band in a concert ..................... , butthey didn't play ..................... long.

3 Grammar: time expressions

Gomplete the second sentence so that it means the

same as the Íirst, using no more than three words.

0 It's been eight months since \ /e s\ /am in this pool.

we .....h.avpn'.t.?W1n...... in this pool for eightmonths.

He joined that pop group last Year.He ............. ........ in that pop groupsince last year.

She wrote that e-mail a week ago.

It's a week .. that e-mail.

They've worked there for a month.They ......... work there lastmonth.He was in the garden until a moment ago'

He ............. ........ come into the housefrom the garden.

She's already told that joke twice before.

This .......... the third time she's

told that ioke.

&X rEST 2, READTNG PART 2

4

a)

Vocabulary: word sets

Put the words in the box into the correctcolumns in the table.

a€tgr article camera CD cinemacontents concert crossword directordrummer game guitarist headlinekeyboard make-up mouse moviemusician photograph program rockscreen software story website

Film Music Magazine Computer

aclor

Compare your lists with a partner. Are there anywords which can go in more than one column?Do they have the same meaning in bothcolumns?

Match each description with a word from the boxin Exercise 4a.

0 He or she plays the drums. ..l.fynnpf.

1

L

This is at the top of a magazine article.

You can look at millions of these on yourcomputer.This word means fllm.This tells you which page to look at in amagazine.He or she tells the actors what to do.

Speaking: films

Think of a film you have enioyed. Make notesabout it.

What kind of film is it?

What happens in it?Why did you like it?

JÁŤ

b) Work with a partner.Tell your partner aboutyour film, but don't tell him/her the title. Yourpartneř should try to guess the name of thefilm you are describing. Do you both like the

Writing: an e-mail or letter about a film

Fill each space in this e-mail with one word.

Hi SteveI went to the cinema with Jack lastnight. We saw the film 'Moving Out'. It's(1) ............ a young man, Rashid,who goes to live in London. I'm not very(2) ............ on films about everydaylife, so I didn't really want to go becauseI (3) ......... watching films likethrillers and space adventures.But now'Moving Out' is one of my(4) ............ films because it's really(5) ............ . I laughed all the time.And it's about ordinary young people,just (6) . you and me. The(7) ............ part of the film is(B) ............ Rashid's mum comesto visit him. He's (9) ....................... gothome from a party, and the flat's veryuntidy. The (10) .... aren'twell-known, but they're really good. Goand see it soonlSee youSami

b) Write an e.mail or letter to a Íriend about a Íi|m,play or video you have seen recently. Use Sami'se-mail to help you plan what to write.

6

a)

b)

c)

5

a)

a

o

a

same kinds of Íi|m?

Thie film ieabout...

Íhe beeŤ, part of Ť'he

film ie when ...

|Ť,g one of my tavouriŤefilmo becauee ...

TEST 2, READTNG PART 2 Xfi!

) st.atesy

-t

z3

4

5

6

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.How many sentences are there?What are the sentences about?What do you have to read?

What do you have to decide?When do you mark A on youÍ ans\,Ver sheet?

When do you mark B on your ans\ /er sheet?

2 Read Sentences 11-20 to get a goodidea what the text is about.

Match the sentences to the following topics.a) buying foodb) learning a ner4/ sportc) who should read thisd) the opening times of an officee) something which gives information

about accommodationf) singing or playing for an audienceg) improving your skillin a leisure activiýh) something many people want to doi) something which helps you to spend

less moneyj) who you can ask about something

3 Read the text to Íind the inÍormationyou need.

For each sentence (11-20), underline the part ofthe text where you think the answer is. The firsttwo are done for you.

4 Look at the sentences again.. Compare them with your underlined text.. Decide whether the sentence is correct or

incorrect.. Mark your ansv/er on youÍ answer sheet.

Z. EXO7 tip! ... . . .. .. . . . .. .. .. o........3 The questions are in the same order as the :! information vou need in the text. :3.aa....aoaaaaaa...........a..a..aaaa!

IO

11

12

13

14

Part 3

Questions 11-20

Look at the sentences be|ow about advice Íornew students at a university.Read the text on the opposite page to decideif each sentence is correct or incorrect.|Í it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet.lf it is not correct, mark B on your answersheet.

This inÍormation is to he|p students whohave arrived aÍter the start of the universitvterm.

The Welfare Office is usuallv closed in themorning.

A Iist oÍ flats avaiIab|e Íor rent can be seenin the We|fare ofÍice.

You can save money on books if you havea student card.

You should ask older students for adviceabout where to buy books.

Having all your meals in the canteen is thecheapest way to eat.

Lots oÍ students Want to join the cookeryclass.

You can take up go|Í at a |oca| c|ub.

You can join a parttime course at theMusic Schoo| iÍ you a|reaciy p|ayreasonably well.

At musical open evenings, you canperform even if you have no experience.

15

16

17

18

19

20

rereX rEsr 2, READTNG PABr o

Wffi&*ffiffiruďx ffix

s a new student, You'vearrived two days before

term starts to look

around and get settled in

before your course begins and

the p|ace Íi||s up. Here is someinÍormation to make a|| that a

bit easier (we hopel).

The Student Welfare Office is

normally open from 4 p.m. till

8 o.m. Monday to Friday. Today

and tomorrow it will be open

a|| day, Írom about 9 a.m.

This is the olace to come if

you have any problems, for

example about money or

accommodation (we have a listof rental agencies and alsoadvertise any rooms which

become available in the

university hoste|s at the end oÍ

term). We also give out the

university identity cards whichyou need to join the library and

which allow you to get

discounts at a number oÍ |oca|

shops (including bookshops)and places of entertainment,

such as clubs and cinemas.

On Monday and Tuesday of

next week, second-yearstudents will be running a

book sale in the canteen from

10-3. Many of the books on

your Íirst-year reading |ist wi||

be available, and we suggestyou shou|d |ook here Íirst

before spending too much

on new books.

The university canteen (open

from 7.30 a.m. till 7.30 p.m.)

sells hot meals fairly cheaply,

as well as snacks and drinks,

but it'll save you money to

cook at least some of your

own meals. There is a basiccookery course starting next

week (run by students Íor

students, so it's reallypractical). lf you don't know

how to boi| an egg, this is Íor

you. lt's always full, so get your

name on the list in the Welfare

Office NOW!

19th September

The sports centre is open

from today. Look on the

noticeboards there for

inÍormation about athIetics,

swimming, team games and

so on. lt is also possible tojoin some local city clubs, suchas go|Í or squash, at

a discount (show them your

card) iÍ you can play at areasonable level. Addressesin the sports-centreoÍÍice.

The Music Schoolwelcomes all

members of

the university,

whatever their

main subject of study, for part-

time courses. Why not take the

opportunity to start learning

the guitar, violin or piano while

you're here? Many advancedstudents oÍÍer rea||y cheaplessons. There are also open

evenings when anyone can

take the chance to pedorm in

Íront of an audience. Look out

Íor notices advertising times

and dates.

TEST 2, READTNG PARr s eXX

0

1

2

1 Vocabulary: student life

The words and phrases in the box are used in thesentences and in the text on page 59. Match them withthe explanations below.

advanced canteen club full-time coursehostel noticeboard part-timecoursereading list rent sports centre student cardHajv€řsi+y+erm welfareoffice

part of the students,year = ''ufl!vpr.?ýs.trpr,ry'...

money paid to your landlord

4{

a place where students can go for general helpand advicesomething you can use to prove that you are astudenta place to eat

a group who join together for a leisure activity

6 studying for a few hours every week

7 studying all day, from Monday to Friday

8 a place for students to live cheaply9 the books that students must read for their course

10 where you can play volleyball, do gymnastics, etc.

11 where people put posters and other information

a word to describe students who know a lotabout their subject ................

Speaking: your school/college

What do you think makes a good school?Look at the list below and number it in orderof importance.

! friendly atmosphere

c) lmagine that you have to give a talk about theschool or college where you study to somevisitors. Spend two minutes thinking about whatyou would say. Use the expresslons in the box tohelp you.

Useful languageThe school has ...

The best classes ...

Most of the students enjoy ...

Nobody likes ...

The students are usually ...

We have lots of ...

There aren't ar'y ...

d) When you are ready, work with a partner. Talkabout your school for one minute. Then listen towhat your partner has to say. Did you talk aboutthe same things? Do you agree with eachother's opinions?

Grammar: adverbs of frequency (how often?)

Look at the words in the box. We use thesewords to show how often something happens.

always often frequently regularly sometimesusually normally rarely seldom never

Example: The Student Welfare Office is normallyopen from I p.m.till I p.m. (text page 59)

Complete this diagram with the words in the box.

alwayeI

1O0o/o-l- 5Oo/o-Oo/oueually

b) Complete these sentences truthfully, usingwords from the box in Exercise 3a.

1 I ........... do my homework in the morning.2 My classmates .. have problems with

grammar.3 Our teacher .. speaks English in the

classroom.4 My classmates and I ......... meet after class.

5 We .. listen to music by Englishbands.

3

a)

1Z

2

a)

!_-.1 lots of computers

! hard-working students

! good sports facilitiesI lmodern classrooms

b) Compare your list with a partner. Tell each otherwhy you put things in that order.

! uniform

! good exam results

! strict teachers

fl clear rules

TEST 2, READING PART 3

6 My family ..................... helps me with words I

don't understand.7 L.................... watch English films on TV.

8 We ......... eat English food in my house.

9 My friends ..................... take a holiday in August.

10 I ........... use an English dictionary to checkwords I don't know.

c) Compare your sentences with other students.

4 Speaking: everyday activities

ln PET Reading and Listening, you may read or hear

about someone's everyday |iÍe. !n PET Writing and

Speaking, you oÍten need to wrile or speak about your

own everyday IiÍe'

Work with a partner. TaIk about how oÍten you do theÍo||owing activities. Use words Írom Exercise 3.

go jogging drive a car play footballuse a computer visit art galleriesgo to the cinema do the washing-upgo to bed after midnight get up after midday

Example:

Student A: How often do you go iogging?Student B: I never go jogging. / I usually go joggingon Saturday mornings.

5 Grammar: relative clauses

Understanding how short senlences can be ioined to

make |onger ones is useÍu| both Íol undetstanding

Reading texts in lhe exam and writing your answets in

the Writing paper.

Look at these sentences. They are made fromtwo shorter ones.We also give out the universiý identiý cards whichyou need to join the library.

= We also give out the university identity cards. +

You need th#s to join the library.

Students will be running a book sale in the canteen

where many of the books on your reading list willbe cvailable.

= Students will be running a book sale in thecanteen. + Many of the books on your readinglist willbe available th€{€.

There are also open evenings when anyone can take

the chance to perform.

= There are also open evenings. + Anyone cantake the chance to perform

Complete these sentences with the correctpronoun. Use who (Íor people), which (torthings), where (for places) or when (Íor times).

This photo shows the hotel W.lpf?. we stayed.

That's the CD got to number 1.

That's the school I used to go.

My music teacher was the person helpedme most.These ieans are the ones need mending.Do you remember the day we went toLondon and got lost?

Make longer sentences by joining these pairs.Use a pronoun to replace the words underlinedin the second sentence.Mary's giving me a lift in the ne\ / car.She bought the car last week. (which)Ma.rtlp..q.iv.ina.na.il)f !.in.!hp..new.pa.t.w.l.iehphp..b.pvqhilap!.wppl

A group of students share the flat.Keith's father owns the flat. (which)We often have a paÍty at weekends.We don't have classes at weekends. (when)

Most students live in hostels.Parties aren't allowed in hostels. (where)

This is my penfriend.He's coming to stay next month. (who)

I usually study in the college library.Most of my friends study in the college librarlrtoo. (where)

It's a pity we have exams in the summer.The weather is very hot in the summer. (when)

Complete the second sentence so that itmeans the same as the Íirst, using no morethan three words.A famous rock star used to live in that house.

That's the house .................... a

famous rock star used to live.I usually buy clothes from my cousin's shop.

My cousin owns the shop ..........buy my clothes.This note was left on my desk.

This is the note ... left onmy desk.

If a person steals things, he's a thief.A thief is ............... ...... steals things.Some mornings I don't have school and I goswimming instead.

I go swimming on .................... I

don't have school.

b)

0

1

oL

3

4

5

c)

d)

a)

TEsr 2, READTNG PARr s rcf,l

) str"tegy

1

z3

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.What do you have to read?

What do you have to do?

Where do you mark your answers?

Read the text quickly to get a goodidea oÍ what it is about.What sort of place is the text about?

Why does the writer enjoy going there?

What happened there in 1975?

1

2

3

3 Read Questions 21-25,

Underline the best word or phrase to completeeach sentence.

1 Question 21 asks about whenlwhy lwhere thewriter wrote the text. (This is always a generalquestion.)

2 Question 22 asks about a person la place lanevent. (Ttris is always a question about detailor opinion.)

3 Question 23 asks about opinionstowards I inforunation about lplans for LakeVinney. (This is always a question aboutdetail or opinion.)

4 Question 24 asks about the writer'splans lopinions ldiscovery. $his is always aquestion about detail or opinion.)

5 Question 25 asks about a way of persuadingpeople to visit lwarning people of a danger I tellingpeople about changes. (This is always a generalquestion.)

4 Read the text and answer Questions21*25.

. Read the text again more carefully.

. Choose the correct ansv/er for each question.

. Mark your answers on your ans\ /er sheet.

.. EXO6 tip! ... . .. .. .. .. . . . . . r. ... .....3 lf you aÍe not sure of the answer to one :! question, do the others and come back to it at :3 the end. lt may be easier then.

:

2

Part 4

Questions 21-25

Read the text and ouestions below.For each question, mark the correct letterA, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Lake VinneyMy favourite place for watersports is LakeVinney, but it has oďy existed since 1975

when the valley was filled with water toprovide electricity. Under the water is thevillage,Vinnthorpe. Last week I talked to Pat

Smithers, who runs a shop on the edge of thelake and looks after the huge car park. She

gets up earý to travel to her shop to sell

newspapers and food and doesn't finish worktill late because of the car park. She saicdrowning the village was the best thing thatever happened, as it brought a lot of businessto the area,aÍld the number of visitors fromall over the country continues to increase,especially as there is a new road which means

it is easier to get to.When I asked peopleenjoying the watersports, they said they neverthought about the drowned houses and

streets.'When I spoke to some people sittingin the café overlooking the lake,I wassurprised to find they still get angry aboutwhat happened.They used to live inVinnthorpe and were moved to other placesin the area, among them thirty children whoare now middle-aged, but they still miss thevillage.They say that nobody asked them whatthey wanted - they were told one day thateverl.thing was decided.They were separatedfrom their friends and had to get buses to newschools instead of walking there together. It isa shame that these people lost their homes,and I hope something similar never happensagain in the future.I would miss thewatersports if they weren't there, however,and I must say that I hadn't ever thought aboutwhat was under the water until last week.

K" X TEST 2, READING PART 4

21 What is the writer trying to do?

A describe what people think about thedrowned village

B persuade people to take up watersportson Lake Vinney

25 Which of these is an advert for Lake Vinnev?

A

c discuss what might happen to LakeVinney in the future

explain why people like living by LakeVinney

Come to Lake Vinney and

water-ski or sail. No ugly car

parks, shops or cafés around the

lake to spoil the views.

B

22 What do we learn about Pat Smithers?

A She lives beside the lake.

B She used to live in Vinnthorpe.

C She often visits the area on holiday.

D She earns her living near Lake Vinney.

Come to Vinnthorpe andstay in a hotel in thevillage. Enioy the walksaround the lake in completepeace and quiet.

cLakeVinney is perfect for all kinds of

watersports. Wonderfu| café by the

side of the lake and plenty of car-

parking space.

23 What do we Íind out about Lake Vinney?

A lt attracts tourists from abroad.

B There are lots of houses on the banks.

C More people are visiting it every year.

D Mainly local people do watersports there.

24 What does the writer think aboutVinnthorpe?

A He agrees with Pat Smithers.

B He Íee|s sorry for the peop|e wholived there.

C He thinks it should now be forgotten.

D He has always felt guilty about water-skiing there.

I

TEST 2, READING PART 4 W

1 Function: expressing attitudes

|n this part oÍ the exam, at leasl one question is abou|

people's attiludes and opinions. ln the text on page

62, several people express attitudes.

a) Match the people (a-d) with the attitudes (1-8).

Who...1 said drowning the village was the best

aL

3

4

5

6

7

thing that ever happened?neveÍ think about the drowned houses?

was surprised?still feel angry about what happened?

still miss the village?thinks it's a shame?hope something similar neverhappens again?would miss the watersports?

the shop o\ /ner

the writer of the textpeople who used to live in Vinnthorpepeople doing watersports

Complete these sentences with your own

I think it's a shame that some peoPle

I feel angry whenI sometimes miss

I really hope .........

Grammar: reported speech

ln the text on page 62, the writer reports whatpeople said:... they said they never thought about the drownedhouses ...

The people actually said:

We never Ť.hink abouŤ the drowned hougee,

What differences do you notice?

b) Now compare these and underline thedifferences.

1 He said he would visit them the next day.

2 She said she could help us with our luggage.

I can help you with your luqqaqe.

They told us they weren't going to leave thatevening.

c)

8

a)

b)

L)

d)

b)

1

L

3

4

ideas.

2

a)

4 We told them we had already locked the door.

We,ve a|ready |ocked, Ťhe door.

5 I said I hadn't been there the day before.

I wagn,Ť' here yeeLerday'

Complete the second sentence so it meansthe same as the first, using no more thanthree words.

John said he didn't \ /ant any coffee.

John said,, I ........,.4.Q.|.]tr. w.aný''.' .'', . ... any coffee.'

They said the book was in the post.

'The book .. in the post,'they said.

She explained she usually worked there in theevenings.She explained, 'levening.'

in the

She told us she was going home.

She told ÚS, ,.......'.... .......' home.,

You said you expected to arrive before lunch.You said, '.................. ... to arrivebefore lunch.'We said we would help with the housework atthe weekend.'We ........... with the houseworkat the weekend,'we said.

He informed us we had to pay extra..You ........... extÍa,'he informedus.

I told them I would phone the next day.

'I ............... ...... i I told them.

You told me you could speak Spanish.

'I ............... ...... Spanish,'you told me.

He said my sister had already phoned the hospital.

He said, '.................. ... already phonedthe hospital.'

rcř3 TEST 2, READING PART 4

3 Grammar: patterns after reporting verbs

Complete the second sentence so that it means thesame as the Íirst, using no more than three words.

0 My friend suggested going to the cinema.

My friend said,'Why ..........4..o.f.|!.W.Q............ . ... goto the cinema?'

My father advised me to walk so I got someexercise.

My father said, 'Youwalk so you get some exercise.'

Sarah invited Giacomo to her paÍty'Sarah said, 'Would .................... tocome to my party?'

The sign reminded us to drive on the left inEngland.The sign said, 'Don't .................... todrive on the left in England.'The man refused to give his wallet to the thief.

The man shouted, 'No, I

give you my wallet.'5 Matilda apologised for starting the fire.

Matilda said, '......... I startedthe fire.'

4 Vocabularyi get

6eÍis a veÍy common word in English and has |ots oÍ

diÍÍerent meanings. You wil| meet and need to use it

in many parts oÍ lhe exam.

Geť is used in Íour different Ways in the text:

a) It is easier to get to.

b) They had to get buses to new schools.

c) She gets up early.

Q fhey still get angry.

a) Match the sentences a-d to their meanings 1-4.I get + adjective = become

2 get fo + place = travel to

3 get + transport = catch

4 get uP = leave the bed

b) Write a number 1-4 next to each of thesesentences to show which meaning geÍ has.

a) Are you getting the bus?

b) I'd get wet if it rained.

c) I have to get up early for college.

d) How do you get to work?

c) Gomplete the sentences below with anexpression from the box.

got to the sports club get a lift get any e-mailsget to know get out of bed getting off6€+s{ř€+;ř-tired get married get homeget to school get it back

O Angelo has two jobs, so he ....0a!?.v?N..ti.1.8.4;....

1 How do you ..? By bus oron foot?

2 I realised I had forgotten my tennis racket when l

I lent that CD to Jenny - I must remember to

4 My computer isn't working and I can't

5 In the winter I find it really difficult to ................

She slipped as she \^/as ...........the bus and hurt her ankle.

I missed the last bus, so I had to

8 My sister and her boyfriend have decided to

9 Maria didn't .. untilmidnight. Her parents were really angry.

10 Peter is an interesting person, and I'd like tohim better.

5 Speaking: past habits (used to)

ln the text on page 62, we read about people who used

to live in Vinnthorpe, but don't live lhere any more.

We say used to when we talk about something we did

in the past that we don't do now.

Work with a partner. Talk about things you used todo that you don't do now. For example, think about:o what you used to eat and drinko what you used to \ /ear

o what activities you used to like/dislike doingo what you used to do in the evenings/at

weekends.

I uged Ťo Ťakemy |itt|e broŤher|o Ť,he park oneaturdaye, Nowhe qoee wiŤh hiefriende.

I ueed Ť,o drinkmilk wiíh mybreakfagŤ,' NowI nreler rnÍÍec' Y',"',"',

I never usedŤo |ike p|ayinqfooŤba||, butnow | ]ove iŤ'

TEST 2, READING PART 4 W

) stt"tesy1 Read the instructions to the Exam Task on

the opposite page.1 What do you have to read?

2 What do you have to choose?3 Where do you put your answers?

2 Look at the tit|e oÍ the text and makeguesses about the text.

Can you guess which oÍ the following people thetext might be about?. a man who lives in an airport. a man who works in an airport. a man who likes visiting airports. a man who designs airports

3 Read the text quickly and check yourguess.

Don't Worťy about the numbered spaces fornow. Did you guess correctly?

4 Look at the example (0) and read the firstsentence of the text careÍul|y.

1 What is the answer to the example?2 Why are the other answers not possible?

5 Look at Questions 26-35 and choosethe answers for the ones you are certainabout.

For each question:. read the whole of the sentence which

contains the spacer write the word you choose in the space

- it may help you to understand the text.

.. EXO6 tlp! ... o.. . ..... ...... ... . o....! Choose the answers for the spaces you are :! certain about first. Then go back and guess :3 the other answers.

aa

.....!

6 Go back and guess the other answers.

7 Check your work.When you have finished, read the text again allthe way through. Do your ans\^/ers make sense?

I Mark your answers on your answersheet.

Check that you have put them in the rightplace.

iÁqm Za{IIsIp noÁ op s1ralqns qJIqM l;noÍ ro; }selsea sr paÍqns q]IqM g

1asea1d .atu ro; IooqJs rnoÁ;o alueu aq1 11ads no.'( ue3 9

ZIooqJs ]Pq] }e uaaq noÁ azreq 3uo1m.o11 Ý

Zur }eq} sI u'lro} Jq} Jo ped 1eq,q €

ZIooqJs rnoÁ;o aueu aq} sl}Pq6 Z

Zaueu rnoÁ s,1eqp1 I

.suoqsanb asaq} Jauued rnoÁ {se ,fl 1uapn}s

169 a?ud) 4SDJ luDxg .L ],t0ď 3ut1aaď3

Part 5

Questions 26-35

Read the text below and choose the correct word for each soace.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Examole:

A |eÍt B went C removed D departed

Answer: nlA B C D-tffi

The airport man

YesterdayAhmed (0) his home for the first time in eleven years. But hishome is a very unusual one - he has (26) .............. the last eleven yeáfs living in aninternational airport. Ahmed had no family in his own country, so eleven years ago heset off to search (27) .............. his sister who lived in Scotland. He hadn't heard fromher for (28) .............. , but he had an old address. He never (29) .............. Scotland,however, because while he was (30) ....... .... for a connecting flight, all his documents(31) .............. stolen and he had to ask for Írew ones. (32) .............. he had nowhereto go' he stayed in the airport. AÍter a (33) '............. weeks' he was still there. Hebecame (34) . . ....... as'Sir George'and all the airport staff liked him. Eleven years(35) .............. his documents arrived and he was free to go. But he no longer wanted to!

26 A taken

27Ato28 A years

29 A got

30 A waiting

31 A had

32 A Although

33 A several

34 A called

35 A following

B passed

B for

B times

B arrived

B thinking

B were

B Even

B many

B known

B since

C spent

c Írom

C long

C travelled

C booking

C are

CAsC lot

C told

C later

D used

DatD ever

D reached

D sitting

D have

DtfD few

D said

D next

ITEsr 2, READTNG pART 5 WX

1 Grammar: preposition or no prepositionaÍter a verb

|n Part 5, you oÍlen need to know which preposition

(iÍ any) ÍolIows a certain verb'

Look at the following sentences. Each verb isfollowed by a space. Decide whether you need toput a preposition in each space. lf you do need apreposition, decide which one.

O My uncle lived ..i.tl... Africa when he was young.

1 The boys got home very late onSaturday.

2 The shop assistant brought ................... thecustomer several different pairs of shoes.

3 I'm looking a birthday present formy uncle.

4 The plane didn't reach ........ Sydney untilthe next day.

5 Nobody Can enteÍ the buildingwithout an identity card.

6 We're staying friends until our newflat is ready.

7 I took my coat the hook and put it inmy case.

8 Please can you pass ................... me an apple?

9 What time does the ferry arrive ................... theisland?

10 A thief stole ................... mv wallet when I was inthe cinema.

2 Grammar: words that describe how muchor how many

|n 0ues|ion 33 on page 67, you shou|d have chosen Íeuto Íi|| |he space aÍter a ...,.. weeks' Severaland many

do not Íil |he space because they do not Íollow a. Latwi||

on|y Íit in this space iÍ it is Ío|lowed by oÍ.

a) Underline the correct word or words in eachsentence.

0 Have you got manylmuch homework tonight?

1 Please hurry. We've only got a fewla /lffle minutesbefore the film starts.

2 I need anlsome information about eveningclasses.

3 Can I make alsome suggestion?

4 We've got alsome bread, but there's only a fewla little cheese.

5 There isn't alany room for your coat in yoursuitcase, so you'll have to carry it.

6 I enjoyed the party, but Bob didn't havemanylmuch fun because his girlfriend was ill.

b) Add of where necessary in these sentences.

0 You only need shorts and a couple ..af.. T-shirtsto \ /ear on the beach.

1 I phoned the tourist office and got lots ......information about hotels.

2 I saw several ...... my friends at the party.

3 We didn't wash up until every ...... guest hadleft.

4 Both ...... David and Gabrielle are taller than me.

5 The singer gave each ...... his fans a signedphotograph.

6 All ...... children need a loving home.

3 Vocabulary= likelas

It's important to remember when we use /ike and when

w8 use as.

Complete each sentence with either like or as.

0 Alecia Moore is better known .2?.. Pink.

1 Has anyone ever told you that you look ......Britney Spears?

2 I worked ...... a waiter to pay my college fees.

3 Julia's father is very rich. Their house is ...... a

palace.

4 Are you sure this isto mel

5 John's teachers remembered him ...... a cleverstudent when he was young.

6 Although Saskia is fifteen, she still behaves ...... a

ten-year-old sometimes.7 Milo's English was so good he got a job ...... an

interpreter.8 Even if we run ...... the wind, we'll still be late

for class.

9 On the plane, I used my jacket ...... a pillow andsoon fell asleep.

10 The opera house closed last year, but reopened...... a cinema last week.

rEsr 2, READTNG PART s

4

a)

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

o

Vocabulary: at the airport

Choose three people and three places from thefollowing list. Write a sentence explaining whateach one is. Use the language in the box belowto help you.

baggage hallcheck-in desk

customs officerdeparture loungeduty-free shop

AcashCTOSS

fasten

Ba seat

the flightthe borderyour suitcaseyour seat beltyour destinationsome traveller's cheques

miss

packreach

reserve

b) Now choose one oÍ the expressions ÍromExercise 4a to complete these sentences,putting the verb in the correct form.

o I .....ni.? ed.ý|.e.|!ahI...... because there was aterrible traffic jam on the way to the airport.

flight attendantinformation desk

passenger

pilotsnack bar

1 The train stopped for half an hourbetween

when weItaly and

6

a)

b)

c)

Useful languageThis is someone who ...

This is the person who ...

This is the place where ...

Thie ie eorneonewho fliee Vlanee.

Work with a partner. Read aloud what you havewritten.Your partner will guess which person orplace you are describing.

Now imagine that you are at the airport andthat you are going to fly somewhere. With yourpartner, think of the order in which you mightgo to the places in the list.

5 Vocabulary: words that go together

Learning verbs and nouns in matching pairs will helpyou remember vocabulary.

a) Match each verb in List A with the correct nounphrase Írom List B.

Switzerland.You'd better ... so thatyou've got plenty of money when we goshopping.I always .. on the trainbecause I like to sit by the window.'Did you .. yourself?'asked the man at the check-in desk.

You should .. while theplane is taking off.

When you ........... , make sureyou take all your luggage with You.

Speaking: travelling

Work with a partner. Say which way you wouldprefer to travel and exPlain whY.

Useful languageI'd rather ... dangerous

exciting exPensive(un)comfortable

L

1J

Now ask and answer these questions.

Have you ever flown on a plane or helicopter?When? Where did you go? WhY?Have you ever missed a plane? What happened?

What are the advantages and disadvantages offlying compared to other kinds of transport?

b)

1

When you arrive at Ť,he airporŤ, you qoto Ťhe check.in degk,then you ...

TEST 2, READING PART 5 ffi

) stt"tesy

1

2

3

4{

6

7

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskbelow.How many sentences are there?

What are the sentences about?

What do you have to do?

How many words can you use?

Where do you write your answers?

How much do you write there?

Where can you do your rough work?

Compare the two sentences in theexample.Read the first sentence. What information doesit give you about the cinema?Now read the second sentence. Does it give youthe same information as the first sentence?

3 Answer Question 1.

1 Read the first sentence. What informationdoes it give you about the cinema?

2 Now read the beginning and end of thesecond sentence. How does it begin? Howdoes it end?

3 How can you complete it? Write your ans\^/er.

4 Check your answer.o Does your sentence give the same information

as the first sentence?. Is the grammar correct?. How many words have you used?

5 Answer the other questions in the sameway.

Write the answers to Questions 2-5 on youranswer sheet.

Remember you can write your ans\ /ers on theexam paper first if you wish and then copy them.

.. EXO6 tip! .. o....... o.... o.... o......3 Don't write more than three words. :3a aaaoa aaaaaa a aaooaa aaaaaaa.....aaaa aa

2

Part íQuestions 1-5

Here are some sentences about a cinema. 2 lt has twetve screens.For each question, complete the secondsentence so that it means the same as the first. There

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer 3 The tickets cost less during the week.sheet.You may use this page for any rough work.

Example:

0 The cinema is near the shopping mall.

The cinema is ........... from theshopping mall.

Answer: o I noŤ far

1 The cinema opened two years ago.

The cinema ........ here for twoyears.

twelve screens.

The tickets are ............ at weekends.

4 My sister to|d me she had seen a great new Íi|m

there last week.

My sister said,'l ........ a great newÍilm there this week.'

5 My boyfriend advised me to book tickets.

The boyfriend said I ........................... booktickets.

lnXrX TEST 2, WRITING PART 1

a)

Grammar: matching patterns

ln Part 1, the same grammar patterns are oÍlen les|ed.

It is a good idea to study these patterns so lhat you

can recognise them.

Read the twelve sentences below. Find the six

1

ÓL

3AŤ

5

6

pairs which have the same meanings.

The waiter said I should try the fish soup.

It's too cold to sit outside.The restaurant is not far from the river.

The meals cost a lot in the evening.It's not \ /arm enough to sit outside.My girlfriend told me she had reallyenjoyed her meal.The waiter advised me to try thefish soup.

You won't get a table unless youbook early.

9 My girlfriend said, 'I really enfoyedmy meal.'

10 The restaurant is near the river.

11 The meals are moÍe exDensive in theevening.

12 IÍ you don't book early, you won,t geta table.

b) Match each pair oÍ sentences above with one oÍthese patterns.

0 modal verbs

a) similar meaningsb) too I enough

c) reported speech + direct speechd) oppositese) if not ) unless

...1.... ana .7.....

c) Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first, using no more than threewords.

1 My suitcase \ /as on top of my sister's on the shelf.

My sister's suitcase \/as ...........on the shelf.

2 We said \ /e \ /ere looking for our books.

We said, 'We ........... our books.'

3 If I were you, I'd buy that CD.Why .......... buy that CD?

4 Your jeans are clean enough to wear.

Your ieans aren't .. wear.

5 This shop is closed on Saturday afternoons.

This shop isn't .......... .......... onSaturday afternoons.

6 We'll go to the tennis club if it doesn't rain.

We'll go to the tennis club ..........it rains.

7 Which band do you like best?

Which is your .. band?

8 He said he ate in the canteen every day.

He said, 'I ............... ...... in thecanteen every day.'

9 This house is close to the sports ground.

This house isn't .......... .......... thesports ground.

10 She explained she hadn't got any money.

She said, 'I ............... ...... money.'

2 Correcting mistakes

Read these pairs of sentences.There is a mistakein the second sentence. Can yeu correct it?0 He's called Robert.

áie name ""í1,d

KoberŤ,.

My flat isn't as big as yours.

My f|aŤ ig gma||er a9 youre'

My brother is a member of the tennis club.

|'/y broŤ,her ie be|onq to the Ťennig c|ub,

My sister suggested I should go swimmingwith her.

,Why not you Come ewimminq wiŤh me?,euqgeeŤed my eieter.

You can't get a table unless you book.

You can qeŤ, a tab|e if you don,Ť, book,

I like modern shops better than old ones.

I prefer modern ehope from old onee.

TEST 2, WRITING PART ffixK

) str"tesy

1

2

.'t

Aa

5

Read the instructions to the Exam Taskopposite.What are you going to write?Who are you writing to?

How many things do you have to write about?

How many words do you have to write?Where do you write your answer?

2 Planning your answer

Before you begin to write, Iook at the words in theinstructions. Mark the words that tell you whatinformation you should include. Think about whatextra information you need to add.

1 What has Eva borrowed?2 When?3 How will you start your note?

4 What do you have to ask her to do?

5 Why do you need it back?

3 Writing your answer

Read the notes A, B and C opposite.

1 Which is the best answer? Why?2 What is wrong \ /ith the other two answers?

Checking and correcting your work

Read this e-mail. lt has eight grammarmistakes. Find and underline the mistakes.

b) Work with a partner and compare the mistakesyou Íound. Correct the mistakes together.

c

i'i [,ttt

I lcie yott, r€ ,,€ll' ,i;iJ

you €r)O,f IaÚr ca'niilx

l^oliJay u'i,Íl your frie,lJs? I hoýe le ulealer

tu45 fotlJ. Nas lty fL|L/('5lLL useful? Plea'se cttil

f()Ú r€/'L1rt iŤ befcre reXr,,)eet€/]J? Thatl,( you

,tery,nttth,

5erXio

||i Éva

Do yat, vev enbey that you bowued rrny rucksac[

two weeks qot, Latld ya,r give ii bac[ to ne sou,please?.l need it be{ore next weekevrd becnre I'rvr

going carvrpivrg with some {r.iends,

tanIs,,

Avrdreas

Hi Eva

Do gou remember thot gou lent me o ruchsoch two weeŘs

ogo? IJ gou doďt need tt goursetJ, con 1 borrow it ogoln

next weehend, pleose?

I need it becouse I'm going complng wlth

some Jriends.Thonks,

EstelLe

Part 2

Question 6

A Íriend, Eva, borrowed your rucksack twoweeks ago and hasn't returned it.

Write a note to Eva. In your note, you should

o remind her that she has your rucksacko ask her to return it

o explain why you need it.

Write 35-45 words on vour answer sheet

A

B

4

a)

Dear AdrianaDo you remember to camp in Wales last year? Wouldyou like coming to lreland with me in next month?My exam's finish after two weeks and my cousinshave invited me going with them. We can use my

brothers'tent because he needn't it.

&&X rEsr 2, wRrrrNG PART 2

1

a)

Grammar: possessives

Look at these sentences and answer thequestions below.

We visited several of the students' houses.

She lost all her sister's money.

I found the children's socks.

Why is the apostrophe (') in a different place instudents' and sister's?

Z Is children a singular word or plural word?3 What is unusual about children's?

b) Rewrite the sentences below in your notebooknadding apostrophes in the correct places.

0 When he got angry, you could hear my fathersvoice in the next street.

W.h.e.r,..h.e..aaP-.ar.qry,.v.eL)..aau.l.4..na.ar..rrv..talherle...y e ! a a.!n .!n a.n Q\tr. .o. ! r.Q.e. !,

1 I have two brothers and two sisters - my brothersschool is near our house, but my sisters school isthree kilometres a\ /ay.

2 I looked through all the v/omens clothes in theshop, but there was nothing suitable.

3 I tried not to laugh when I saw Janes new hairsýle.4 Her friends parents all agreed that the party

should finish at eleven.

5 I don't like borrowing other peoples clothes.

2 Grammar: verbs followed by -ing orinfinitive

Comp|ete these sentences using one oÍ the verbs inthe box in the correct form.

apply arrive buy drive know learnleave ffi€et phone talk tidy t{€+el

0 Would you like ',,Í,Q..W.8e.ý,..... me after worktomorrow?

0O I,ve often imaginea ...ý:.?.Y9J]ií4.. around theworld, but I never have.

1 I hope .. a ne\/ language next year.

2 They didn,t want ......... at the paÍty tooearly.

3 Will you promise ..................... me as soon as youget home?

4 Jake caught the bus because he disliked.. in the city centre.

She asked her sister .. her a pair oftights.Please don't forget ..................... the kitchenbefore you go out.When \ /e came into the room/ everyone stopped

and looked at us.

B Would you consider ..................... for a new iob?9 He pretends ..................... a lot about art, but he

doesn't really.

10 My uncle always regretted .. school at

fifteen.

Exam Task

Write your answer to this question.

An English friend, Saskia, is spending theday at your home next Sunday. You \ /ant totell her what to expect.

Write a note to Saskia. In your note, youshould. tell her who she will meet. say what kind of meal she will haveo ask how she would like to spend the day.

Write 35-45 words on your ans\/er sheet.

When you have finished, check your workcarefully.Have you included all the information?Have you written no more than 45 words?

Is your grammar correct?Is your spelling correct?

a

o

O

1

3

a)

b)

a

a

a

o

l. EXA6 tip! .......... o o o o......... o o..3 tvtake sure you answer all three parts of the :a .. a. exam OUeStlOn, .aaa a aaaaaaaaaaoooaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

TEST 2, WRITING PART 2 [fl

In Part 3 there arean informal letterONE task only.

two writing tasks:and a story. You ans\ /er

) Str"tegy: letter

1 Read the instructions to the Exam Taskbelow.

1 Who are you going to write to?2 What does your friend ask you to write about?3 Where must you write your answer?

2 Planning your answer

a) Write down three ideas Íor your |etter.

Example:c.lv c€r'r€y'-ulc: beároo45....

7ttÍeŤ sŤf€€./ :

,. .,. ............ .:

b) Write down flve useÍu| words and phrases thatyou can use in your letter.

ExamDIe:

a ba/cott/ l,

ť,C, 1/ r{ :, occŤt: nc:/€ itl

']

,to y..aitt'r :.

c) Decide how your answer will begin and end.(Look back atTest 1 page 30 if you are notsure.)

3 Writing your letter

Read Answers A and B to Question 7 opposite.

1 Which is the best answer? Why?2 Why is the other ans\ /er not so good?3 Can you find eight grammar mistakes in

that answer?

4 Checking and correcting your work

Work with a partner and compare the mistakesyou found. Correct the mistakes together.

Part 3

Question 7

o This is part of a |etter you receive Írom an EngIish-speaking friend.

rn your |ost |etter , you gave me your new oddress. P|eose wriŤeond Ťe|l me Whot your new home ís |ike. rs ít in o sími|or p|ace?WhoŤ do you |íke besŤ obout ít2

o Now write a letter, telling your friend about your new home.

o Write your Ietter on your answer sheet.

x&x TEST 2, WRITING PART 3

BADear Alex

Thanks lov yow leiter, Yau want to know

what is the new {lat like, Well, 1 love it!

It's into a bloc!^ o{ {lats neav ol the citycentve, but it's in a yiet street. It'snol so sn,ra|| ihan our o|á otq so 1 don,t

had *o share a Yoovt with vrny bvořV,ev, a,ve

got Tlenty o* sTace {or nny connTuter, 1

7a\nted v l voov^ belove we vrnove in,

But the better thing about this {lat is the

balcony,lt's really big and we ave having

break{ast there eveY\ wtorninq,

t hope you'll corrne and see it soon,

All the bestMavco

\'-Ďear la/,|

TAa'n,(s fc;r /ottr /eŤŤer, ýatt ,lanŤŤc: Ktloul abouŤ our n€ú ftol' Ne//,i/s 1rea/' I/s in r'Áe "i7 ,.€nrre)buŤ lÁe sy'-r€er i5 7uie.fi /r5 O/1

he SrourtJ f/oor of a srna// b/oc,L

of f/als. -Tl-s aucA biper lÁa,? ourc:/J c>tl€, 5o -f Á,\,/e ll/ ou'ttl

beJroc:ru. /!1y lreJr""ru is pailtfeJb/ue a/1J uÁire a,?J Ť^er€ s P/€/1ryc,f space for e,teyhirtq i rtee.!./L|7 fa,',",lriŤe parf of lÁis f/aŤ islÁe ba'/con/' j l-s bi, a,?J su/1/y, 5oUJe La'/1 eaŤ y'Áere aŤ uee,(enJs., ),,: Áope yatt // vtisi.f us here Sc>c;t?.

A// .,4e b€sr ý,oberl-o

1 Vocabulary: describing houses and flats

ln the exam, you oÍten have to descrlbe yout home,

or someone else's.

Use the words in the boxes to label the picture.You can use a dictionary to help you.

basement first floor ground floor front doorpath window gate hedge garage balcony

Vocabulary: things in your room

Alex has a computer in his room. What do youhave in yours? Mark the things on the list belowwhich you have in your room, then compare yourlist with a partner.

air conditioning armchair basin blindcarpet CD player chest of drawers computercupboard curtain desk fridge mirrorradiator radio rug shower televisionwardrobe

Talk about these questions.What other things do you have in your rooms?

What other things would you like to have inyour rooms?

2

a)

b)

1

z

TEST 2, WRITING PART &s{

) St."tegyr story

1 Read the instructions to the Exam Taskbelow.

1 What title must your story have?2 Where must you write your answer?

2 Planning your answerBefore starting your story, it is important tomake a plan. Your story must be simple enoughto finish in about 100 words.

a) Write down some ideas for the story. Usethese ideas to help you.

. Begin with someone feeling sad.

. Describe a good surprise.

b) How will your story end? Think about thisquestion.

How did he/she feel?

c) Write down Íive useÍu| words and phrases thatyou can use in your story.

Example: , !b'r /7d ry'

/

ae J;-,lpc in,eJJ;'.( c t €,

,L|€ss ll

a p/att ll

3 Writing your story

Read Answers A and B to Question I on page77.

1 Which is the best answer? Why?2 Why is the other ansvřer not so good?

3 Can you find five grammar mistakes in thatanswer?

4 Checking and correcting your work

Work with a partner and compare the mistakesyou Íound. correct the mistakes together.

.. EXO6 tip! r...oooo....oo....o...o..o.3 Remember to keep your story simple. You only :

: . :::..'.".".:..ť]: . o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . !

Part 3

Question Io Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must have this title:

The surprise

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

m TEST 2. WRITING PART 3

BA

The surťrise

/ knew a bov ca//ed Timmy. He used to stea/inq

thtnas h,á ,h,,,. ue híd hts n4uney. Noboívtk,t l;^ ue ti|d hts fr,ends he sbíe thin1s,,They

weren,t ínterested in.

One day he was ta/kiny to some other.boys in a

café. A ynunq n4an cu,ile in, He sat at the satne

tibt,. ,u,,íid

ri-^,, ,/ don,t be/,e,,e yo, rea//y

stea/th*ss.,Tim,uí showed h,,n o óD. tt,,t.sto|en thí co thai^orninj, ,Doyo,

be/ie,,e,ue

now?'he asked.

'Yes,' s aid th e )/0

un! rnAr.'l'rn arresttng yo u.

l'tn policeman.'

Tinruy was ver)/ surprised. He didn't knowwhat to say.

The surrrise1 usually s7ev.'d Fv,láay evenings with vny {vi"nd,Mina. Last Fviéay W4s Yny birthday. &t schoo|.,

sovte ol ^y

classvnaies said (Ha77y birthday'w|.'en 1 cavne into the classroovtl, buř 1 was a

little bit álsa77o\nted, beca.lse Mina didn,tsuggest rneeting Ťhat evening.

L thought, '?ev*ra7s her favnily has visi*ors.'b/hen 1 9a* hav,ne, vny father múe w..,e sit in

the car, thevr he coveved wty {ace with a scavl*td drove sawrewlnere.

1 discoveved we were at Mina's hatrse, lvyrd

there was Mina with att otrr {riend s, veady lova 7arřy,1 was rea|ly surpv\sed becalse ahadn't guessed their plan,

í lmproving your story: using linking Words

Look at Answer A again. lt has too many shortsentences, so it isn't very interesting to read. Use aword from the box to Íi|| each space in the text be|ow

and make the story more interesting.

although and but so that whowhen which

I knew a boy called Timmy (1) ...................... usedto steal things from shops. (2) ........... he hadlots of money, nobody liked him. He told his friendsthat he stole things, (3) ........... they weren'tinterested. One day, he was talking to some otherboys in a café (4) ...'.................. a young man camein (5) ......... sat at the same table. He saidto Timmy, 'I don't believe you really steal things.'Timmy showed him a CD (6) ... he'dstolen that morning. 'Do you believe me now?'he asked.

'Yes,' said the young man, 'I'm arresting you. I'm a

policeman.'Timmy was (7) ... surprised (B) .................

he didn't know \ /hat to saY.

2 lmproving your story: adding information

a) Here is part of a different story. Read the storyand then took at the phrases in the box below.Decide which one fits best in each space.

(1) ............. I decided to go on a bus tourone afternoon. The tour goes through a part ofLondon (D ............. (3) .............I saw a strange castle beside the road. I asked theman (4) ... 'What is that castle?'

He looked at me (5) ...................... and said, 'Therehasn't been a castle here for a hundred years.'

a) While the bus was waiting at some trafficlights

b) which has lots of famous old buildings in itc) Although the weather \ /as \ /et

d) very strangelye) who was sitting next to me

1

aL

.f

Ť̂

5

Add your own ideas to make some interestingsentences.The young man lived in a small flat which ..'

The film director met his wife while ...

The girl shouted ...... and everyone heard her.

Although the party began late, ...There's a ne\/ student in our class who ...

b)

TEST 2, WR|T|NG PART 3 &řn

1

a

a

a

a

) Str"tegy: choosing your question

Read both the Exam Tasks below.Write down two ideas for your letter.

Write down five useful words or phrases thatyou can use in your letter.

Write down two ideas for your story.

Write down five useful words or phrases thatyou can use in your story.

Look at your notes. Which question is easierfor you?

2 Make a plan on your exam paper.

3 Write your answer.

4 Check and correct your work.

(Look back atTest 1, page 34.)

Part 3Write an answer to one oÍ the questions (7 or 8) in this part.Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet.

Question 7

o This is part oÍ a |etter you receive from an Eng|ish penfriend.

You to/d me in gour /ast /etter thatgou spwetímes sta7 wiÍh gour cousíns in

the summer. What kind ofp/ace c/o theg lire in? Can gou full ne about it?

o Now write a |etter, answering your penÍriend's questions.

o Write your letter on your answer sheet.

Question Io Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must have this title:

A new member of the family

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

n6x TEST 2. WRITING PART 3

) strategy

I t I Listen to the introduction to the test.

1 How many parts does the Listening test have?

2 How many times will you hear each part?

3 Where do you write your answers?

4 What will you do at the end of the test?

5 How long will you have?

2 triJ Read and listen to the instructionsÍor Part 1 be|ow.

1 How many questions are there?

2 How many pictures are there for eachquestion?

3 What do you have to do?

3 ó J Look at the examp|e and Iisten tothe recording.

1 What is the question?2 What is the answer?

3 How do you know?

4 Look at Question 1. Think about whatyou are going to hear.

1 What information must you listen for?

2 Look at the three pictures. What are thenames of the places in Pictures A, B and C?

3 Listen to the recording for Question 1.

Which of the places did you hear?

4 Listen again and mark your ans\^/er.

5 Why is A wrong?6 Why is B wrong?7 W};ry is C the correct answer? What does the

woman say?

5 Do Questions 2-7 in the same way.

.. EXO6 tiO! ....... o.. . . . . . .. ....... ...i R.r.rb.r you witt hear each recording twice :

I so you have a second chance to choose the :

! answers.a

aaa

aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaoooaoaaaooaaaaaaa

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.

For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.

Choose the correct picture and put a tick (/) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

c!lTurn over

Aa B!

ITEST 2, LISTENING PART 1 xEl

1 Where willthey meet?

A!2 What is the woman looking for?

c!3 Which photograph are they looking at?

4 Where is the boy's flat?

--__\-

-]D[3--__\-

]EDBUSSTOP

tr5 Who is coming to stay with the girl?

4..4

&- ^ltž/)ffi

}l€^, \F;I F-t)

Atr B!6 What was the weather like on Tom's holidav?

c!

)./í.],;YŠ

,l

Atr7 Where is the desk now?

Bn ctr

Dlffi tslw|Ť

Atr

ffi

Atr

c!rcm rEsr 2, LrsrENrNG PART j

1 Vocabulary: weather

ln Part 1, |here is oÍten a question about the weather.ln Question 6 on page 80, the boy talked about bright

sunshine, the rain and cloudy weather.

Match the following sentences to the pictures.Some sentences can be used with more than onepicture.. It's sunny.o It's windy.o lt's foBBI.o lt's cloudy.

Work in pairs. Choose a place on the map. Don'ttell your partner what it is.Tell your partner howto get there from the bus stop.

Give your partner directions from your schoolto somewhere in your town or city. Don't say thename of the place. Does he/she arrive in thecorrect place?

Vocabulary: clothes

Here are some words that you may meet in theexam. Decide which words in the box belongwith the different clothes. (Some of them cango in all the columns!)

b€++ V-neck silk knee-length pocketscollar short sleeves buttons zipround neck leather high heels sleevelesswool cotton

skirt coat iacket dress shirt boots

bell belt be|Ť belt

b) Complete this conversation between a manand a lost-property officer using some of thewords above.

Officer: Good morning. Can I help you?Man: Yes, please. I've lost a jacket.

I think I left it on the train.Officer: OK. Can you describe it?Man: Yes. It's brown with a (1) .............

up the front. It's got two (2)

and it's made of (3) .............

Officer: Does it have a (4) .............

Man: No, it doesn't.

c) Write about someone in the class. Describethe clothes they are wearing. Then read yourdescription to the class. How quickly do theyguess who you are describing?

b)

c)

3

a)

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

a

It's icy.

It's frosty.

lt's snowing.It's raining.

It's freezing.It's damp.It's wet.

It's misty.

directions

a) Look at the map. Read these directions and fillin the gaps.

Get off the bus and go straight on at thecrossroads. Turn right at the roundabout,then take the first turning on the left. The

...... is on the left.

Get off the bus and turn right at the crossroads.Turn left at the roundabout. Go straight on at thetraffic lights. The ........... is on the nextcorner on the left.

yý-2í\

I

nding

TEST 2, LISTENING PART 1 W

) str"tesy

1

2

3ÁŤ

5

6

f J Read and listen to the instructions tothe Exam Task below.How many questions are there?

Who will you hear?

Who is she talking to?

What is she talking about?

What do you have to do?

How many times will you hear the recording?

2 Read the questions.They give you someinÍormation about what you wil| hear.

Which of the fo||owing points do you Íind outÍrom the questions? Put a tick next to them.

1 They will come back to the hotelin the early evening.

2 They will visit a town.3 They will have coffee in a hotel.4 Something about the trip has

changed.5 Brampton is a village.6 They will stop in the countryside

for a drink.7 They will visit a wildlife park.

3 ó J Listen to the recording the first time.

a) Look at Ouestion 8. Listen to what the tourguide says about the change oÍ plan and tickthe correct answer.

Be careful - she mentions a to\ /n, a universityand a wildlife park, but there is only onechange to the plans.

b) Look at Question 9. Listen to where they willstop for a coffee. Tick the correct answer.

c) Now do Questions 10-13 in the same way.

4 (, j Listen to the recording again.

Gheck the answers you have marked and tryto do any you missed the first time. |Í you stilldon't know, guess! Do not leave any questionsunanswered.

.. EXO6 tlp! ... o.. .. o. .... . o.. .. o. .... .

! You must choose the answer which really gives :

! the information asked for in the question, so :

: . :":: i:: :::'.':".1:"ll il'.'ii'Y: . . . . . . . . . . . . i

tr!!n!n!

Pant 2

Questions 8-13

You will hear a tour guide talking to a group of tourists about a coach tripFor each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

I What is the change of plan? A They will visit two towns.

B They will look round a university.

C They will visit a wildlife park.

trtrn

9 Where wi|l they stop Íor coffee? A near a waterfall

B by a lake

C on a mountain

!!!

W TEST 2, LISTENING PART 2

10 The town of Bramoton became wellknown because of its

A shops

B university

C museum

n!!

11 What animals willthey see in the wildlife park? A lions

B monkeys

C tigers

trT!

12 What time will thev arrive back at the hotel? A 5.30

B 6.45

c 7.15

!nt]

13 The tour guide asks if anyone A needs more information.

B would like to go on another triP.

C wants to ask any questions.

trtr!

1 Grammar: possessives

ln lhe Listening on pages 82-83, the tour guide talksabout some Íriends oÍ mine' This is another way oÍ

saying my Íriends oÍ sume oÍ ny Íriends.

She also says a colleague oÍ nine.This is another way oÍ saying my colleague ot one oÍny colleagues.We can say a Íriend oÍ ny mother,s or (one 0t) nymather's Íriends'

Complete the second sentence so that it means thesame as the first, using no more than three words.

0 Andrew's friend is studying to become an actor.

e'... Í'r.i pn d. pJ.. h.r.d.r eu., p. . . .. is studying to becomean actoÍ.

1 one of my neighbours is having a paÍty.

A ............... ...... is having a paÍty.

My brother's friend has just sailed across theAtlantic Ocean.A friend .. has iust sailedacross the Atlantic Ocean.

My sister keeps wearing mY shoes.

My sister keeps wearing some shoes ......'.

One of her students has won a competition.A ............... ...... has won a

competition.One of their cousins lives in China.A ............... ...... lives in China.Sally's friends are hoping to rent a flat together'

Some friends .."............ ....' are hopingto rent a flat together.

TEST 2, LrsrENtNG PART 2 GXI

. to the sea.

2 'What's the time?'The man asks..........

2 Grammar: reported questions

a) Look at Question 13 from the Exam Task.

The tour guide asks if anyone ...

A needs more information.B would like to go on another trip.C wants to ask any questions.

Compare these direct and reported questions. How do

we Íorm reported questions?'Do you need more intornation?; sfe asks iÍ they need more inÍormation',What inÍormation do you need?,

+ $fe asks what inÍornation they need,

b) Report what these people are asking.

O ,Is that book David,s?, The teacher asks .iJ.IháL..

1 'When does the match start?' She asks

3 'Is it far to the cinema?' She wants to know

4 'Are you busy tonight, Paola?' Peter asks

5 Where's the nearest bus stop?'They want to know

5 Monica wanted to know how Clare knew abouther problems.

'How ........ ....... about my problems?'asked Monica.

6 John asked Rosemary why she hadn't phonedhim in the morning.'Why ........ ....... me in the morning?'said John to Rosemary.

3 Vocabulary: the environmentChoose the correct word Íor each space.

0 The sun ........... over the hills andthen it was dark.

B rose C finished D started

1 We spent the afternoon walking through thenear the village.

A hedge B green C tree D forest

2 The children ran across the sandy

A cliff B coast C beach D rock3 The sky was completely blue, except for one dark

A cloud B moon C star D sun

The race began at the café, went round theand back to the café.

A ocean B lake C river D stream

The boys camped in theaway from the cold wind.A waterfall B island C valley D mountainThis region is divided into five smaller

A continents B districts C lands D countries

4 Speaking: the environment

Talk to your partner. Answer these questions.

1 Do you live near the countryside?Z Do you like going into the countryside?3 Which palts of youl countÍy are famous for their

natural beauty?4 Do you ever visit them?5 Do you prefer spending a day in the countryside

or the city?

Useful languageI live in/quite near/a long way from thecountryside.The north/south/east/west of my country isfamous for ...

6

c)

0

1

'Are they coming to the cinema?' We ask

Complete the second sentence so that it meansthe same as the first, using not more than threewords.He asked what the time was.

'What ..............is.. the time?' he asked.

She wanted to know where I lived.'Where ?' she wanted toknow.They asked if they could sit near the window.They said, near thewindow?'I wondered when the rain would stop.

'When the rain stop?'I wondered.He inquired whether there were any seatsavailable.He said, any seatsavailable?'

lř.{ee TEST 2, LrsrENtNG PART 2

) stratesy

1

2

3

ód Read and |isten to the instructions tothe Exam Task below.How many questions are there?Who will you hear? What will they talk about?What do you have to do?

Look at the Exam Task and guess whatkinds oÍ words are missing'Look at Questions 1"4 and 16. What kind ofword can go in these spaces. How do you know?Look at Question 15. What kind of informationdo you need here? How do you know?Look at Question "i.7 . What kind of informationcan go here? How do you know?Look at Question 18. What kind of word doyou need here? How do you know?Look at Question 19. What sort of informationcan go here? How do you know?

3 áJ li"t"n to the recording the Íirst time.

Try to answer as many questions as you can.lf you miss a gap, don't worry. You can fill it in thesecond time you listen.

4 6J ti"t"n to the recording again.

Check the answers you wrote the first time. Fill inany answers you missed.

5 Check your answers.. How many words did you write in each space?. Is the meaning correct?. Is the grammar correct?e Is the spelling correct?

i. EXO6 tip! ... .. .. . . ....... o.... o... ..! You usually need to write one or two words, and !

: . ::".': :"i: ::l:'ji:u.'. . . . . . . . . o . . . . . . . . . !

Part 3

Questions 14-19

You will hear a woman talking on the radio about a competition.For each question, fill in the missing information in the numbered space.

This month's competitionPrize: a computer + a (14) ....... printer

Write a story. length: fewer than (15) ....... words. subject: a short (16) ............ story which

takes place in (17)

Write your name, address, telephone number and

(18) ............ at the end.

Story must arrive on or before (19) ............

TEST 2, LISTENING PART 3 reEX

1 Writing dates and numbers

In Part 3, it is imporlant lo be able to write dates and

numbers correctly.

a) Look at the Exam Task on page 85. Where mustyou write a date or number?

b) Write the following dates correctly in yournotebook.

0 teusday 9th juli 2015Í u e E d ay.'9Lh..J ulv..?Q.19. . .'.'

1 febuary zlthZOOL2 wensday 2 marsh 2005

3 septembre 4st 2009

4 thrusday aprille l9th 2O2O

c) Now say and write these numbers.

0 31tz ...!hrpp..ard..a..hdf.........

I 71la , rlz 3 1st 4 2nd 5 3rd 6 4th'

7 75o/o 8 0.35 9 1,580 10 200,000

d) Listen to your teacher read some dates andnumbers and write them down. Be careful withyour spelling and punctuation.

Grammar: expressions oÍ purpose

We can use in order Ío + verb or so that + subject +

verb to explain |he putpose oÍ an action.

Match Questions 1-6 to the correct answera)-f).

1 Why did you buy a computer?2 Why are you wearing that old shirt?3 Why are you phoning the station?4 Why are you whispering?5 Why have you come to see me?

6 Why do you \^/ant to have guitar lessons?

a) in order to apologiseb) in order to book seats on the train to Paris

c) in order to use the internetd) so that I can join my boyfriend's bande) so that no one can hear mef) so that my clothes don,t get dirý

3 Vocabulary: computer words

Find eight words connected with computers in thewordsearch box and use some of them to completethe sentences below.

1 You can get information on almost any subjecton theYou need .... ....................................... - order torun a computer program.

You need a ................ ......... if vouwant to listen to music.

You can use arro\ /s on the keyboard to movearound the screen, or you can use a

Instead of writing a letter to someone/ you cansend an ...... from yourcomputer.

4 Speaking: communicating with otherpeople

Talk to your partner. Answer these questions.

1 How often do you send an e-mail?2 Do you just send e-mails to your friends or to

other people, too?3 Do you prefer to send an e-mail or talk on the

phone?4 How many text messages do you send every

week?

5 How often do you write a letter?

a)

K T W F E S U o M GB E N M A o X c V FV N Y K U F I o o RG R J B U T N R W EM E I E o W E E R KW T M T J A E F T AE N c A F R R c H ER I V Y I E C D N PN A J T D L S Z B SL R E T N I R P ! P

&W rEsr 2, LrsrENtNG PART 3

) stratesy

1

2

3

45

6

ó J Read and listen to the instructionsto the Exam Task below.How many sentences are there?

How many people will you hear?

What is the man's name?

What is the woman's name?

How do they know each other?

What do you have to do?

Read the six sentences. Underline thenames in each sentence.

Make guesses about what you will hear.

Underline six words or phrases which te!!

you what Marcus and Cora's conversationwill be about.

Compare your list of words with anotherstudent.

4 ť' J Listen to the recording and answerthe questions.

Mark the answers you are sure of. lf you missone, don't worry. You can listen for the answerwhen you hear the recording again.

.. EXA7 tiO! ... . .. .. .. ..... o. o. .. ... ...ata

! when a question is about agreeing or :I disagreeing, you need to listen carefully to :I what both speakers say on that subject. :aaaaaalaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaS

5 óld Listen again and check your answers.

Try to fil| in any answers you missed the Íirsttime. lf you still don't know, guess! Do not leaveany questions unanswered.

.. EXO6 tiO! ....... oo......oo.........ata

! Remember, at the end of the exam you are :! given six minutes to transfer allyour listening :! answers to the answer sheet. Make sure you :

i .oOU carefully. :aa aa a aa a aaaaoa aa aa aaaa aaoaa a aa aaaaaa a

3

a)

b)

Part 4

Questions 20-25

Look at the six sentences for this part.

You will hear a conversation between a man, Marcus, and a woman, Cora, who work in the same office.

Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect.lf it is correct, put a tick ({ ) in the box under A for YES.|f it is not correct, put a tick (/)in the box under B Íor No.

20 Marcus is often late for work.

21 Cora disagrees with Marcus about the cause of traffic jams.

22 Marcus agrees that cycling to work would be good for him.

23 Marcus believes employers should provide buses.

24 Marcus agrees to try coming to work by bus tomorrow.

25 Cora suggests that Marcus is lazy.

ABYES NO

trL!trn!

Ttr!!!T

TEST 2, LISTENING PART 4 W;ee

a)

Functions: agreeing and disagreeing

ln Part 4, you oÍ|en need to understand when peop|e

are agreeing and disagreeing with each olher.

Look at the phrases below. Write A next to theones which we use to agree, and D next to theones which we use to disagree.I don't think so.

That's not right.I quite agree.

Exactly.I just don't accept that.I don't agree.

That's where you're \ /rong.

That's right.

1

z3

Work with a partner. Take turns at reading out astatement. Say whether you agree or disagreewith it.

Football players earn too much money.

Graffiti is art and should be encouraged.The government should give children pocketmoney.There are too many television channels.Adverts should not be aimed at children.

Vocabu lary: traff ic problems

ln lhe exam, you oÍten meet or need to use words

about traÍÍic ptobIems.

Complete the following sentences with a word orphrase from the box.

4

5

motor\^/ay petrol car park p€++{+ti€n

speed limit tunnel pedestrians pavementtraffic jam traffic lights

Some cities have stopped cars from going intothe centre because of the .....pp!u!.i.en.........

Someone took my space in the ............today, so I had to leave my CaÍ in the Stleet.

The fire engine didn't stop at the ............

even though they were red. Luckily there were notrying to CÍoSS the road.

If you're driving on an emptyit's easy to forget the ............ is 90kph.I never drive through the city centre becausethere's always a ................ by the marketsquare.

We stopped at the garage to buy some

It's very dangerous to walk along that roadbecause there's no .............The journey is much quicker now because there'sa ................ under the river.

Work with a partner. Decide if you agree ordisagree with these suggestions for reducingtraffic in cities.Tick the ones you think arethe best.

Cars should be forbidden fromthe ciý Centle.

Each family should only be allowedto have one car.

The government should make publictransport free in cities.Young people should not be allowedto own a car until they are 2I.Everyone should pay a fee before theydrive into a town or city.

Can you add any more ideas?

Anolher idea ie to ...

3 Speaking: where you live

a) Think about the town where you live. Think about:. traffic. transport

activities for young people

things to do and see (e.g. libraries, museums)parks and green spaces.

ln your notebook, write down the two things youlike best about your town and the two things youlike least.

Work with a partner. Discuss the things youwrote. What do you agree or disagree about?

b)

1aL

3

+

5

6

7

8

b)

o

!n!!tr

c)

a)

o

a

a

b)

c)

K.XX rEsr 2, LrsrENrNG PART 4

) stratesy

The test begins with a general conversationbetween the examiner and the candidates.Be ready to:. ansvřeÍ questions about personal details,

e.g. where you live. answer questions about your daily life,

likesldislikes, habits, etc.. spell out words (e.g. names, addresses).

1 Giving personal information

a) Here are some questions the examiner mightask in Part 1. Read the questions, then matchthem to the answers below.

1 What's your name and surname?

2 Where do you live?3 What school do you go to?

4 How long have you been there?

5 Can you spell the first word of yourschool's name for me, please?

6 How far is the school from your home?7 How do you get to school?

8 What is your favourite subject?

a) Usually by bike, but sometimes I catchthe bus if I have too many books.

b) Diana Mann.c) Science.

d) Longbridge Road School. It's near the hospital.e) About two and a half kilometres.

f) Five months.g) L-O-N-G-B-R-I-D-G-E.h) 16, Milford Hill Flats.

b) Look carefully at the answers.

1 Are they all complete sentences?

2 Which of them give extra information?

c) Work with a partner. Ask each other thequestions in Exercise 1a above.Try to give someextra information for some of the questions.When you have finished, write the answers yougave in your notebook.

2 Vocabulary and pronunciation: schoolsubjects

a) Tick which school subiects you study.

chemistry biology physicsenvironmental science geography historyphilosophy music computing religionmodern languages literature

b) ód Some oÍ the subiects above look almost thesame in many languages, but they are pronounceddifferently. Listen and underline the syllable withthe main word stress.Then practise saying them.

Example: chemistry biology

lt's impo]|ant to put lhe cortec| stÍess 0n words. This

will make it easier Íor o|her peop|e to understand you.

c) Have you ever studied any other subiects?1 What are they called in English?2 Write the names down in your notebook.3 Make sure you know how to pronounce them.

3 ExamTaskp,@ nxtra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections 4

and 5, page 161

a) Work with a partner.

Student A: You are the examiner. Ask yourpaÍtner the questions at the bottom of page 50.For Question 7, write down what your partnersays so that you can check it later.

Student B: Answer youÍ partner's questions.

When you have finished, check the answer toQuestion 4. ls it spelt correctly?

b) Change roles.Student B: You are the examiner. Ask yourpartner the questions at the bottom of page 66.For Question 7, write down what your paÍtnersays so that you can check it later.

Student A: Answer your partner's questions.

When you have finished, check the answer toQuestion 5. !s it spelt correctly?

i. EXO6 tip! .................... o......... o.

! Snort answers are usually better than complete :! sentences, but don't answer questions with iust Yes or ii No -always try to give an extra piece of information. :c " aa a a a aa a a a a aa a a a aa a a a a a a o a a aa a a a a a a oaa a a a a a

TEsr 2, sPEAKING PART I TE

) str"tegy

In Part 2, the examiner describes a situation, andyou and your partner talk about it for two orthree minutes. The examiner gives you somepictures to help you. Be ready to:o ask your partner's opinion. say what you think is besto give a reason for your opinion.Make sure you listen to your partner and askhis/her opinion. Give reasons for your ideas.

1 Vocabulary: presents (1)

You are going to buy a present for some neighbourswho are going to live in another city. Look at thepicture of your neighbours on page 163 and someof the things you might buy. Do you know what theyall are in English?

2 Functions: choosing a present

a) Match these expressions (1-7) with thedescriptions a)- c) below.

1

z.1

Áa

What kind of thing would be best?

But they might already have one.Do you think a CD is a good idea?I don't think we should choose acookery book because they don'tlike cooking.Don't you think a book would be better?I think she'd prefer some earrings becauseshe likes jewellery.

Do you think they would like somechocolates?

asking your partner's opinionsay what you think is best

give a reason for your opinion

5

6

b) Read the following conversation between Kikaand Owen who are deciding what to buy for aÍriend. Fill each space with a suitable word.

Kika: We should buy Janetta a present when sheleaves school.

Owen: Yes. What (1) .......... of thing would be best?Kika: I'm not (2) ........... Do you think she'd like a

box of chocolates?

a)

b)

L,I

Owen: She might, but do you think that's a good(3) .......... ? I know she worries about herweight. I think she'd prefer a book (4) ..........she likes reading.

Kika: But she (5) .......... already have the book wechoose.

Owen: That's true. I don't think we should choosea video, because she doesn't like (6) .......... tothe cinema.

Kika: Yes, I know. She's quite unusual. But sheenjoys art. What (7) ..........a painting?

Owen: Don't you think a photo would be (8) .......... ?

We can't afford a really good painting.Kika: Yes, you're right. Let's choose one today.Owen: OK.

c) Work with a partner. Practise reading theconversation aloud.

3 Vocabulary: presents (2)

Work with a partner. Look again at the presents inExercises 1 and 2.

Tell your partner which of these things you wouldlike:a) for your birthdayb) if you moved into a new house.Explain why.

4 ExamTaskps. nxtra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections6-10, pages 160-161

Work with a partner.Turn to page 163 and lookat the picture. Do the task in Exercise 1. Decidetogether what you are going to buy.

i. EXO7 tip! ... . . . . . . .... . . . . .......... . ...! You don't have to agree with everything your partner :3 says, but it's good if you can agree at the end. :aa a a aoa a a a a a a a aaaa a a a a aoa a a a a a a a a a aaaaaaa3

Wha| gorŤ, ot r,hinqed,o Ť,hey |ike?

out lhey miqhŤalready have ,..

rereX rEsr 2, sPEAKTNG PARr 2

2

a)

Describing photos

Look at Photos A and B and read the description below.Which photo is described?

In the photo I can see several young people. I think they'restudents. They look quite happy and relaxed' Some of them are

talking. They,re outside a café and they,re sitting around tables.

There are some other tables in the background and all the tableshave, I don't know what you call them, but they keep the sunaway from you. There aÍe Some flowers and a fountain. It looksquite warm, but not too hot.

b) Now work with a partner. Describe the other photo together.

3 ExamTaskSS Extra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections 11-16,page 161

Work with a partner. Do the Exam Task below.

Candidate A: Look at Photograph 2A on page 168.

Candidate B: Look at Photograph2B on page 171.

Think about your photograph for a few seconds. Describe it

to your partner for about one minute. Tell your partner aboutthese things:. the kind of place it isr what you can see in different parts of the picture. what kind of people you can see

. what they are doing

. whether they look happy or not

. whv vou think they are there.

) strategy

In Part 3, the examiner gives you a

photograph. You talk about it byyourself for about a minute. Thenyour partner talks about anotherphoto on the same topic.Be ready to say:o what you can see in different

parts of the photoo what is happening/what people

are doingwhat people look like and whatthey are wearinghow people are feeling and why.

1 Talking about things you don'tknow the name of

Work with a partner. Take turns tochoose one of the things in the listbelow, but don't tell your partner. Usethe expressions below to explain it andsee if your partner can understandwhich thing you mean.

a) azebra f) aburgerb) a museum g) a CD PlaYerc) a mobile phone h) a keyboard

d) a wardrobe i) a restaurant

e) a pineapple i) a tiSer

It's a sort of ...

It's a place where ...

It's a thing which you use to ...

Examples:

Student A: It's a place where you can see

lots of old things.

Student B: A museum?

Student A: Right.

Student B: It's a sort of a horse.

Student A; A zebra?

Student B: Yes.

ExOm tip! ....o......." " "" "Don't worry if you don't know a word - :try to say it in another way, e.g. if you :don't know the word rucksack, vou can :

say a sort oÍ bag, :a

aa aa a a aaa a a a aa a a a aaaa a a a aaa a a a aa

TEST 2, SPEAKING PART 3 W

) str"tesyIn Part 4, the examiner asks you to talk to youÍpartner about a topic for about three minutes.The topic is the same as the pictures in Part 3.

o DO give your opinions.o DO talk about your o\ /n or other people's

experiences.o DO ask your partner questions and respond

to what he/she says.o DO NOT talk to the examinel only to your

partner.

1 Talking about your own or otherpeople's experiences

Match these questions and answers.1 Have you ever played in a concert?2 Do you often forget your homework?3 Do you know anyone who has recorded

a CD?4 Do any of your friends o\ /n sports cars?

5 Have any of your friends ever appearedin a film?

a) Yes, my cousin has. He plays in a band.b) No, none of them has enough money.c) No, I can't sing or play an instrument.d) No. but one of them was in a show at the

theatre.e) Yes, all of my friends do that sometimes.

2 Talking about some oÍ the peoplein a group

a) Look at the picture. Complete the sentencesbelow using the phrases in the box.You needsome of the words more than once.

All of Both of One of None of Two of

them are carrying books.them are wearing T-shirts.

the boys are wearing jeans.

them has a mobile phone.them has a rucksack.them could be students.

b) Complete these sentences truthfully.

1 Most of my friends ...

2 Some of my classmates ...

3 One of my neighbours ...

4 None of my family ...

5 All of my teachers ...

3 Telling someone about yourself andpeople you know

Work with a partner. Ask each other Questions 1-5in Exercise 1. Answer three questions truthfully andtwo questions untruthfully. Guess which questionsyour partner answered truthÍully. Find out if yourguesses were right.

4 ExamTask@p Extra Language for the Speaking Test, Sections77 and 18, page 161

Work with a partner. Look at the Exam Taskbelow.

Ask and answer these questions:

1 Which of photographs on pages 168 and 171looks like a place you'd like to visit?

2 Do you use the internet?3 Do any of your friends ever use internet cafés?

4 What do they use them for?5 Do any of your friends or family play

computer games?

6 Have you ever visited an internet chatroom?7 Do you think it's useful for students to have

computers? Why/why not?

.. EXO7 tip! ..............................! lf you haven't done something yourself, try to think :3 of other people who have and tatk about them. i

1 .....................

2 .....................

3 .....................

4 .....................

5 .....................

6 .....................

IEB TEST 2. SPEAKING PART 4

--

Tests 3, 4, 5 and 6 give you the opportunity to practise what you have learned in Tests 1 and 2.

Test 3 contains Exam fips to help you with each task.

You can use these tests Íor timed practice, so you get used to doing the tasks under exam conditions.

When you have finished, you wi|| be ready to take the exam with conÍidence'

Good luck!

g

Reading

Part íQuestions 1-5

Look at the text in each ouestion.What does it say?Mark the correct letter A. B or C on vour answer sheet.

Example:

0

IT IS FORBIDDEN TOMOVE COMPUTERS FROM

THIS ROOM WITHOUTPERMISSION FROMTHE HEADTEACHER

Answer: 0 ABCew f----'l f----l

.. EXO7 tip! ............:'i Think about the meaning :I of the whole text before :! you choose your answer. :! The answer with the same :i words as the text may not ::

: . il'!i!:.".":; : :j.': : :::']. :

You mustn't take the computers out oÍ this roomwithout asking the headteacher.

You should check with the headteacher beforeusing the computers in this room.

You must ask the headteacher for permission tomove the computers into this room.

A

B

c

Dad,Andy wank gou to Phone him' l, s,aid

go,íd b, bo,I, verg lafu but he didn,t"-ird.

l'vegone out' Back about

nidnýht,x Penry1

A Penny wanted to go out with Andy.

B Penny's father will arrive home late.

C Andy didn't agree with Penny's suggestion.

W TEST 3, READING PART 1

Job applications to beleft at reception notwith securiQl guard

Tol I Everyone

I'm having my computer repaired,so I won't be able to receive e-mailsfor Íive days'

Phone me 237702

Nina

A

B

c

A Give your application form to the receptionist.

B There is a job available as a security guard.

C Reception can pass a message to the security guard.

You can try on clothes on the ground floor.

You can change your money at CustomerServices.

You change things you don't want at CustomerServices.

Nina is mending her computer herse|Í, so she cansend e-mails.

Nina's Íriends can't get in touch with her by e-mai|Íor Íive days.

Nina is doing a short course to learn how to repairher computer.

It takes 15 minutes from the station to the airport.

The bus waits to collect passengers from thestation.

C The airport bus stops regularly at the station.

A

A

BWAIT OUTSIDE STATION

FOR AIRPORT BUS -EVERY 15 MINUTES

TEST 3, READTNG PART 1 rcXX

Part 2Questions 6-10

The people below all want to do an English course.on the opposite page there are descriptions oÍ eight courses.Decide which course wou|d be most suitab|e for the Ío||owing peop|e.

For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter (A-H) on your answer sheet.

.. EXO7 tip! ..............! Underline the important paÍts! of each question. You can only! choose each text (A-H) once.

Paolo is good at speaking and understanding English, but he needs to

do a full-time course to improve his writing and spelling before he startsa business course next year. He can come to England for one month in

December or Januarv.

This Spanish family would like to spend two or three weeks attending a part-

time language course. The girls are nineteen and eighteen and know quite alot of English. The parents know very little English.

Wm Nikos is fourteen and his sister Anastasia is sixteen. Their parents would like

re:J:P \-^.o?ó them to spend a month on a |anguage course where they can |earn new*b.Y€ \g ,ť hobbies and be |ooked after by their teachers.,-'A>:)z>\-./V7

Mehdi has just finished university and wants to spend some time touring roundthe world. He would like to do a course for a week or two before he starts histrip as he has never studied English.

Dorit is leaving school in June and will start a course to become a tour guideabout four months later. Her English is good, but she must get a languagequa|iÍication before she starts co||ege.

10

rea TEST 3, READING PART 2

Activity language learningFor teenagers up to age sixteen with any level of English. Fully qualified staff andinstructors make learning fun and safe. Spend two weeks or a month in small classes,improving your English while you paint, make music, play tennis, volleyball, etc.and take part in many other activities.

Family summer schoolClasses at all levels for adults (over sixteen) and ten- to fifteen-year-olds in the samebuilding. Meet for meals and evening leisure activities. Accommodation in modernflats near the school. A full-day study timetable for one, t\ /o or three weeks.

Get around in EnglishThis course is aimed at beginners who want to feel comfortable using English to buytickets, book hotel Íooms and make new friends. Although you will spend most ofthe course simply taking part in conversations, you will work hard and you will besurprised how much progress you make in just two weeks.

Examination course I

For students over sixteen, three-month courses preparing for a certificate recognised byinternational companies and employers around the world. Full-time courses forstudents who are prepared to work seriously hard.

Éi"ňináiř; ;;;;'Á ž.For students over sixteen, these courses last six months, and are part-time in the firstthree months, with a choice of afternoon leisure activities, changing to full-time forthe second three months, with increased homework as the examination approaches.

Special skills coursesThese one-, two- or three-month courses take place from |anuary to March and areaimed at students who wish to improve particular language skills. Listening, writing,reading and speaking are all offered, together or separately. Students are not advisedto take more than two skills in one month.

English for tourismA six-month course for students with some knowledge of the language. The coursecovers areas such as ticket sales, making reservations and telephone work. Severaltrips to important English tourist centres are included. A very useful course forpeople planning to make a career in the travel business.

Adults' language breaksThese courses offer serious study during the morning, followed by the opportunity tojoin short trips to places of interest in the afternoon if you wish. Minimum threeweeks, up to six weeks. Minimum age eighteen, all levels from beginners to advanced.

TEST 3. READING PART rea

Part 3Questions 11-20

.. EXO6 tip! ..... o..Look at the sentences below about a group of islands. I Read the sentences 3

Read the text on the opposite page to decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect. 3 first to find out what :lf it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet. 3 the text is about. :lf it is not correct, mark B on your answersheet. 3....oo...........!

11 St Margaret lsland is smaller than St Michael lsland.

12 There was no one living on the islands in the 1980s.

13 There are several restaurants on the islands.

14 Flowers are Íor sa|e in the is|and shop.

15 The church is at the top of the highest hill.

16 There is one beach on St Michae| |s|and where it is saÍe to swim.

17 lt is possible to take a boat trip on a Saturday.

18 There is a fee for landing on the islands.

19 The journey to the is|ands |asts ha|Í an hour.

20 There is an exhibition centre on the islands.

ffl rEsr s, READTNG PART 3

lli:Íilli1i|i:.lillil Ferndis Islands :l'liliii{:l{.lirli*iíiiliiířilil'

Three miles across the water from the town of Blascott lies the group of islandsknown as the Ferndigs. The main island is St Michael. Separated by a narrowchannel of water is St Michael's little sister, St Margaret. People Íirst lived onthese islands 1,500 years ago. By the 1950s the population had gone down tobelow twenty, and in 1960 the last person left the islands. But in 1991 twofamilies moved back, and since then more people have followed. Tourists nowvisit regularly to enjoy the beautiful scenery.

Visit the one shop on the islands which sells butter, cheese and bread producedby the families who live there. The produce is also taken by boat to restaurants inBlascott, where it can be enjoyed by visitors to the area. Perhaps moreinterestingly, a range of perfumes is made from the wild flowers and herbs whichgrow on the island and can be bought in the shop. They are produced mainly forexport and are very special. So a visit to the shop is a mustl

St Michael Island is easily explored on foot but, in the interests of safety, visitorsare requested to keep to the main footpaths. From where the boat lands, walkalong the cliff until you reach a steep path signposted to the church. When youget there, it is worth spending a moment in this lovely old building. Carry onalong the same path which continues to climb to the highest point on the island.There is a wonderful view from here along the coastline. If it is \ /arm, you maylike to finish your day relaxing on the beach. Priory Beach on the eastern side ofthe island is safe for swimming. Sandtop Bay on the western side is the othersandy beach, but swimming is not advised here.

It is possible to hire a boat to cross to the islands, or you can take one of the boattrips which depart from Blascott harbour in summer, Monday to Friday. Theislands are always open to visitors apart from on Sundays. Buy a ticket for a boattrip from the kiosk in Blascott harbour. The charge for landing on the islands isincluded in the ticket but, if you take your own boat, remember to take somemoney. The crossing takes thirty minutes, and boats run every fifteen minutes.

Before you set off on a trip, visit the exhibition centre which tells the history ofthe islands and gives information about birds and wildlife you may see whenyou get there.

TEST 3, READING PART 3 fpf

Pant 4Questions 21-25

Read the text and questions below.l. EXO7tip!.........! The text will be about :

For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet. ! opinions and attitudes :! as well as information.

:

JamesMy name is James, I'm fourteen, and I moved to this town with my family three monthsago. My parents lived here when they were young, but my brother and I didn't knowanyone here except a few aunts and uncles we'd met when we'd spent a couple ofweeks with my grandparents, during school holidays.tMhen I started school, one of mycousíns, Sophie, who was in my class, was vefy friendly for the first week and I washappy to have a friend in a strange place.Then, for no reason, she stopped talking to meand I felt very hurt and lonely for several weeks.

In the end I made some more friends and since I got to know them,I've been fine. NowSophie is having a disco paÍty for her birthday next week and she has invited me' I don'twant to go. My brother says he heard someone say she only asked me because herparents said she had to. But my mum and dad say it would be rude not to accept. Someof my new friends are invited, too. How can I show Sophie that she can't behave so

badly towards me without causing a family quarrel?

21 What is the writer trying to do in the text?

A explain a problem

B describe a familv

C oÍÍer advice

D refuse an invitation

22 Who did James know in the town six months ago?

A no one

B a Íew re|atives

C only his grandparents

D Soohie's friends

II[l rEsr 3, READTNG PARr 4

23 At the beginning of term, Sophie's behaviour made the writer Íee|

A embarrassed.

B unhappy.

C grateÍu|.

D surprised.

24 The writer wants Sophie to realise

A that he still hasn't forgiven her.

B that her friends think she behaved rudely.

C that his parents dislike her.

D that she has fewer friends than he has.

25 Which of these is an answer to the text?

A Ask your friends to come with you and we can all have agood time together.

B Why not go to the party and ask Sophie why she stoppedbeing friendly? At least everyone will know what's happening.

v Please phone my parents and explain the situation to them,so that they'll stop worrying.

D What about cooking a meal with Sophie and inviting all yourrelatives? That will be a good way to stop them quarrelling.

TEsr s, READTNG PART 4 Im

Part 5Questions 26-35

Read the text below and choose the correct word for each space.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Z. EXA6 tip! ... . . o. . o. ... . .

3 write the words in the spaces. !3 When you have finished, read :! through the text and check :! ttrey sound right.

:a aa a a aoaa aaaaa aaaaaaa aoaaa

Example:

0 Aof B from cbv Dto

Answer:

.Weather

W'eather influences the lives (0) .............. everyone. The climate of any country depends on

its position on Earth, its (26) from the sea and how high it is.In countries whichhave sea all, (27) them,like Britain and New Zealand,winters are mild and summers

are cool. There is not a huge change from one season to (28)

Countries near the Equator have hot weather allyear with some (29) .............. rain, except in

deserts where it rains (30) ..............little. Above the desert there are no clouds in the sky, so

the (31) of the sun can easily warm the ground during the day, but it gets very coldat níght.

People are always (32) .............. in unusual weather, and pictures of tornadoes, for example, are

shown on television. Srong winds and rain can (33) a lot of damage to buildings, and

in spite of modern (34) .............. of weather forecasting they can (35) surprise us.

nlA B C D-lI

26 A distance

27 A through

28 A next

29 A thick

30 A not

31 A heat

32 A attracted

33 A make

34 A jobs

35 A yet

B space

B beside

B another

B large

B quite

B Íire

B interested

B happen

B tools

B still

C depth

C around

C later

C heavy

C more

C light

C keen

C have

C methods

C already

D length

D near

D other

D great

D very

D temperature

D excited

D cause

D plans

D ever

t!p| rEsr 3, READTNG PARr 5

Writing

Part íQuestions 1-5

Here are some sentences about having a haircut.For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.You may use this page for any rough work.

Example:

0 Ineedahaircut.

My hair cutting.

Answer: 0 | neeao

i. EXA7tip!...o...! check your grammar !a.a. and SDettlng. .a'-aa a aaa aaaa aaaaa aa ao

1 The hairdresser last cut my hair six months ago.

I last ......... .... my hair cut six months ago.

2 When I phoned, she asked what time I wanted to go.

When I phoned, she asked,'What time .......... ... to come?'

3 My brother cuts his hair himse|Í.

My brother cuts .......... ... hair.

4 He says the hairdresser is too expensive Íor him'

He says he ............. to go to the hairdresser.

5 Unfortunately, he doesn't do it very well.

Unfortunately, he's not very doing it.

TEsr 3, wRrrrNG PART j ffi*I

Parl 2Question 6

Z. EXO6 tip! .... .. r...An English-speaking friend called Jimmy has sent you a T-shirt as a present. i Remember to answer :

! all three parts of the :Write a card to Jimmy. In your card, you should ! question.

:

. thank him for the T-shirt

. ask him where he got ito sáY when you p|an to wear it.

Write 35-45 words on vour answer sheet.

Paft 3 Z. EXam tiP! .... " " " "a rrrr '. When you finish writing, :

Write an answer to one oÍ the questions (7 or 8) in this part' ! read through your letter or :Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet. ! story carefully to check for :

Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet. I any mistakes. :a

S a aaaaaa a a a a a a a a aoaaa a a

Question 7

o This is part of a letter you receive from your English penfriend.

L guess yor.,r'll get this when you've jusi covqe bacl,

*'rova your holiday. L'd like to Veav aů,ou* it. ltJhere did

yal 3o? h[.at did you do there? bJhat sarř ol 7|ace did

yaur stay in?

o Now write a letter to this oenfriend.

o Write your letter on your answer sheet.

Question 8

. Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must have this title:

My lucky day

. Write your story on your answer sheet.

Irelt rEsr 3, wRrrrNG PARTs 2-g

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.Choose the correct picture and put a tick (/) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

.. EXO6 tip! ...o...........3 Use the pictures to help you :3 understand what vou will hear. :o'aa aoa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaa

cBA

1 Which is the woman's house?

2 Where is the traffic jam?

c

ITurn over

LrsrENrNG PART I ffilEr

111-[ir1r rl

TEST 3,

3 Which wedding present has the man bought?

4 How did the man get home?

5 What did Simon hurt?

c

6 Which is the man's mother?

á@ffi

ffiE-mnwffi

cB

7 Which poster are they looking at?

ffiW'.*TT;ffiŤ-

ff**#::*ry

Wffiffi#:-ffi

cBA

I tĎ |

'',\ffi,'íÍ,.tt\

ta\

3, LISTENING PART 1t[ttt

Part 2Questions 8-13

You will hear a successful fashion designer talking about his career.For each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

l. EXO7 tip! ...............3 rhe questions are in the same :3 order as the information you :3 hear, so if you can't answer a !3 question at first, leave it and :! do the others. :aaa a a a a a aaaoaooaaaaaaaaa a a aa

8 How well did the speaker do at school?

9 What did he do when he left school?

10 What did he learn from his parttime job?

11 When did he go to London?

12 How long did he stay in Milan?

A He was an average student.

B His parents helped him.

C He had problems passing exams.

A He got a job to earn a lot oÍ money.

B He did a business course.

C He went to art college.

A how to sew

B how clothes are made

C how to run a large business

A at the age of seventeen

B as soon as he had enough money

C when he won a prize

A three months

B nine months

C three years

A He wanted to be nearer his home.

B He could not start a company there.

C The work was more stressful than hehad expected.

!Tn

n!!

tr!tr

!!!

!nn

nn!

13 Why did he have difficulties in New York?

TEST 3, LISTENING PART 2 ]Ířr

Part 3Questions 14-19

You will hear a tour guide talking to some tourists about a visit to ashopping centre.

i. EXO6 tip! ... .. ...... .. ..3 Use the words around the :3 spaces to hetp you decide what

For each question, Íi|| in the missing inÍormation in the numbered space. 3 t<lna of answer is needed.! aa....oa.aa aa aaaaaa..a.a

VigiŤ, Ť,o gho??ing centre

Bank rs on the F4) .. .

1et a (í5) ...'''.. fron thenewsaqent

Pestaurant lE o??osite the 6s'1in the man Equare.

SnacK bar next to the (t) ............

c/1aes at F8)

l/eet outside shop ca//ed (te) ............

IEf| rEsr 3, LrsrENtNG PARr 3

Part 4Questions 20-25

Look at the six sentences for this part.

You will hear a conversation between a girl, Alice, and a boy, Sam,about a play their school is doing called Bomeo and Juliet.

Decide iÍ each sentence is correct or incorrect'|f it is correct, put a tick ({ ) in the box under A for YES' |Í it is not correct,put a tick (/ ) in the box under B for NO.

.. EXO6 tiD! .. o... . . . ... .. .c'a

3 Look carefully at the verbs in :! the statements (e.g. decided, :? agrees, persuades) because :3 ttrey are all very important :! in hetping you choose the :aao áÍlSW€Í. :a a a a a a aaa aoaaaaooaaaaa aaaa

20 They are going to have the practice outdoors today.

21 Sam has decided he no longer wants to be Romeo.

22 Alice agrees with Miss Hayes about Sam's voice.

23 Sam agrees that Alice should speak to Miss Hayes about the problem.

24 Alice persuades Sam to take a smaller part in the play.

25 Someone is needed to produce the scenery.

ABYES NO

TEST 3, LISTENING PART 4 rres

Part íGeneral conversation: saying who you are, givingpersona| inÍormation' spelling

i. EXO6 tip! .... . . .. . o. . . . o . . . .. . . . . ... . . ..! Remember to try to add some extra information when :. Vou answer. 3

:a a a a a aa a aaa a a aa a aa a a aa a a aaa a a aaa a a a a aaa a !

Take turns to be the examiner. Ask your partnerquestions to Íind out some inÍormation about eachother.

Ask each other at |east four oÍ these ouestions:

o What's your name?o How long have you been studying English?. Where do you study?o How many students are there in your class?o How many hours a week do you have English?o Can you spell your teacher's surname for me,

olease?

ParL 2Simulated situation: exchanging opinions, sayingwhat you think is necessary

.. EXOp tip! ..o . .. o . .. .. .. . . . .. . . . ... . . . ...3 Speak to your partnel not the examiner, and listen to :

: .::::::'::: :::'i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

The examiner gives you both a picture. You do a tasktogether.

You are going to trave| by coach together Íor a who|eday' Look at page 164. There are pictures oÍ somethings you might take for the journey. Decide togetherwhat you will take. Think about what you need.

Ask and answer questions like these:

o What do we need?o What would amuse us?o What would be interesting to do?o Would that be too bigi noisy?. Do you think we'll really use that?

l|ti! rEsr 3, sPEAKTNG PARrs 1-4

Part 3Responding to photographs: describing situationsand settings

.. EXO6 tip! ... . . ..... . . . . . . . . .. o...... . . ..! Don't worry if you don't know the name of something :3 - describe it instead.

aa

3a a a a aaa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aaa a a a a aaaaaaaaaa a a !

You take turns to tell each other about a photograph.

Candidate A: look at Photograph 3A on page 169.Candidate B: look at Photograph 38 on page 172.

Think about your photograph Íor a Íew seconds.Describe it to your partner for about one minute.

Tell your partner about these things:

o what kind oÍ p|ace it is. what sport the people are playingo why they are doing ito whether they are enjoying ito what you can see in the background.

Part 4General conversation about the photographs: talkingabout likes, dislikes and preferences

i. EXO6 tip! ................ o o.............! tf you agree,or disagree, don't just say 'Yes' or 'No' :I - explain why. :

The examiner asks you to talk to your partner. Yougive your opinion about something and explain whatyou prefer.

Tell each other about sports you enjoy doing orwatching (now or in the past).

Use these ideas:

o Say if you like football or volleyball.o Say what other sports you like.o Say if you enjoy sports competitions and why.o SaY iÍ you prefer watching sport or doing it and why.

Reading

Part íQuestions 1-5

Look at the text in each question.What does it say?Mark the correct letter A, B or C on your answer sheet.

Example:

0

I John

Can you ca|| the cinema Írom home and

check Íi|m time before leaving? Let me

know what time we should get there.

Answer: nlA B C-lE

John should

A contact Nel| aÍter phoning the cinema.

B ring Nell after arriving at the cinema.

C go to the cinema to check when the film starts.

Tq,i I

řr:om l

Pally - 1 phaned the bike s!^o7

aaÁ+ getting |ovl".s nnended. ffthey,re c|osed, |eaue ,|ď,

|.*" .

or,riside (locked, ol canvse) avrd

7ut yaur keys in their le*ter bax'

A

B

c

Po||y can |eave her bicycle Íor repair even when theshop is closed.

Polly should leave her keys so that the repair shopcan lock her bicycle.

Po||y's bicyc|e wi|| be |eÍt outside when it is repaired.

You can get a discount on a coat iÍ you buy somegloves today.

You are given some gloves if you buy a coat today.

We have gloves to match the coats we sell.

lTurn over

TEsr 4, READTNG PART 1 tI:I

Choose a pair of gloves

when you buy a coat today

A

B

c

I Mark

I Clive

You left your CD Walkman in my car.

My brother will bring it to your housetomorrow.

A We give lost property away if it is not collected aftertwo weeks.

We will look after your property for two weeks if youpay a fee.

We keep things people have lost for a maximumof two weeks.

A Clive borrowed Mark's Walkman.

B Clive's brother will return the Walkman to Mark.

C Mark wants to use Clive's Walkman on a journey.

Do your photocopying and pay for it when you leave.

Put your money in the photocopier beÍore you startto use it.

C Tell an assistant how many photocopies you need.

B

c

,":tiOfi'l

A

BServe yourselfCount number of copies

Pay assistant at till on way out

ParL 2Questions 6-10

The people below all want to buy a book.on the opposite page there are descriptions oÍ eight books.Decide which book wou|d be most suitable Íor the Íol|owing peop|e'For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter (A-H) on your answer sheet.

6 Jan is sixteen and she loves shopping for clothes and reading stories aboutpeople and things in the news. She wants to read some entertaining light fiction.

Paul is nineteen and is very keen on sport. He doesn't enjoy fiction much,but does |ike reading about the Iives oÍ sporting heroes of the past.

Susan is eighteen and enjoys good writing. She wou|d |ike something which ofÍersinformation as well as entertainment. She's interested in historv and plans totravel round Europe this summer.

IIB TEST 4. READING PARTS 1-2

10

Michael is twenty-three, a computer expert, whose interests include travel andsport. He has to go abroad Íor work and wants a nove| to read on his journeywith plenty of action and excitement.

Sonia is twenty-four and works for an international airline. She enjoys lovestories of the past, especia||y if they contain descriptions of beautiÍu| houses,clothes and parties.

A

Recommended New Books

The lovely Emmaline Barton was an American girl who came to Europe in the nineteenth century and won the heartsof young men in every great city. This entertaining novel shows us the wonderful silk dresses, the beautiful rooms

. and Emmaline's sparkling eyes in a well-imagined world of palaces and gardens.

A very clear and hetpfut book which lists accommodation in most main European cities, with brief descriptions anda good price guide. lts small size makes it easy for the traveller to pack, and the organisation of the informationmakes it quick and easy to use.

This is the first part of the autobiography of the international gymnastics star. He writes his own story well, hidingnone ofthe difficutties that he had to face, and he brings to life the heartaches, as wel[ as the ioys, ofyoungsportsmen and women who reallv want to find success.

Sometimes funny, sometimes exciting, occasionally sad, this beautifulty written little bool< describes the adventuresof a group of American students who spent a year working and studying in Europe. There are livety descriptions ofsome of the great cities and their inhabitants, past and present.

An extremely interesting history of clothes, written by a history teacher. lt will be a very useful book for anyone whoneeds to design clothes for the theatre or who is interested in the everyday lives of people in the past. There are notmany pictures, but lots of detailed notes.

The pop music industry has changed enormously in the past few years. With electronics and computers in the studioand at concerts, what is the future for the human musician? This book is by one of the top performers of computerpop music, and he discusses the way it witl probably develop in the future.

A very well-written and fast-moving adventure story, set in an imagined world of international football stars. The

matches are well described, as we[[ as the problems of the players as they fight for their careers, on and off thepitch. A great read for sports fans.

This amusing novel is just right for reading on holiday. lt reveals the lives and loves of the designers, models andcustomers of a famous fashion house. lt's written by a former model and gives away many of the modern fashionworld's secÍets.

c

E

G

H

TEST 4, READING PART 2 rrTl

Part 3Questions 11-20

Look at the sentences below about a holiday in Tasmania, an island off the south coast of Australia.Read the text on the opposite page to decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect.lf it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet.lf it is not correct, mark B on Vour answer sheet.

11 There are few traffic iams in Tasmania.

12 There are several buses every day on most routes.

13 lt is essential to reserve accommodation in advance.

14 There is a limit on the number of hotel tickets you can buy.

15 Ruby Hotels are the cheapest.

16 Taz Hotel tickets can onlv be used inTaz Hotels.

17 The most attractive scenery you see on the second day is by Russell Falls.

18 The third day is spent in the car.

19 There are good views oÍ Crad|e Mountain from the edges oÍ Dove Lake.

20 The trip finishes where it started.

f|!| rEsr 4, READTNG pARr 3

See Tasmania!

Rich in old-world charm and withmagnificent National Parks, Tasmania is wellcovered by a good road network. Lighttraffic and wonderful views make drivingthese roads a pleasure. Though the bus

system is reliable, on many routes services

may only run once daily. So hire a car andsee this beautiful and interestino island atyour own speeo.

There is a variety of places to stay, andalthough booking is strongly advised,particularly at peakholiday times, it shouldnot be too difficult to arrange things as

you go, if you prefer. We sell you a set ofTaz Hotel Pass vouchers and Tasmania is

yours. The Taz Hotel Pass offers the visitora simple and convenient way to stay

anywhere in Australia. Each hotel ticket is

paid for in advance and is for one night'saccommodation. There is no maximum orminimum number of hotel tickets you canbuy, and we will give you your money backon unused tickets, less a small administrativecharge. Taz Hotels are divided into simplecolour categories, with Ruby being the mostbasic and Diamond representing the highestquality. We recommend that you buy amixture of tickets, as we cannot give youyour money back if you use a higher-valueticket when staying at a lower-value hotel.lf you travel to an area where Taz have nohotels, then we will find other reasonablypriced accommodation for you in exchangefor vour Taz tickets

Here ís the planned route for our ho|iday ín

Tasmania:

Day 1: Arrive Hobart airport, pick up your car and

spend some time in the capital, perhaps driving up

to the Old Signal Station on Mount Nelson.

Day 2: Drive through the Derwent Valley, stopping

at Russell Falls. Later the scenery becomes even more

amazing as you pass Lake St Clair National Park.

Spend the night in the fishing town of Strahan.

Day 3: We take you on a half-day cruise from Strahan

on the famous Gordon River. Then set off for a

leisurely drive to Cradle Mountain National Park.

Day 4: Enloy the wild beauty of the Park. Go

fishing or horse-riding. Or walk around beautiful

Dove Lake, from where there are wonderful views

of the mountain itself.

Day 5: Explore the fascinating country towns as

you drive north and along the coast to Launceston,

Tasman ia's second-largest city.

Day 6: A pleasant drive through peaceful

countryside to Hobart. On route, you pass the

charming towns of Ross and Oatlands. Return to

the airport in time for your flight.

TEST 4, READTNG PART s ffG{

Part 4Questions 21-25

Read the text and questions below.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

The businessmanThere is a story going round at the moment about a well-known journalist who went to

interview Jack Parrish at a smart NewYork restaurant.The journalist was late, but

fortunately, when he arrived, he found the great man was not yet there. On the way to

his table, the journalist noticed a colleague from his paper and stopped to chat to her.

After fifteen minutes, awaiter approached him.'There's some young man at the door

who says he's supposed to be having lunch with you.I think he's trying to be funny,

because he says his name is Jack Parrish!'

But of coufse it was.The twenty-four-year-o1d ís becoming famous for the fact that he

doesn't look like the owner of one of the world's most successful computer companies.

His manner is polite, his voíce is quiet and his clothes are clearý not expensive.TWo

years ago, when he started his own company, no one had heard of him. Friends say that

he hasn't changed at a17. He hasn't eveÍl moved out of his pafents'house. So what does

he do with his money? It's all used for business. But some people in the computer woildare getting nel.vous - and, they are right.It won't be long before someone in another

company picks up the phone to hear that quiet voice saying that he 's the new boss.

Someone could find out Írom this text

A how Jack Parrish runs his business.

B what Jack Parrish said in an interview.

C how to get a job in Jack Parrish's company'

D what the writer thinks Jack Parrish will do next.

How did the journalist pass the time while he was waiting?

A He phoned his oÍÍice.

B He talked to another journalist.

C He talked to a man at the next table.

D He interviewed a woman in the restaurant.

21

22

fiM rEsr 4, READTNG PARr 4

25

23 The waiter thought the young man at the door of the restaurant

A was a journalist.

B was behaving rudely.

C was not as old as he said he was.

D was pretending to be someone else.

What is the writer's attitude to Jack Parrish?

A He is more important than he appears.

B He is a good examp|e Íor young peop|e'

C He should be more careful how he runs his business.

D He would be an interesting person to work for.

Which oÍ these head|ines does the writer expect to see soon?

AToo much suocess too Íast -

was that the end of Parrish's luck?

Jack Parrish doesn't worry aboutmoney - he gives it away to old friends

c

SPEND, SPEND, SPEND .how f ack furnishes hisnew million-dollar home

B

D

TEST 4, READING PART 4 ]IN

Part 5Questions 25-35

Read the text below and choose the correct word Íor each space.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Example:

0Awon

Answer:

B took C beat D held

nlA B C D-r-

Olympic hopes

Yesterday Eleanor Preston (0). .. ..... afl international swimming competition for

girls (26) under sixteen. She swam faster (27) . ...... gírls from ten

other countries.This (28) ....... even better when you learn that Eleanor is only

thirteen. She had to have special (29) . ...... to enter, because normally competitors

are fourteen or older.

Eleanor has been (30) . ...... on swimming for a long time - (31) . ...... she

was three in fact. I wondered whether she found it hard to (32) ....... several

hours a day training. She (33) me that sometimes she has problems findingtime for homework, but that's all.'My parents have given up so (34) . . . .. . . time

driving me to local competitions,I think it's been harder for them, actually.'Her aim is to

swim at the Olympics.

After yesterday's performance, I think she may (35) . ...... there .

28 Asuggests Bmeans

29 A permission B attention C opportunity D accommodation

26 A age

27 A that

B aged

B Írom

B good

B since

B use

B much

B find

C ages

C than

C sounds

C pleased

C when

C spend

C long

C get

D ageing

DofD shows

D keen

D ever

D pass

D agreed

D many

D make

30 A happy

31 A until

32 A take

33 A told

34 A often

35 A reach

B explained C said

ff$l TESr 4, READTNG PARr 5

Writing

Part íQuestions 1-5

Here are some sentences about a house.For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.You may use this page for any rough work.

Example:

0 | live in this house.

This is the house ............. I live.

Answer: 0 I where

1 My Íami|y has |ived in this house for two months.

My family to this house two months ago.

2 lt was formerly my grandparents'home.

My grandparents used ......... .... here.

3 They said they didn't need so much space.

They said, need so much space.'

4 They were bought a new flat by my parents.

My parents a new flat.

5 lt isn't necessary for me to share a room in this house.

I ................. to share a room in this house.

TEsT 4, WR|T|NG PART 1 rrÍl

Pant 2Question 6

An English-speaking friend called Leo has invited you to go to a football match with him on Saturday.

Write an e-mail to Leo. In your e-mail, you should

o thank him for asking youo SáV how you fee| about going. invite him to a meal afterwards.

Write 35-45 words on Vour answer sheet.

Part 3Write an answer to one of the questions (7 or 8) in this part.Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet

Question 7

o You are going to stay with an Eng|ish fami|y. This is part of a |etter you receive Írom them.

Can ltou tell us about your wzrk or schoo{, )/rurhobbies and tnterests and say whatyou hope to

do while you are in Ery/and7

o Now write a letter to this familv.

o Write your letter on your answer sheet.

Question 8

o Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must have this title:

A new Íriend

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

fř{il TEsr 4, wRrrrNG PARTS 2-3

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.

For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.Choose the correct picture and put atick(/) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

cBA

1 Which iob does the woman do now?

2 Where willthey meet?

[Turn over

LrsrENrNG PART 1 f[[TEST 4,

3 Where is the car park?

4 Which date is Brian's birthday?

x&cB

5 Which photo are they looking at?

c

6 Which T-shirt is Beth wearing?

7 Where is the man?

A

TEST 4, LISTENING PART 1

,Í

------___

151 L7

Part 2Questions 8-13

You will hear part of a radio programme called What's On.For each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

I The competition this year is to flnd the best A actor.

B dancer.

C singer.

9 You can enter the competition iÍ you A send your entry by post.

B live less than five miles from the city centre.

C phone any time after Saturday.

10 To find out more about the theatre group, A the theatre.you should phone B saint pau|s schoor.

C the secretary of the group.

11 What is diÍferent about the arrangements A The c|osing time is |ater than usua|.

at the sports hall this week? B |t is not possib|e to hire the Íootba|| pitch.

C All activities must be booked in advance.

12 What information are we given about the A lt will open next month.new swimming pool? B lt will be free for one week.

C lt is bigger than the old one.

13 What are we to|d about the rock group Switch? A They were a|| born in WestÍie|d.

B They all live in Westfield.

c They are doing two concerts in WestÍie|d.

!ntr

!trtr

!!tr

!!!

tr!n

!nD

TEST 4, LISTENlNG PART 2 lřxr

Part 3Questions 14-19

You will hear someone talking about the city of Cork.For each question, fi|| in the missing inÍormation in the numbered space.

Cork

The population is (14)

Drivers find the number of (15) confusing.

St Patrick Street - on one side are old buildings, on the other side are

(16) ........... . and shops.

Market - (17) and fruit are recommended today.

Café in the (18) is good for lunch.

Public Museum is closed on (19)

TEST 4, LISTENING PART 3

Parl 4Question s 2O-25

Look at the six sentences for this part.

You will hear a conversation between a woman, Kim, and a man, Rob, who live in the same block of flats.

Decide iÍ each sentence is correct or incorrect.|f it is correct, put a tick (,/ ) in the box under A for YES. |Í it is not correct, put a tick (/ \ in the boxunder B for NO.

ABYES NO

!n20 Kim gave a party last night.

21 Rob could hear music from Kim's flat.

22 Rob apologises for disturbing Kim's visitors.

23 Rob plays music when he has visitors.

24 Kim dislikes workino in silence.

25 Kim prefers to work during the day.

ntr

trtr

!!

trtr

NE

TEsr 4, LrsrENrNG PART 4 I}[t

Part íGeneral conversation: saying who you are, givingpersonal information, spelling

Take turns to be the examiner. Ask your partnerquestions to Íind out some information about eachother.

Ask each other at least four of these questions:

o What's your name?o Can you te|| me about your Íami|y?o Are you the oldest, the youngest or in the middle?. Where exactly do you live?o How long does it take you to get to school?o Can you spel| the name oÍ your street for me,

please?

Pant 2

Simulated situation: giving opinions and makingsuggestions

The examiner gives you both a picture. You do a tasktogether.

You are planning to go out with your classmates foran evening to celebrate the end of term. Look at page165. Decíde together where to go'

Ask and answer questions like these:

o Which p|ace wou|d peop|e preÍer?o ls it better to do something indoors or outdoors?o Do people want to sit and talk?. How much will people want to spend?

Part 3Responding to photographs: describing wherepeople and animals are and what they are doing

You take turns to tell each other about a photograph.

Candidate A: look at Photograph 4A on page 169.Candidate B: look at Photograph 48 on page 172.

Think about your photograph Íor a Íew seconds.Describe it to your partner for about one minute.

Tell your partner about these things:

o what kind oÍ p|ace it iso what part oÍ the wor|d it might beo what animals and people there are. how the people are dressed. what they are doing.

Pant 4General conversation about the photographs:ta|king about likes, dis|ikes and preÍerences

The examiner asks you to talk to your partner. Yougive your opinion about something and explain whalyou prefer.

Tell each other about animals you like.

Use these ideas:

o Say if you like horses.o SaV if you have ever been horse-riding. Where?o Say if you would like to. Explain why/why not.o Say if you have any pets at home.o Say what other animals you like.o Say if you know of any unusual pets.

If[I rEsr 4, sPEAKING PARrs 1-4

Reading

Part íQuestions'l-5

Look at the text in each question.What does it say?Mark the correct letter A, B or C on vour answer sheet.

Example:

0

IT IS FORBIDDEN TOMO\TE COMPUTERS FROM

THTS ROOM WITHOUTPERMISSION FROMTHE HEADTEACHER

Answer: nlA B C-lE

You mustn't take the computers out of this roomwithout asking the headteacher.

You should check with the headteacher beforeusing the computers in this room.

You must ask the headteacher Íor permission tomove the computers into this room.

Students who are late must

sign this book before going

to their class.

A Students will not be allowed to enter their class if thevare late.

Students should sign their names in this book if theyexpect to be late.

Students who arrive late should not oo to class beforesigning this book.

A Mack recommends a new c|ub to his Íriends.

B Mack wants to go c|ubbing beÍore the exams.

C Mack suggests going to a club after the exams.

ITurn over

TEST s, READTNG PART 1 run

JL

B

c

Hieveryone!When exams

are over, what about trying

the new club in Green

Street? I havent been there

yet, so l'd like to know whatit's like. Mack

Pete - Woufd you míní coí|ectíng

my {tíngs from f,ry ckan,1rs7 .

ú,F,,t ís on 6aff m6fe. ťftan6.s,

Emmy--

PARENTS ARE REMINDED THAT

THIS IS 1{OT A PLAYGROUND _

PLEASE KEEP CHILDREI{

OFF SCUTPTUBES!

Emma wants Pete to brino her clothes home.

Emma wants Pete to give her a lift to the drycleaners.

Emma has forgotten her ticket and wants Pete toco||ect it Íor her.

A Families can only watch sports events in this park.

B Children must not climb on the sculptures.

C Some of the sculptures are unsuitable for children.

Passengers arriving from abroad must check in theirluggage here.

Trave||ers Írom other countries have to check in theirown luggage here.

This is where you check in your luggage if you aregoing abroad.

A

B

A

c

Part 2Questions 6-10

The people below all want to visit a museum in the Kington area.On the opposite page there are descriptions of eight museums.Decide which museum wou|d be most suitab|e for the Ío||owing peop|e.For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter (A-H) on your answer sheet.

ffiXÁ Tina is going to art co||ege soon. She wants to spend an aÍternoon |ooking

at some modern art. She would like to have lunch and buv some art books.

Karen needs to buy a specia| present Íor a friend and wants to get hersome jewe||ery or pottery made |oca||y' She can on|y go shopping aÍter fiveo'clock in the evenino.

IEIT TEST 5, READING PARTS 1-2

Stefan has just moved to Kington. He would like to find out more about life inthe area over the last hundred years. He is only free on Saturdays.

10

Gareth and Sue want to spend Sunday outdoors. Their children want to learnabout how people used to live in the past. The family are looking forsomewhere which has a playground.

Jack is studying art and is particularly interested in the development of paintingover the |ast three hundred years. He is Íree every aÍternoon and would |ike tostop and have a snack in the museum.

ItIrrserrms and galleries aforrÍrd lfingtonA Most of the machines ín this interesting

museum are indoors, but some of thelarger farming equipment is outside. A lotof the machines stiil work and you cantry usíng them. It is especíally suitablefor school groups and families and isopen Monday to Saturday from 10 a.m.til| ó p.m.

This museum changes its exhibitionsregularly. At the moment it is showingpaintings by artists who all live in the area.The excellent bookshop and café are abovethe gallery. The café is open for lunch from72 tIIl2.30, and the gallery andbookshop from 11 till 6 every day.

The Kington area was once very impofiantindustrially, and this museum tells the historyof the local industries of shipbuilding andpottery. There is a large car park at the frontand a playground at the back. The museum isopen Monday-Friday I0-5.

All the exhibits in this attractive littlemuseum were produced in the region overthe last 100 years. There is a good range ofjewellery, clothes and pictures for sale, allproduced in Kington. The museum is openThursday-Sunday from 2 p.m. till 9 p.m.and the tearoom fuom 2 p.m. till 5 p.m.

E The best an collection ín the area is here, andthere is a separate room for each century,including a small one for twentíeth-centurypaintings. There is a shop selling posters,postcards and cards. The coffee shop is openfor lunch and afternoon tea from middayTuesday-Saturday. The museum is open from11 a.m. tíll 7 p.m. Tuesday-Saturday.

This museum shows family life in Kingtonduring the twentieth century. There are roomsfurníshed exactly as they were in 7920, 1940and 1960, a 7920s garuge and two shops - a1950s general store and a 1930s jeweller's.There is a large playground outside. Openevery day from 10 a.m. till 6 p.-.

There was a village on this site 500 years agoand it is now completely rebuilt. You canwalk around the fields and along the paths tosee how people lived and worked all thoseyears ago. There rs a car park and alargeplayground. Open every day from 9 a.m. till5.J0 p.m.

This museum is very small but is full ofinteresting objects, including jewellery,weapons, pottery, cooking equipment andother househoid items. They were all foundon an ancient site outside the town and theyare all over 1,000 years old. The museum isopen on Saturdays and Sundays only.

B

c G

DH

TEST 5, READING PART 2 rřr{

Part 3Questions 11-20

LookatthesentencesbelowabouttheÍaci|itiesinahote|.Read the text on the opposite page to decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect'

lÍ it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet."

lÍ it is not correct, mark B on your answer sheet'

11 BreakÍast in the dining room costs the same whatever you eat.

12 The dining room closes at 9 P'm.

13 The coffee shop is open at the same times as the swimming pool.

14 The receptionist wi|| bring you a newspaper with your breakfast iÍ you want.

15 You can unlock the front door Íor yourse|f if you return to the hote| very |ate.

16 To te|ephone a room in the hote|, you press 9 Ío||owed by the room number.

17 Chi|dren may only use the swimming poo| when a member oÍ staff is present.

18 You can use the hotel laundry facilities any afternoon'

19 The hotel will look after your money for you while you are out'

20 You must tell the receptionist if you are going out in the evening.

fřril TEST 5, READING PART 3

E

e&RA&egsloT&b"

MealsBreakfast is served in the dining room7.30-9.30 a.m.

(10.00 a.m. on Sundays)" Help yourself from our

buffet or order a full cooked breakfast at no extra

charge. A |ight breakÍast can be served in your roomif preÍerred (see Room Service below).

Dinner is served in the dining room from 7.30 p.m.

(Last orders by 9 p.m. please.)

A children's dinner menu is available until 8 p.m. at aradt te aA rhzraa

The Coffee Shop at the swimming pool is open from

10 a.m. serving a range of drinks, snacks and light

meals.

Room service24-hour room service is not available, but we are

happy to bring light meals and snacks to your roomfor a sma|| extra charge when the CofÍee Shop is

open. Light breakfasts are also available fromT a.m.

Please inform reception the previous evening if you

would like breakfast in your room.

Newspapers can be ordered from Reception and

will be on your breakfast table.

We do not have a night porter. lf you are likely tocome back to the hotel after midnight, please ask the

receptionist for a front-door key.

The telephone in your room can be used to make

calls within the hotel by dialling the number as shown

on the Iist beside it. For calls outside, dial 9 followed

by the number. Calls are charged at normal price for

the first two minutes, then double after that.

The swimming pool is open fromT a.m. to 10 p.m.

Please collect swimming towels from Reception. Do

not use the towels in your bathroom.

Please note that children must be with a responsible

adult at all times when using the pool. The hotel does

not have staff available to do this and can take no

resoonsibilitv for accidents.

There is a washing machine (f 1.50 required) and

drier (50p required). These are in the Iaundry room,

opposite Room '17, and are available for guests to

use after 1 .30 p.m. every day. An iron and ironing

board is also available. The hotel also offers a laundry

service, which takes a minimum of twenty-four hours,

from Monday to Friday. Prices are available from

Reception.

Cash and items of value can be locked away in the

hotel office if you wish to avoid carrying them with

you to the beach, etc. Please ask at Reception. There

is normally no charge for this service.

Please leave your room by '10 a.m. on the day of your

departure to give us time to prepare for the next

guests. lf you would like to leave luggage with us for

part of the day, please tell the receptionist the

evenins before.

TEsr 5, READTNG PART 3 lm

Part 4Question s 21 -25

Read the text and questions below.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Waiter!

I went to the cinema last week and laughed all the way through the new film Waiter!

which is set in a restaufant. Amefican actorTom'Waters plays the worst cook the world

has ever seen and he employs one of the wofst waiters, played by Joe Vermont'

The London restaurant where the filming took place does actually exist.Jane Connors, the

owner, funs a successful business with many regular customers. However, although she

thinks Waiter!is a good film, she is very annoyed with the director.W-hen she agreed to the

filming, she wasn't told that the film is about a festaurant where everlthing goes wfong and

the food is disgusting.Although the film might make Jane's restaurant famous if it is a

success, she is afraidthat people will stop coming because they will think the food and

service is terrible - like it is in the film.Jane is worried she wil1lose business and may even

have to close and start again with a new restaurant.

Having seen the film,I agree that she has a problem.The film company paid her aYery

small fee, and she has since asked for more.The best solution, though, is for her to contact

the newspapers.I am sure they will be interested in her story and it will actually help her

business in the end.

21 What is the writer trying to do in the text?

A advertise a restaurant

B review a film

C explain someone's Problem

D take someone's advice

22 WhaI do we learn about Jane's restaurant?

A lt is very PoPular.

B The food is not good.

c lt is in a beautiÍu| bui|ding.

D The waiters are unhelPful.

Ířq TEsr 5, READTNG PART 4

23 What did the director not tell Jane?

A that the film would be a success

B that the restaurant in the film would be very bad

C that she would not be paid

D that she would need to employ extra staff

24 What does the writer think Jane ought to do?

A open a new restaurant

B ask the Íi|m company for more money

c improve the qua|ity oÍ the Íood in her restaurant

D write to the newspapers

25 Which oÍ these is an advert for the fi|m?

A

Waiter!Comedy í|m set in a typicalAmerican town.| ., '^h r* *ha mictrl,ac n{ rrazrr raa7 (Tam \A/.+^..\ .^-lLdUš| | dL L| |c Il |I>LdNc) v| L| aL/ LUUN \ |U| | | V vdLc| )/ d| |U

mad waiter (oe Vermont).

WAITER!All the oction ťokes ploce in o fomous London

restouront. Find out the truth obout whot hoppensin the kitchens.

..... ,rtla'

.,{!.',;ť" 'erre:*:lir.rit1're'"""'.r.,'.ri,'r.r:t.,:r..ltrtiil.;. ..,,,i,1t,t,t,.,ratre:!,e "oal

AaiEr!5it back and eniog the performantres of Tomlllaters and Joe Vermont in this tromedg filmedin a London restaurant.

B

c

Learn how to cook and be amused at the sametime at this film made specially for television by

well-known cook. Tom Waters.

TEST 5, READING PART 4 xxEt

Part 5Questions 26-35

Read the text below and choose the correct word for each space.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Example:

A are B made C got D were

Answer: niA B C D-lI

Modigli arri - an l;talla;n artistNowadays cards and posters of pictures byAmedeo Modigliani (0) ......popularwith people all (26) . . ..... the world, but the artist himself did not have an easy life.He (27) . ... ... born in Livorno,Italy, in 1884. His father was a businessman who didnot make (28) . ... '.' moÍrey,and his mother (29) . ..... a school.

Modigliani went to art school in Florence andVenice, before moving to Paris (30)

he painted and made sculptures. His work was (31) ...... by art fromAfrica which hesaw in museums. He was very poor and not very strong ,and after a (32) .. . ... years hegave up making sculptures. He painted people in a gentle, thoughtfi.rl style.

Many of his most beautiful paintings (33) . .. ...Jeanne , the woman he loved. Oftenthe people in his paintings look sad or tired. Perhaps Modigliani was painting his ownfeelings. (34) . ......in the end he began to (35) ......alittle money,he wasnever very successful in his lifetime.

26 A over

27 A been

28 A many

29 A held

30 A that

31 A felt

32 A few

33 A see

34 A Therefore

35 A earn

BonB has

B much

B taught

B which

B influenced

B several

B give

B However

B take

C through

C was

C lot

C ran

C when

C suggested

C short

C show

C But

C bring

D along

DisD very

D gave

D where

D discovered

D number

D realise

D Although

D win

:f!| TEsr 5, READTNG PART s

Writing

Part íQuestions 1-5

Here are some sentences about a new sports centre.For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.You may use this page for any rough work.

Example:

0 A famous tennis player opened the new spotls centre.

The new sports centre a famous tennis player.

Answer: o I wae opened by

1 The facilities are excellent.

It ................ excellent facilities.

2 lt's better than the old one.

The old one wasn't this one.

3 | preÍer doing sport to watching it on TV.

! like doing sport ......... .... watching it on TV.

4 The poo| is used by peop|e oÍ al| ages

People of all ages the pool.

5 lt's possible to go swimming early in the morning.

You ........... .. go swimming early in the morning.

TEsT 5, WR|T|NG PART 1 rřf{

Patt 2Question 6

Yesterday you arranged to go the cinema with Selina, an English friend.UnÍortunate|y, you didn't get to the cinema on time and missed her.

Write a note to Selina. ln your note, you should

o apologise for not meeting hero explain why you were lateo suggest meeting another time.

Write 35-45 words on vour answer sheet.

Part 3Write an answer to one oÍ the questions (7 or 8) in this part.

Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top oÍ your answer sheet.

Question 7

o Last week you went to a birthday party. This is part of a |etter you have received Írom yourEngIish penÍriend, Annabe|'

I,l |our /asŤ /eŤŤer /ou saiJ you uere 2oin2 Ťo abirthJa7 Pl,ry, P/ease t-e// ,ue uÁaŤ you JiJ aŤ r'^e

Po,Ť U)har presenr JiJ ,/ou frl(e for 4our friellJ?biJ e,',ery"ll€ €n)o/ Ťhe,use/ves?

o Now write a letter to Annabel answering her questions.

o Write your Ietter on your answer sheet.

Question Io Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must begin with these words:

I had just finished getting dressed when the doorbell rang.

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

[$[l rEsr 5, wRrrrNG PARrs 2-3

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.

For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.Choose the correct picture and put atick ({) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

cBA

1 Which band did the boy watch last night?

2 Where is the woman's new flat?

lTurn over

LrsrENrNG PART 1 ffqlTtrŠT 6

3 Where is the magazine?

4 Which is the boy's teacher?

5 What did the man receive in the post?

r----r@\\-' \

V==--)tur_______b$t

r-l -.=-á\\ --

\\'=;\\ --=- )\=-:--\

r----ffi\\-- \

V==--)

€1€A#L----_pry

cB

cB

6 What time is the flight from New York expected?

7 What was the boy doing when the phone rang?

A

TEST 5, LISTENING PART 1t&

Patt 2Questions 8-13

You will hear a woman talking to an evening class about carpentry.For each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

I The speaker says that when she was at A were taught separately from boys.schoo|, gir|s B cou|d do carpentry iÍ they wanted to.

C were not allowed to do carpentry.

9 Making her chest oÍ drawers took A eighteen months.

B six months.

C two months.

10 She first p|anned to put the chest oÍ drawers A in the sitting room.

B in the bedroom.

C in the hall.

11 What advice does she give about electric tools? A They are useful for some people.

B They are necessary for beginners.

C Only lazy people use them.

12 She suggests that the first job should be A small and simple.something B Íorafriend.

C which practises many skills.

13 What does she suggest that the class should A choose who they will work with

do first? B decide what they need for one job

C discuss what thev should do

!!n

!trtr

nuu

!trtr

trtrtr

nntr

TEsr 5, LrsrENrNG PART 2 IEg

Part 3Questions 14-19

You will hear someone talking on the radio about a fashion show.For each question, fi|l in the missing inÍormation in the numbered space.

Fashion Show

Place: sports stadium

Date: (14) ... .. . ..

Time: 7.3o

Colour of clothes: grey or (15) .. ......

Talk: at 6.3o by a (16)

Clothes for sale: everything except (í7) ''..... ..

Prize for best design: (18) ...........

Buses: depart at 6 p.m. and 7 p.m. from outside (19) ........ .

TEST 5, LISTENING PART 3

Part 4Questions 20-25

Look at the six sentences for this part.

You will hear a conversation between a boy, lan, and agirl,Zoe, about a holiday.

Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect.|Í it is correct, put a tick ({ ) in the box under A for YES.|Í it is not correct, put a tick (/ ) in the box under B for No'

20 lan is going to visit re|atives who Iive in AÍrica.

21 Zoe believes Namibia is a good place to visit.

22 lan's parents insist he must go on holiday with them.

23 Zoe's father is unemployed.

24 Zoe's mother dislikes flying.

25 lan suggests Zoe should visit Namibia with him.

ABYES NO

tr!

trn

trtr

trtr

trtr

nn

rEsr s, LrsrENtNG PARr 4 ]lln

Part íGeneral conversation: saying who you are, givingpersonal information, spelling

Take turns to be the examiner. Ask your partnerquestions to find out some information about eachother.

Ask each other at |east Íour oÍ these questions:

o What's your name? Can you spell your surnamefor me?

o Where do you live?o ls that near the city centre?o Do you live in a house or a flat?o ls it very old? Do you know when it was built?o How many rooms does it have?o Have you always lived there?

Pant 2Simulated situation: exchanging opinions, sayingwhat you think other people would like

The examiner gives you both a picture. you do a tasktogether.

Your class is on a trip to London for the day. Daniel,one of your classmates, couldn't come with you andyou decide to take him a souvenir. Look at page 166.There are some ideas of souvenirs you could buy.Decide together what you will take. You can only takeone thing.

Ask and answer questions like these:

o What do you think he would like?o Would he prefer something to wear or something

to look at?o Would he like something to read?o Would that be too heavy/expensive/easily broken?

Part 3Responding to photographs: describing a place andwhat is happening

You take turns to tell each other about a photograph.

Candidate A: look at Photograph 5A on page 170.Candidate B: look at Photograph 58 on page 173.

Think about your photograph for a Íew seconds.Describe it to your partner for about one minute.

Tell your paftner about these things:

. what kind of place it is

. what the people are watchingo what the people are wearingo whether they |ook comÍortab|eihappylexcitedo what you can guess about the music.

Pafi 4General conversation about the photographs: talkingabout music - likes and dislikes

The examiner asks you to talk to your partner.

Tell each other about the kind of music you like.

Use these ideas:

. talk about your favourite singer/band.o say if you have ever seen them in a concert.. say where you usually listen to music.. say what kind of music you don't like.. say if you play any instruments or sing or dance

yourself.

W rEsr 5, spEAKtNG pARrs 1-4

Reading

Part íQuestions 1-5

Look at the text in each question.

What does it say?Mark the correct letter A, B or C on your answer sheet.

Example:

0I John

tNďr

Can you call the cinema from home and

check ÍiIm time beÍore leaving? Let me

know what time we should get there.

John should

A contact Ne|| aÍter phoning the cinema.

B ring Nell after arriving at the cinema.

C go to the cinema to check when the film starts.

TolFrom'l

Answer: ., lA B c"lr

ToltJenFrom I FAngus

I've had a problem with the car. Can you

get a taxi Írom the station and ring whenyou get to your hotel?

A Angus wants Jen to telephone him from her hotel.

B Angus wants Jen to take him to the hotel in a taxi.

C Angus wants Jen to collect him from the station.

Do not remove the equipment Írom the box beforereading the instructions.

Read the instructions before using the equipment.

Put the equipment in the box after using it.

[Turn over

TEsr 6, READTNG PART 1 nm

B

cM

.t5l Btrnting Avc.Triťfrlrcl TR6 lAG

hJe're having a -s4le this weelend belovevaovtvy house. kay reasonable a*fersacce7*ed {or u,''wa.nřed darniture,wa-shing vrnachine, etc., *oys anJ bikes.

lO-SSat&9avr

THE BUS DRIVER TAKES CASH ONLY.

THE TICKET OFFICE TAKES

CREDIT CARDS OR CASH.

/U/,rm, / wanted to wash tly red jeanst0 wear tomzrr7w but they've

disappeared. Did you do then? /f you

did, thanks but where have you put

These people are selling things to get money fortravelling.

These people sell toys, furniture and bicycles.

These people don't want to take all their furniture totheir new home.

A You cannot pay the bus driver with a credit card.

B The ticket oÍfice can give you change for the bus.

C lt is not possible to buy a ticket with a credit card.

A Tammie wants her mother to wash her jeans for her.

B Tammie is asking her mother where her jeans are.

C Tammie's mother promised to wash her jeansfor her.

B

c

Pant 2Questions 6-10

The peop|e be|ow a|| want to Íind a summer ho|iday job.

On the opposite page there are advedisements for eight jobs.Decide which job would be most suitable for the following people.For questions 6-10, mark the correct letter (A-H) on your answer sheet.

Tom is going abroad to learn German and French in October. He wants tospend July working Íor a newspaper or magazine. He wou|d prefer to be in alarge town or city.

Martha would like a job working with children under twelve. A friend is comingto stay for two weeks in early July, so she must be free then. She's happy totravel and can work until the autumn.

IW TEST 6. READING PARTS 1-2

/.--\á1',lé 6l

10

Sindy is |ooking Íor work in the evenings this summer. She enjoys ta|king topeople, but she doesn't want to stand up all the time, as she already works in arestaurant during the day.

Aidan wants to find a job which provides a room to live in. He doesn't mindworking long hours, but he must be free on Saturdays when he takes part inswimming competitions.

Nick needs a job for at least two months which pays well. He speaks English,Italian and Swedish and would like the chance to use them. He starts universityon 5 October.

Summer jobs specialA Dambury Journal is looking Íor a keen young

reporter to work full{ime Tuesday-Sunday fromour office in this picturesoue litt|e town Íor thesummer. An oppoftunity to learn about journalismon this |oca| newspaper which covers country liÍeand events throughout the area. Accommodationcan be arranoed.

Friendly Australian famjly living nearNeblcaston requi res help from mid-July to

scntémhér FÓ||r qir'l< aocrl thréé +^ élAl...ýen'baby boy. We'11 want you to spend about

one month in France with us. own room andbathroom. Two free days per week,

some eveni ng and l./eekend work. Good pay.

Enjoy meeting new people?Good with children?

You could be a travel guide for American tourists in

Southern Europe and Scandinavia.Newcaston Trave| Ltd |ooks aÍter sma|l groups oÍ chi|dren and

teenagers and also Íamilies trave||ing in groups oÍ up to twenty'Exce||ent rates oÍ pay (extra Íor Íoreign-|anguage speakers).

Minimum six weeks, stafiing mid July.

FDambury Summet PIay Scheme needs hetpers

Írom 8.30 a.m. til| 5-30 p.m' Monday-Friday Íor nine

weeks in July and August. You must be energetic,Ítiend|y and get on weII with chi|dren. Cooking abilityuseÍul. Some days we wiIl take trips to the seasideand relurn late evening. Good pay.

c G Newcaston University Summer School HostelHotel Ferdinand, Dambury, requires kitchen anddining-room stďf for the summer. Six days per week(any day off by arrangement except Fridays). Hoursfrom2 p.m. till 10 p.m. or from 6 a.m. till 2 p.m.Alsosome part-time work (evenings only). Meals providedand some accommodation available if reouired.

We are looking for a Íriend|y efficient person toanswer phone and e-mail enquiries, check

application Íorms and occasionally show newvisitors round. Daytime or evening

(Monday-Saturday) unti! end oÍ summer. Someaccommodation may be avai|ab|e iÍ required.

Dffi*

&"#Wffiw&&ř

M

This Week H

The best new Whot! On guide to Newcaston needs

lively young people to work at its main office, right in

the centre of this great city, for one or two monthsthis summer. Hours | 0- 6.

Experience in magazine journalism not necessary, butenthusiasm is! ldeal for students and school leavers.

Teen Wheels Magazine is looking for foreign languagespeakers to work in the telephone sales departmentfrom late August. You can earn lots of money sellingadvertising to companies in Europe and the US.PossibiIity of permanent job iÍ required. office in

suburbs of Newcaston, easy access city centre.

TEST 6, READING PART 2 rW

Part 3Questions 11-20

Look at the sentences below about unusual women of the past.Read the text on the opposite page to decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect.lf it is correct, mark A on your answer sheet.lf it is not correct, mark B on your answer sheet.

11 The writer says many women joined armies before the twentieth century.

'|.2 Christian Walsh wanted to marry a soldier.

13 Kit Cavanagh spent thirteen years in the army.

14 Kit fought the doctors when they tried to operate.

15 Anne Bonney went to the Bahamas to Íind John Rackham.

16 Anne helped John to get a fast ship.

17 Mary was a|ready working on a ship beÍore she met Anne'

18 Mary joined the army in order to be with her husband.

't9 Anne and Mary went to prison after John Rackham.

20 lt is uncertain what happened to Anne and Mary in the end.

tř;ril TEsT 6, READlNG PART 3

You may think that no women went to sea or joined the army until the twentiethcenturř but this is not true.Although they usual|y had to Pretend to be men,thereare a few true stories of woman who fought for both good reasons and bad ones.

One English woman soldier in the seventeenth century was ChristianWalsh,the wifeof a man who was made to join the army, although he did not want to be a soldier.Christian refused to accept the situation, unlike most women in those days. She cutoff her hair, dressed as a man and joined the army, calling herself Kit Cavanagh, in

order to look for her husband. lt was thirteen years before she found him and duringthat time she fought in several different countries. She was only discovered to be awoman when doctors were operating on her for an injury she had received whilefighting.

A rather different example, from around the same time, is Anne Bonney. lt is notcertain why she left lreland, where she was born, and went to the islands which arenow called the Bahamas. However, we know that when she got there, she fell in lovewith a sailor called John Rackham. She worked with John to steal a ship from thelocal port.They obviously chose the ship carefully, because it was the fastest one inthe port at the time. For the next ten years they sailed round the Caribbean,attacking other ships and stealing everything valuable from them, as well as takingsailors to help on their own ship.

One day, Anne was surprised to discover that a boy they had taken off another shipin this way was really a young woman. She told Anne her name was Mary Read. Shesaid she had dressed like a man to increase her opportunities, because in those daysof course most women were expected to stay at home. Earlier, Mary had fought in

the army, but had stopped pretending to be a man for a short time when she marrieda soldier who had realised that she was a woman. Unfortunately her husband died,and so Mary started to dress as a man once again and became a sailor.

Anne and Mary continued their criminal career with John Rackham, but in theend their ship was caught by the navy.The two women went on fighting even afterall the men were taken prisoner, but they avoided punishment and disappeared.Nobody knows what happened to them after that. Perhaps they pretended to bemen and joined another ship, or maybe they got married.

TEST 6, READING PART 3 W

Pafi 4Question s 21 -25

Read the text and questions below.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Living in the Ice Age

I'm a scientist and I arrived here inAntarctica three months ago in December.The temperature

is cold but not unpleasant yet. Since arriving,I've worked with about 60 other people getting

everything ready for the Antarctic winter. It's been a lot of hard work, but it was fun too.

However, a few days ago the ship left taking most of the staff with it, and it won't be back to

fetch us until next December. So the hardest thing to get used to is that there are now just

fourteen of us because I'm used to working in a large company.

I'm living on the same work station I was on ten years ago.It was new then and it's still ingood condition and unchanged.The dried food we get is also the same - you forget what real

food tastes like after a few weeks.The people working here with me are all different from then,

but I'm always happy getting to know new people .Ten years ago, we wefe able to send faxes

to friends and family once a month, but today we can send e-mails and talk on the phone so we

don't feel so far away.

Last week we went out exploring for a few days.We slept in our vefy thick sleeping bags to

keep the cold out.'We always have to wear the right clothes and boots for walking on ice and

snow.'We were joined together by a rope all the time in case we fell into any holes in the ice.

They're too deep to climb out of. The skies were clear and I was reminded how lucky I am to

be here. Soon we will get amazing sunsets too.

What is the writer trying to do?

A persuade people to work in Antarctica

B complain about his life in Antarctica

C describe his own experiences in Antarctica

D suggest ways of improving |iÍe in Antarctica

What is difficult for the writer at the moment?

A He is working with a small number of people.

B There is too much work to do.

C The weather is too cold.

D The ship won't return Íor months.

21

22

Em TEsr 6, READTNG PART 4

23 In the writer's opinion, what has improved since ten years ago?

A The living accommodation is better.

B The food is more tasty.

C Communications have improved.

D His colleagues are easier to work with.

24 What particular danger was there when they were exploring?

A the cold

B the holes in the ice

C getting lost

D slipping on the ice

25 Which oÍ the fo||owino e-mai|s did the writer send to a friend?

A

I'm getting used to being in Antarctica. Although people had told

me what it was like, it's still a shock to experience it myself.

There hasn't been much to do here yet, so I've spent the time

getting to know my colleagues and relaxing.

It's good to be back here, I'd forgotten how beautiful it is. I'm

looking forward to seeing some wonderful sunsets.

I'll send you my news as often as I can. It won't be long till I'm

home, as I've already been here nearly a year.

B

c

D

TEsr 6, READTNG PART 4 XIg

Part 5Questions 26-35

Read the text be|ow and choose the correct word Íor each space.For each question, mark the correct letter A, B, C or D on your answer sheet.

Example:

0 A doubt

Answer:

B chance C way D matter

nlA B C D-lI

Fashions go round arrd roundFashions have always changed with time. No (0) .... Roman girls worriedabout having the latest hairstyle and boys inAncient Egypt wanted to have sandals

(25) . ... were cool and not the sensible ones their mothers preferred.

Looking (27) . ... over recent times, there seem to be two main differences in the(28) . .... fashions have changed compared to earlier tímes. Firstly, (29) .

more people have a choice of clothes avallable to them.There are few places(30) . ... the wodd where the trainers, the caps or the T:shirts of teenagers do not

change from one yeaÍ to the next. Secondly, styles are (31) '... within a muchshorter time than they (32) .... to be. For instance, in the 1960s, (33) . ... had

the same low waists and narrow skirts as forty years before.

In the earý years of the 21st century, the shops are (34) .... of long skirts and

coloured scarves like the ones in fashion only thirty years before. Soon, we will find that

the really fashionable people look no different from the (35) . ... of us, because it isonly ten years since their clothes were in fashion before!

26 A they

27 A about

28 A soft

29 A some

30 Ain31 A accepted

32 A wanted

33 A dresses

34 A Íi||ing

35 A other

B that

B round

B kind

B much

BonB returned

B needed

B jackets

B Íi||ed

B most

C these

C back

C type

c Íar

CofC exchanged

C used

C trousers

C full

C rest

D those

D behind

D way

D even

D through

D repeated

D had

D blouses

D fuller

D all

I$[l rEsr 6, READTNG PART 5

Writing

Part íQuestions 1-5

Here are some sentences about a new pop group.For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.You may use this page for any rough work.

Example:

0 The group is called Fireworks.

The name oÍ '...''.'...... Fireworks.

Answer: 0 l Ťhe qroup ie

1 The new pop group was discovered by a television producer.

A television producer the new pop group.

2 The singer was a waiter before he joined this group.

BeÍore this group, the singer Was a waiter.

3 The women aren't such oood musicians as the men.

The men are .........,.. . muslcians than the women.

4 The women all dance brilliantlv.

The women dancers.

5 | couldn't afford a ticket for their concert.

The tickets for their concert cost '........ .... Íor me.

TEST 6, WRITING PART.I :Eil

Panl 2Question 6

You have an English friend called Lee. You are both going to another friend's birthday pany next week.

Write an e-mail to Lee. |n your e-mail, you šhou|d

o say how you will get thereo suggest you go togethero ask him Íor advice about a present.

Write 35-45 words on vour answer sheet.

Part 3Write an answer to one oÍ the questions (7 or 8) in this part.Write your answer in about 100 words on your answer sheet.Put the question number in the box at the top of your answer sheet.

Question 7

o This is part of a letter you receive from an English penfriend.

/ alwags go shopping utith mg frienods at theweekend. What c/o gotr /ike buging when gor,r

go shopping? What kind ofshops are therenear where gopr /ive?

o Now write a letter answering your penfriend's questions.

o Write your letter on your answer sheet.

Question Io Your English teacher has asked you to write a story.

o Your story must begin with this sentence:

I got off the train and waved to my brother, who was waiting on the platform.

o Write your story on your answer sheet.

IGPX rEsr 6, wRrrrNG PARTs 2-3

Part íQuestions 1-7

There are seven questions in this part.

For each question, there are three pictures and a short recording.Choose the correct picture and put atick(/) in the box below it.

Example: What will the boy take back to the shop?

cBA

1 Which instrument is the girl learning now?

cBA

2 What wi|| they buy Íor Lucy?

BA

lTurn over

LrsrENrNG PART i [ftl

3 What will the weather be like on Sundav?

4 What did the boy leave in the girl's house?

B

cB

5 What will the boy get from the shop?

B

6 Which sport is unavailable todav?

B

7 What is the girl wearing?

A

tE5 |

cB

ffi\wffi\a\ .4\

l. Ý;-

7Ál

1{Ť/-\\l/i

ť*an),</€

nEln 6, LISTENING PART 1

Patt 2Questions 8-13

You will hear a radio interview with a teenage boy called Matthew who has invented a game.For each question, put a tick (/ ) in the correct box.

I How old was Matthew when his gamewas Íirst sold?

A ten

B thirteen

c Íourteen

!trtr

ntr!

tr!tr

trtrtr

!!n

!!!

9 When Matthew tried to sell his idea to companies, A he had no replies.

B some companies asked to see the game.

C none of them was interested.

10 Matthew borrowed monev Írom A a bank.

B some relatives.

C a businessman.

11 How did Matthew get his idea for a A An American company made a suggestion.second product? B some other chirdren tord him about it.

C He watched his sisters playing.

12 According to Matthew, most ten-year-olds A games which test what they know.

are interested in B games which are about their everyday lives.

C games which use their imagination.

13 When Matthew leaves school, he wants to A run his own business.

B do a course in business studies.

C continue inventing games.

TEsT 6, L|STENING PART 2 IIŤGI

Part 3Questions 14-19

you will hear a radio announcer giving some information about a cycling holiday with Pathway Holidays'

For each question, fill in the missing information in the numbered space'

Pathway HolidaYs

Monday 12 June - Saturday lT lune

Cycle from Whitehaven to Sunderland in England

The total length of the ride is (14) ..... .. ' kms'

The highest place on the ride is (15) ......'.... ' Hill'

The price includes accommodation, food, luggage transport and a

(16)....... ..

It is recommended that you bring your o\Mn (17) ..""""'

On Friday evening there is a (18)

lnformation available from the (19) ... ......

TEST 6, LISTENING PART 3

Pant 4Questions 20-25

Look at the six sentences for this part.

You will hear a conversation between a girl, Jane, and her mother about where Jane will work next month.

Decide iÍ each sentence is correct or incorrect.ff it is correct, put a Iick (/ ) in the box under A for YES.lf it is not correct, put a tick ({ ) in the box under B for NO.

ABYES NO

n!20 Jane is leaving school next week.

21 Jane's mother is unhappy about Jane working in her office.

22 Jane has met her mother's colleagues before.

23 Jane is uncertain about what career she wants.

24 Jane is interested in working in a school with her friends.

25 In the end, Jane's mother agrees to take her to work.

trtr

tr!

trn

n!

tr!

TEsT 6, LlSTENING PART 4 ]rŤ|

Part íGeneral conversation: saying who you are, givingpersonaI inÍormation, spe|ling

Take turns to be the examiner. Ask your parlnerquestions to find out some inÍormation about eachother.

Ask each other at |east Íour oÍ these questions:

o What's your name?o What do you like doing at weekends?o What do you do when you have free time at home?o Where do you go to meet your friends?o How often do you go shopping?o Who helps you to choose your clothes?o Can you spe|l the name of your favourite shop Íor

me, please?

Pant 2Simulated situation: exchanging information andgiving opinions

The examiner gives you both a picture. you do a tasktogether.

You've won a competition to learn a new skill. you'regoing to do a course together Íor one week. Look atpage '167. You have a choice of seven courses.Decide together which one you will choose. Thinkabout what you can do already and what you wouldlike to learn.

Ask and answer questions like these:

o Can you do any of these things already?o Which of these things would you like to learn?o Which courses do you not want to do?o Which course wou|d be most usefu|/Íun/interesting?

Part 3Responding to photographs: describing wherepeople are and what they are doing.

You take turns to tell each other about a photograph.

Candidate A: look at Photograph 64 on page '170.

Candidate B: look at Photograph 68 on page 173.

Think about your photograph Íor a few seconds.Describe it to your panner Íor about one minute.

Tell your partner about these things:

. what kind of place it iso what you can see thereo what the people look likeo what the people are doing/buyingo whether they are all enjoying what they are doing.

Part 4General conversation about the photographs: talkingabout likes, dislikes and preferences

The examiner asks you to talk to your partner. yougive your opinion about something and explain whatyou prefer.

Talk to each other about earning money.

Use these ideas:

o Say whether you have a job or have ever had one.o Say what you do (or did) and what you feel about

doing it.

o Say what kind of job you would like to have.o Say why you think you would enjoy it.o Say how you would spend the money you earn.

:[fl rEsr 6, spEAKtNG pARTs 1-4

Here are some sentences about a motorbike.For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.You may use this page Íor any rough work.

Example:0 This is my brother's motorbike.

This motorbike.......... '.. my brother.Answer: 0 | be|onqo Ť,o

1 He's on|y had it Íor two weeks.

He only two weeks ago.

one oÍ his friends so|d it to him.

A friend ......... sold it to him.

It wasn't very expensive.

It didn't much.

I asked him if I could have a ride on it.

I said' a ride on it?'

It's essential to wear a helmet when you ride it.

You ........... .. a helmet when you ride it.

Here are some sentences about a winter holiday.

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as the first.

Use no more than three words.Write only the missing words on your answer sheet.

You may use this page for any rough work.

6 Sunbathing isn't as much fun as skiing.

Skiing is............... sunbathlng.

I was taught to ski by mY mother.

My mother to ski'

She advised me to do some exercises Íirst.

She said,.You '...'..... ... do some exercises Íirst.'

My Íather doesn't ski now, but he did when he was young'

My Íather ski when he was young.

He says he doesn't have enough time to come with us.

He says he's too to come with us.

10

EXTRA PRACTICE FOR WRITING PART 1 IP

Extra language Íor all partsoÍ the Speaking Test

When you don't understand:

Could you say that again, please?

Could you repeat that, please?

Please can you explain what you want me to do?

I'm afraid I don't understand what vou wantme/us to do.

I'm sorry, what does mean?

I'm sorry, I don't understand what you mean.

When you don't know the name of something:

I don't know the word for this in Enolish.

It's like a box.

It's similar to a CD.

You use it to make a hole in a wall.

3 Giving yourself time to think what to say:

Well, I suppose, my opinion is that . . .

I'm not really sure what to say, but . . .

|t's difÍicu|t to say, but . . .

Let me think for a moment . . .

Extra language for Part 1

of the Speaking Test

Introducing yourselÍ:

I'm Maria Gonzalez.

My name's Maria Gonzalez.

I'm called Maria Gonzalez.

But my friends call me Mari.

Giving inÍormation about yourselÍ:

Your Íamily:

|'m from a |argelsmal|Íami|y.

I have two (younger) brothers and a(n older)sister.

I'm an only child.

Your home:

We |ive in a Í|atlhouse in ....

My grandmother also lives with us.

I share a flat with some other students.

Your job/studies:

I live/workigo to school in . . .

I'm studying at high school/university.

I'm training to be an engineer.

I'm a nurse.

Your free time:

ln my spare time I play computer games.

I do a |ot oÍ sport.

My hobby is photography.

I don't have much free time, but when I dolliketo...

Extra language tor Part 2of the Speaking Test

Making suggestions:

What about going clubbing?

Shall we buy a ticket?

We could hire bicycles.

I think we should catch a bus.

It would be a good idea to take our mobiles.

Why don't we take a picnic?

Let's have a party.

Would you like to go to the cinema?

Agreeing:

I agree with you.

I completely agree.

That's (probably) right.

You could be right.

DeÍiniteIy!

Sure!

I Disagreeing:

I can't agree with that.

In my opinion, that's quite wrong.

I don't really agree with you about that.

I see what you mean, but I think . . .

;re[t EXTRA LANGUAGE FoR sPEAKING TEST

Asking someone else for their ideas:

What about you?

So, what do you think?

Do you agree?

How do you Íee| about this?

Accepting that your opinion is differentfrom someone else's:

I don't think we can agree about this.

We both have our own opinions about it.

My opinion/experience isn't the same as yours.

Let's agree to disagree about that.

Extra language for Part 3oÍ the Speaking Test

Saying where a place is:

|t's near/not far from/a |ong way Írom here.

It's in the city/in the country/in the mountains/on the coast.

|t's north oÍ here.

|t's about twenty ki|ometres south oÍ here.

It's in the west of the country.

Saying where something is in a picture:

It's in the background/foreground/the middle.

It's on the left/right.

It's at the top/bottom.

Saying where people are:

They're in a shop/in a caÍélin a hote|i in thecity centre/in a taxi.

They're on a bus/train/plane.

They're at home/at work/at schooliat thetheatrei at the beach.

Describing people:

He's (quiteivery) talI i short/Íatlthin.

He's got dark hair.

She's wearing blue jeans.

Making guesses:

They look happy to me.

They look like brothers.

They cou|d be Íriends.

They may be students.

They seem bored.

Perhaps they've lost something.

Maybe they need a lift.

It's possible that they're strangers.

They're probably enjoying themselves.

Explaining your opinion:

| (don't) think/believe he's happy because he's(not) smiling.

She must be tired because she's yawning.

Extra language Íor Part 4oÍ the Speaking Test

Saying what you like:

I like/love watching music videos.

l preÍer swimming to cyc|ing.

I'd rather play volleyball than write a letter.

My favourite colour is pink.

and dislike:

I don't really like cooking.

I'm not very keen on westerns.

I hate doing housework.

I never enjoy long journeys.

Talking about plans:

I want to go to university.

I'm planning to travel abroad.

I'm hoping to become a teacher.

I'm going to study engineering.

I think l'll probably get a job.

I'm not sure what I'm going to do.

15

10

16

11

17

12

13

18

14

EXTRA LANGUAGE FOR SPEAKING TEST

,, L

Test

1, Pa

rl 2

W ffi

W Í u) c r- a TI u a -o m a z m a --l

::1,

,:lll

;-tr

l,lr

:::t

:t a

:,

.,'r

t:,l,

t:t,

utl,,

t'llr

tlitr

tr l,

f'].

.a.:

:.a:

' l,

I':,

::,..

\,/.

/

.,':,

7 a'

l','

,',',V

,

rrtt

\ I

r

Ut

Test

2, Pa

rt 2 W

5 g') c r- (n "Tl

a'l ! @ -o m a z c) -l m @ --l

w$

*ffi M

@@D

NFLGL(!'FoF

VISUALS FOR SPEAKING TEST

Test

4,

Part

2

ll(}l

il^dt &r ffi-r

NFLt!tr

ňloPooF

4;šY7 I

t ffiEffi'ffi

ffi

VISUALS FOR SPEAKING TEST

Test

6,

Part

2

*i%

;1*

tI

ffi

(ut

/ cr

(

iNq

^

/ /\

, .\

t

I I

Í\\/

(

(

^t

i!:.1

|

Itr

ul&

ild

I I

ttF,

ffin

-a

I I

fEff

it!')

affi/

\f)

\V

A,\\

* r

%

U' c r a -Tt ! a -o m a z c) --.1 m @ --l W W e W.

Test í ' Part 3' Photograph í A

ffi*t:ff-."H

'l:* 'JŤ .li

i-,t

**..

J

14

*

Test 2, Part 3, Photograph 2A

,f".

ffi

VISUALS FOB SPEAKING TEST

Test 3, Part 3, Photograph 3A

Test 4, Part 3n Photograph 4A

= é**a*ffitrtrfftrtr

,..

1.

'+

VISUALS FOR SPEAKING TEST

Test 5, Part 3, Photograph 5A

Test 6, Part 3, Photograph 6A

G

VISUALS FOR SPEAKING TEST

Test í , Part 3' Photograph í B

%-",

Test 2, Part 3, Photograph 28

VISUALS FOB SPEAKING TEST

Test 3, Part 3, Photograph 38

Test 4, Part 3, Photograph 48ilF. %*&$,

ffi ffiHffi,ffiffiEtrffi ri:#*;

ffim"'ffi,p l9wffióqygť&.éjtr1E"-

"

ffi vrsuALS FoR sPEAKtNG TEST

Test 5, Part 3, Photograph 58

Test 6, Part 3, Photograph 68

VISUALS FOR SPEAKING TEST

UNIVERSITY o/ CAMBRIDGEESOL Examinations

III

li:-t:::ti: ;lil*lli:;,;: j liiil

].'. ;l! l.] ]. í.ij

IIII:III

-II!I

-

-:TIII

rITIr-rITtII:ITI'ITI

-IIT

-'ll16112126.2,' .-- ., z.l, ].:,:,..,'l',:1.,''. '.1' .i,,. I ',12,,',:"',,t':',,: :2zi 27. ;::,1,11?..,.,,-,, .,. 1 ,q r,ill:;:l i:. lr-., l::l. lrrr',1.,r',il-i l lnr:.r::, il;i1 i,rait|t, il;: l-l l, ,coli\ 1j i:: i":,13 23 2838 a9- l'---'- r I - :.'--'

a i:*l ::t,l'] I ,9 i:,! j,l :: :.1:. ril: :: :',r;

''j:

.t A ?,r9l

., I ^^

i f, !l1 i:t lii l17 32

uux*a{!r

PEr Rw r Elfuorssa zfiaaz DP491/389

OUCLES Photocooiable

W,eK ANSWER sHEErs

- l l - I - - f - r - a - - - I - - I - - - - I a I - I -

OU

CLES

Pho

toco

oiab

le

- - - r a - - - T I I T I I - - n T - T - ! r T - T - T - I - I I I - : ! - - E I T

OU

CLES

Pho

toco

piab

le

z a É m Ť @ T m m U)

pnl

ffi

h{ x

UNIVERSITY o/ CAMBRIDGEESOL Examinations

Supervisor:

rI

--II

-III

--"r':..*!*ti.tj:1:r ::::x:{*:: -

I

:III:IIII:TII

-fI

--:III

IrIII':r

i9 ]exÁ.,1iia ?

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

I9

10

'|.1

12

í3

15'

I 16rr..,,.,,1.....t17

,

, 18'.-, - - .. . ,t,, . ....,....,,,. ...,. .. ..

,19::

T

II

rIPET L BffiSorssa zcraaz

OUCLES Photocopiable

ffi ANSWER SHEETS

aitii

;1 :) i! ),<.),/

PAPER í ReadingPart íTeacher's noteso In Part 1, the texts are signs, notices, labels, e-mails, phone

messages, handwritten notes, messages on Post-it notesor postcards. The signs and notices are mostly onesseen in public places, for example in shops, libraries,stations, hotels, theatres, museums, schools, etc. andon public vehicles such as buses and trains. Sometimesthere is a label from a bottle or packet or a notice on aschool or public noticeboard.. The signs óften give instructions, warnings orinformation.

o Language in signs is usually quite formal, but certainwords like the, a(n) and the auxiliary verb to be areoften omitted.. The messages are informal and usually make or changeaÍrangements, ask someone to do something, ask forinformation, etc.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategyí1 five2 what each text says3 on the ans\ler sheet (but see second Exam tip!)

D/ a s18n.In a room in a school.You mustn't; out of this room; without asking.Because the sign is about moving computers, not usingthem.Because it's about moving them from the room, notinto it.

a) an e-mail .

noyes - she says I've found my card.to bring her student card because her ticket will costlessno, at the ticket office before they get on the trainin the ticket oueueC means the šame as the message. See you in queue atticket office tells you they will meet before they get onthe train.A Katie tells Emily to bring her student card so Emily

can buy her own ticket. Katie says she will meetEmily in the queue so she isn't going to buy Emily'sticket.

B Katie's train ticket will cost the same as Emily's ifthey both have their student cards. If Emily forgetsher card, her ticket will cost more than Katie'sbecause Katie has found her card.

Reading Part í key1C2 C for use by visiting team only = 111sr6.,s of the local

swimming team can't use these lockers3 A ring him before six = she phones James by six4 C sÍafÍ= peop|e who work here; after 5 p.m. = in the evening5 B can you ring Mum and ask her? = Íind out; then please

Dost it = send the letter

Language practice: Reading Part 1

1 Grammar: modal verbs (may, must/mustn't,shou ld /shou I d n't, needn't)

c) 1 must2 mustn't3 needn't4 should5 may6 shouldn't

2 Writing: words |eÍt out1 In an emergency, use the telephone in the hall to call

the hostel manager.2 Don't forget to take your towel with you to (the)

football practice tonight.3 Read the instructions before the equipment is switched

on.4 We're/I'rn having a lovely time in Spain. The weather

is wonderful.5 If a receipt is needed, ask the assistant when you are

paying.

3 Grammar: if I unless sentences (real situations)a) 1 present; future

2 future; present3 future; presentunless = iÍ not

c) Suggested answers:1 there's a good film on.2 Iwon't get a good mark.3 you like it.4 we,ll go to the café.5 I'11 be tired tomorrow.

Part 2Teacher's notes. Part 2 tests students' detailed comprehension of factual

information.. The eight short texts aÍe about one topic. They may be

from tourist brochures, information leaflets, catalogues,etc.

. There are always three texts which are not needed.. There is only one ans\,/er to each question.o Each text can be used only once as an ansv,ier.

21

LJ4

31

Z3Á

s67

b)1ba^LY3f4a5c6d

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1 TNM

. The pictures are there to help students understand thedescriptions.

. Students should be advised not to ÝVrite on the answersheet until they have answered all the questions in casethey change their minds.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

1 five2 to find somewhere to stav3 hotels4 eight5 which hotel would be most suitable for each of the

people6 on the ans\,/er sheet (but see Teacher's note above)

26 a young couple and their son7 a young man8 a middle-aged woman9 a young couple

10 a couole with 3 children

in the city centre near the railway stationNo, they're with their one-year-old son.walk ever)'wherein restaurants

Giorgos \ /ants to be able to swim but is not interestedin other sports. He'd like to spend the weekendsomewhere quiet in the countrlz. The hotel must havea car park.

8 Monica would like to stay somewhere in thecountrvside where there are orsanised activities sothat she can meet other people. As she has some workto do, e-mail facilities must be available.

9 Julia and Robert are travelling by eaf and want to pafkat their hotel. They don't want to be further than tenkilometres from the city. They \^/ant to swim everyday and have dinner at the hotel.

10 Adam and Barbara need to stay somewhere in the citywhich provides lunch and dinner and has a car park.Their three children all enjoy sport.(Now students can see which people \ /ant to stay inthe city and which people want to stay in the country.They can also see which facilities the people want.)

4a) 1 D,E,G

2 G lt's near the railwav station, near restaurants andis a familv hotel.

Reading Part 2 key6G7 F midd|e oÍ the hi||s; peaceÍu|; swimming poo|; car parkI B between two farms; dances and other events; popular with

people travel|ing a|one; internet caÍe9 D one kilometre from city centre; car park; swimming pool in

the next street; dinner is available10 A a five-minute drive Írom the city centre; gym, tennis courts;

guests can eat all their meals here; car park

Language practice: Reading Part 21 Vocabu|ary: hote| Íaci|ities1 swimming pool 82 television in room 93 car park 104 tennis courts 115 telephone in room 1.2

6 bicycles for hire 137 lift 14

2 Grammar: linking wordsa)1B

.JA4C5B6B

b) 1 Parking is available in the street, but it is sometimesdifficult to find a space. /Although parking isavailable in the street, it is sometimes difficult to finda space.

2 The rooms at the front are very popular because /since/as they have lovely views of the sea.

3 I like to eat dinner in mv hotel, so I choose hotelswhich have a restaurant

4 Hotels usually offer lunch and dinner, whileguesthouses often serve only breakfast.

3 Vocabulary:prepositions1 on; of2 near3in4 between5 from6 of; in7 with8in

restaurantentertainmentgymgardengolfrailwaystation-5minsciýcentre-3kms

31

L?

b)7

4a)

Grammar: present perfect and past simple1 a week2 every day3 twice4no5 two days ago

b)1ca^

3bc) 1 we've/we have stayed

2 've/have been3 've/have never ridden4 I played5 haven't had

Part 3Teacher's notesa

aIn Part 3, students' ability to scan a text is tested.The text may give information, for example about aholiday or a course, or it may be a set of instructions.The sentences come in the same order as theinformation in the text.Students do not need to understand ever;.thing toansv/er the questions. For example, they may not knowthe word deqosit, but this sentence is not tested.

InrJl TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1

2a) 17b) lsc) 20d) r2e) 14

f) 18

c) 11h) 76i) 1ei) 13

. Students can sometimes guess the meaning of a wordby reading the words around it. For example, they maynot know squash racket,but from the sentence they canguess that it ís used for an indoor sport.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

I ten2 a company which organises sports camps3 the text4 if each sentence is corÍect or incorrect5 if the sentence is correct6 if the sentence is incorrect

4 Vocabulary: sportsa) 1 table tennis

2 sailing3 windsurfing4 climbing5 volleyball6 horse-riding

b) boat - sailingrope - climbingboard - windsurfingbat - table tennisnet - volleyballhat - horse-riding

5 Speaking: your experiences (2)a)

b) uncomfortable, unhelpful, uninteresting, unfriendly

Part 4Teacher's notes

In Part 4, the text always gives an opinion as well asinformation.Some of the questions ask about the whole text andsome ask about one part of the text. For each question,help students to decide how much of the text theynee-d to look at in order to find the answer.The questions are not in the same order as theinformation in the text.Question 21 is always a general question.Questions 22, 23 and 24 ask about a detail in the textor the opinion of the writer or someone else who ismentioned.Question 25 is general. It can sometimes be a picture,DOSter, etc.Ěncourage students to read the text quickly to get anidea what it is about before looking at the questions.Then students should read the text again much morecarefully.

photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

1

L

3

21)J

31

Z345

Reading Part 3 key11 B12413 B sport for all, not just Íor those who are brilliant at athletics.14 B unnecessary to bring any equipment15 A we do all come together for social activities and meals.16 A but some of the assistants... are students17 B Most oÍ the places are recommended to us, but not all, so

we are not responsible for the quality18 B one month before your camp.19 A you are charged 2.5% extra by us if you pay with your

credit card.20 A Fifty per cent of the fee is refunded if a cancellation is

made up to two weeks before

Language practice: Reading Part 31 Vocabulary: negative adjectivesb) 1 Some of the staff are unqualified. .2 It is impossible for us to arrange other .

accommodation.3 Luxury accommodation is unavailable near our

camDs.4 Som'e of the other guests \ /ere untidy people. '5 It's unsafe to go on a boat if you can't swim. .6 His answer was incorrect.

2 Vocabulary: words with similar meanings1 shut - closed2 staff - employees3 return - take back4 reserve - book5 cheaper - less expensive6 forbidden - not allowed7 comolete - fill in8 recommends - advises

3 Grammar: the passiveb) 1 invite bands from all over the world.

2 attend the festival everv VeaÍ.3 sells tickets.4 gave me a ticket.5 offered me a lift in his car.

c) 1 were told where to put our tent (by a man).2 was provided by the campsite o\^,rner.

3 wasn't spoiled by the bad weather.4 were asked to take all our rubbish away with us

(by the organisers).5 were woken up too early by the people in the

next tent.

the text and questionsmark the coÍrect letter, A, B, C or Don youl ans\^řer sheet

He's an artist.He works at home.No.

whyfeelingsthoughtsusually doesmight do

GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1 IIEI

staff accommodation activities weatherboring r' r'cold ./comfortable ýwarm a/

heloful t/interesting Ýrarnv ýsunnY 1/

friendlv

TEACHER'S

Reading Part 4 key2't c22 B The Íirst paragraph says nobody tells me ''' .

23 D no one to discuss last night's match with.

24 B I find a CD which will start me thinking25 A people can always find me ... I feel increasingly stressed

Language practice: Reading Part 41 Language Íocus: fee|ings1+ 2+ 3- 4+ 5- 6- 7- 8- 9- 10+

2 Grammar: expressions withSuggested answers:1 going to clubs.2 doing my homework.3 watching television.4 going out at the weekend.5 tidying my bedroom.6 doing grammar exercises.7 passing my exams.8 learning languages.9 getting up early.

10 finishins this exercise.

Vocabulary: jobs1 postman/v,/oman2 shop assistant3 disc jockey4 chef5 footballer6 architect

b) 2 A shop assistant serves customers.3 A disc jockey plays records.4 A chef cooks meals.5 A footballer scores goals.6 An architect designs buildings.

Part 5Teacher's notes. The questions in Part 5 test eitheÍ lexical or structura]

knowledge.. Students should be advised to write their answers in

the spaces in the text first, as this will help them tograsp the overall meaning. They can transfer theirans\ r'ers when they have read the whole text andchecked their answers.

o Point out that there can only be one word which fitseach space. For example, in Question 32, a varieýmakes sense, but variety on its own does not makesense/ so B is wrong.

. Sometimes an English word may look like a similarword in another language but mean somethingdifferent, so students should look carefully at all fouroptions. If they choose too quickly, they might makemistakes.

. Students should check that they have chosen theright kind of word for each space. In Question 30,a comparative form is needed because than comeslater in the sentence, so onlv more wIlI fit.

. They can mark A, B, C or D on the exam paper andcopy them to the answer sheet later.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page L74.

Strategy1

1 the text2 tl:'e correct word for each space3 on the ans\ler sheet (but see Teacher's note above)

2It will probably include 2, 4 and 6.It may also talk about 1.It's unlikely to mention 3 and 5.

3The reviewer mentions everything except 1, 3 and 5.

41A2 OnIy enjoyed can be followed by reading it. The other

three words would be used to describe someone'sfeelings: I was pleased/amusect/delighted by the book.

Reading Part 5 key26 B (lexical/structural)27 C (structural)28 D (structural)29 B (structural)30 B (lexical)31 C (lexical)32 A (lexical)33 C (lexical)34 B (structural)35 A (lexical)

Language practice: Reading Part 51 Vocabulary: similar meanings1A 68ZD 7D3A 8A4C 9C5 B 1OC2 Grammar: comparative formsa) 1 than

2 more3 as/so ... as4 less ... than5 much

b) 1 less friendly thanZ as oftenlmuch as3 more exciting than4 more expensive than5 more than

3 Grammar: toolverylenough; solsuch ... thata) 1 very

2 toolvery3 too4 enough5 enough

c) 1 enough money2 so good3 so noisy4 too warm5 loud enough

-tng

4a)

b)1d2e3a4c5b

trc TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY _ TEST 1

4 Vocabulary: booksa)1NF 6NF

2F 7 F3NF4NF

8NF9F

J-ř

PAPER í WritingPart íTeacher's notes. In Part 1, students have to rewÍite five sentences using

different structural patterns but retaining the samemeaning.

. The ans\ /er may require one, tvr'o or three words. Oneor tr,vo-word ansÝVers are common, and students shouldunderstand that three words will be wrong in somecases.

. The five sentences and the example are always aboutthe same topic.

o It is extremely important that grammar and spellingare completely correct in this part.

. Remind students not to forget punctuation in names,etc.

o Encourage students to v/rite straight onto the ans\lersheet if they feel confident, as this will save time andavoid copying errors. If they prefer, they can try outtheir ideas on the exam paper first.

. If students \ /ant to change something they have\ /ritten, they should cross it out tidily rather thanusing (brackets).

. Encourage students to read through and check theirwork when they have finished.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175.

Strategy1

1 five (and an example)2 a guesthouse3 comolete the second sentence so that it means the

samé as the first4 no more than three5 on the ans\ r'er sheet (but see Teacher's note above)6 only the missing words7 on the exam paper

21 It tells us that there is a games room in the guesthouse.2 Yes, it does. The first sentence uses There ls, the second

sentence uses has, but the information is the same.

31 what the guesthouse is called2 The name ... is 'Sunshine Cottage'.3 of the guesthouse

Writing Part I key'| oÍ the guesthouse2 l'vell have stayed3 told me4 must book5 as/so big as

Language practice: Writing Part 1

1 Grammar: matching patternsa) and b)2.8 = d)3.5 = a)4,9 =b)6.11 = c)10.12 = e)

needn't paygave hershould resthave/'ve never beenhasdelayedwas calleddoesn't have /hasn't gotheavieras/so interesting as

Correcting mastakesThis car isn't big enough for my family. (word order)My uncle owns that factory. (tense - the first sentenceis present simple passive)

3 There are several pleasant parks in the town. (pluralverb)

4 This is the first time l,ve visited an internet café. (tenseafter first time)

5 You needn't book a ticket for this show. (wrong verbgiving wrong meaning)

Pafi 2For a marking guide, see page 202.

Teacher's notes. In Part 2, students write a shoÍt note or e-mail' If

students are not used to e-mail, they should bereassured that as far as PET is concerned, it means thesame as a note.

. The instructions always say who they are writing to,why they are writing and what they must say.

. There are always three things they must mention to getfull marks.

. Suggest that students practise writing 35-45 words asthey lose marks if they write a very short ans\,/er -fewer than 25 words.

o Encoulage students to \^/rite straight onto the ans\MeÍsheet if they feel confident, as this will save time andavoid copying errors. If they prefer, they can try outtheir ideas on the exam paper first.

. If students \ /ant to change something they havewritten, they should cross it out tidily rather thanusing (brackets).

. Encourage students to read through and check theirwork when they have finished.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175.

Strategy1

1 an e-mail2 an English friend called Charlie3 three4 between 35 and 455 on the ans\Mer sheet (but see Teacher's note above)

c)1

L.)

456789

10

21

Z

TEACHER',S GUrDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1 IEn

2I

L

J

45

go clubbingnext SaturdayDear Charliesuggested answer: because I'm going out with my familysuggested answer: at the swimming pool on Sundayafternoon

B includes all three points and is the right lengthC is too shortA doesn't follow the instructions

4Thank you for asking me eemfug to come with you to thecity centre on Tuesday. {ry I'm sorry but I can't comebecause {ge I'm going to the dentist thi+ that afternoon.What about {rffieet meeting e* - another time? DeWould you like to go t&e on Friday afternoon?

Language practice: Writing Part 21 Grammar: Íuture plansa)1B

3BZ1 L

b) 1 arrives2 I'll have3 'm meeting4 're not going to catch5 finishes6 I'll ohone7 'm going to dol'r:rr not getting

Function: difÍerent kinds of messagesg 6 ed 7 hb 8fi 9 ca

Part 3Teacher's notesFor a marking guide, see page 202.. In Part 3, students have to choose one of two tasks:

either a letteÍ to an English-speaking friend, or a storyfor which they are given a title or the opening words.

. The instructions for the letter alwavs sav whv thevare writing and tell them what to write'aboui. It isimportant that they include everything required bythe instructions in their answer or they will lose marks.

. The subject to be written about in the letter is always ageneral one so everyone has something to say about it.Students can use their imagination as much as they like.

5B

. The story can be anything which fits the title orbeginning given. It can be an everyday incident or afantasy, provided that it is complete and fits the taskgiven.

. Students should remember to keep their story simpleso that it can be completed within the word limit. Anincomplete or very overlength story is unlikely to getfull marks.

. About 100 words = between 85 and 120 words, sostudents need not worry if they do not write exactly100. (See Exam tip!)

o They get marks for writing an appropriate ans\ /er tothe question and for using correct English.

. Students should be encouraged to make notes and a planon the exam paper, but write their answer directly on theans\ /er sheet to save time and avoid copying errors.

. If students v/ant to change something they havewritten, they should cross it out tidily rather thanusing (brackets).

. Students should be encouraged to use a range ofvocabulary and a variety of sentence structures.

. Encourage students to read through and check theirwork when they have finished.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175.

Strategy1

1 only one2 about 1003 on your answer sheet4 in the box at the toD of vour answer sheet

Strategy: letter1

1 an English penfriendZ what you like doing in your free time and whether you

stay at home or like going out3 on your answer sheet

2c)1e

2t3d4b5a6c

beginning: 1, 3, 6end:2,4, 5

2B

3B4A

(I've been at school today and it was boring. I don't likeThursdays because we do sport in the afternoon and Ihave to play volleyball. I'm not very taII, so I never getthe ball. I prefer swimming, but we don't do that.)(A few words more or less than 100 doesn't matter,but A is much too long and extra words do not gainextra marks.)(A starts with words more appropriate to the end ofa letter.)(Copying verbatim is a bad exam strategy andshould not be encouraged. Compare how B re-words part of the question and incorporates it in anatural manner You want to know what I like doing ínmy free time.)(A doesn't mention staying at home and spends toomuch time talking about school and holidays, andoossible future activities rather than what sheúsually does in her free time at present.)

31

z

21aL

.'t

45

31A

3 ExamTask

Writing Part 2Suggested answer:Dear Hannah,It's great that you're coming here on Saturday. Would you like tomeet? I can wait for you outside the bus station and show yousome of my favourite places. What time does your bus arrive?Best wishesVera

ffilZ| TEAcHER's GUrDE AND ANswER KEy - TEsr 1

1

1

Z

31

6 B (Good beginning and ending; right length; ans\ /ersthe question; no unnecessary material; goodorganisation.)

7 I don,t enjoy stay at home; There,s café in the park;On the evening.

Strategy: Story

At six o'clock in the morning, the telephone rang.On your answer sheet

A is better because it describes what happened in amore logical sequence.In B, 'Who3 that?' I srzld. should come before It was mybrother Sami, and the writer explains why his brotherv/as at the airport too late in the story. There are alsogrammatical mistakes.I told needs an object; at a party, not in; While I lwredr.tun was diving to the airport. I realised that I had f%etforsotten. He +v<+tt had pone/been lo Paris.

Language practice: Writing Part 3

1 Grammar: narrative tensesa) A lrang;ran ZfeII 3reached 5started 6walked

7 answered; wasB 4 was cryingC 2 was runníng 5 was talkingD 3 had stopped 4 had woken t had . .. forgotten;

had agreed

b) 1 was walking; saw2 had already seen3 were standing; arrived4 waited5 came; out, ;,b nao solo7 had waited; felt8 hadn't they/he told

Writing Pařt 3Suggested answers:7Dear John,In your last letter you asked me whether I ever go to concerts andwhether I collect CDs. I don't go to concerts very often becausethe town where I live is quite small, so we don't get many goodgroups here. But I do collect CDs. I like several kinds of music, forexample I like singers like Norah Jones. Do you know her? | thinkshe's American. And I also listen to my dad's old Beatles tapes.We listen to them on long journeys in the car.What about you? What kind of music do you like?Best wisheslda

8I checked that my ticket was in my bag and locked the front door.

At the airport I went to the check-in desk..This ticket is Íor yesterday.'said the man. l |ooked at it. He Was

right. Why hadn't I checked the date when I got my ticket?'What can I do?' I asked.'There may be a seat today,'he said.'But you must wait.'

I waited anxiously for twenty minutes and watched the passengerschecking in. At last the clerk told me there was one spare seat.I wi|| never Íorget to check the date on a ticket again|

PAPER 2 ListeningPart íTeacher's notes

In Part 1, there are seven recordings. For each one,there is either one speaker oÍ t\^/o.

First, students hear the instructions. They are the sameas what they read.Each recording has a question and three pictures.Students should tick the picture, A, B or C on the exampaper, which best represents the answer to thequestion.Ťhe recording for each question is repeated beforestudents hear the next recording.Students are given six minutes to check their answersand transfer them to the answer sheet at the end of theListening Test.Before attempting Question 4 of Listening strategyPart 1, it would be a good idea to revise telling thetime v/ith the class.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page L76.

Strategy

fourt\ /iceon the question papercopy yow ans\ /ers onto the answer sheetsix minutes

seventhreechoose the correct picture and put a tick in the boxbelow it

What will the boy take back to the shop?Athe box under A is ticked

the time that Paula will pick Julie upA seven twenty/twenty past sevenB seven forý/twenty to eightC eight fifteen/(a) quarter past eight

3 eight fifteen; t\^/enty past seven; tÝventy to eight.4 See key.5 That is the time Paula will leave home.6 That is the time the film starts.7 Pau|a says, I,il be at your house at twený to eight, so this

is the time she will pick Julie up.

Listening Part í key1B2 C. They wi|| get a fi|m Íirst, then go for trainers and |ast|y fÍuit.

3 B She didn't leave them on the hall table and she is going to

look for them in the car when the man finds them in thekitchen.

4 A The woman suggests Íish and chips or chicken or achicken sandwich but he chooses salad and a roll.

5 c .l0'15 is her o|d appointment. She is oÍfered 2,45 or 4'15and she chooses 4.15.

6 B There was a coach but they had to take a helicopterbecause the Íerry was cancel|ed.

7 A He didn't enjoy the Íootba|| match because they |ost andhe didn,t enjoy the Íi|m because it Wasn't as good as heexpected. He had a great time in the bookshops and musicsnoos.

o

o

1

1

Z34

2t

z.-t

31Z.'t

4I

2

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1 m;xl

Language practice: Listening Part 1

í Vocabu|ary: word setsParts of the body: neck, ankle, stomach, thumb, shoulderMoney words: cheque, credit cards, purse, wallet, coinAnimals: horse, duck, chicken, sheep, turkeySports: football, tennis, volleyball, swimming, cycling

2 Grammar: saying when things happena) 1 while

2 after3 before4 since5 during6 as soon as

b) 1 until2 since3 as soon as4 after5 before

Pant 2Teacher's notes. Part 2 usually consists of someone giving factual

information or telling a story, often about somethingthat has happened to them.. There is only one main speaker, although sometimesthere is a short introduction by another speaker, or aninterviewer asks ouestions.. The instructions áre the same on the recording and theexam paper.

o There is quite a lot to read in Part 2, so students have45 seconds to read the questions before they listen.. The questions come in the same order as theinformation on the recording.o Students should mark the answers on the exam paperand copy them onto the answer sheet later.o A beep on the recording indicates where the tapeshould be paused.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176.

Strategy1

1 six2 a woman called Vanessa3 a iournev she made4 her husband5 her baby6 put a tick in the correct box for each question7 twice

2 Suggested enswers:2,3, 4, 5

Language practice: Listening Part 21 Vocabularyt -ing and -edadjectivesa) we were getting bored

b) 1 amazing2 amazed3 surprised4 surprising5 interesting

1 to swim2 to come3 to travel4 to study5 to paint

6 interested7 tired8 tiring9 exciting

10 excited

2b)

Grammar: verbs fo||owed bv ťo + inÍinitive6 to reply7 toplay8 to tell9 to buy

10 to meet

clue = sallclue = anxious

Listening Part 2 key8 B last year we gave up our jobs and decided to sail back to

England.9 C ... was most anxious about our health, particutarty the

baby ... .

10 A I considered flying home to England11 B My father-in-Iaw Was very happy to take care oÍ the baby

while we sailed the boat.12 B he wants us to play with him all the time now13 C as long as they have plenty to do on board.

Part 3Teacher's noteso In Part 3, there is only one main speaker. Sometimes

there is also a short introduction by another speaker.. The instructions are the same on the recording and theexam paper.

o The questions may be in a list, a note or a notice.. The information comes in the right order for studentsto ansv/er the questions.

r Students do not need to understand everything theyhear, but should only listen for the ans\ /ers to thequestions as there will be words they do not know.Reassure them that they do not have to worry aboutthis, as the answers are always common words.o Students should write the ans\^r'ers on the exam paperand copy them to the answer sheet later.o A beep on the recording indicates where the tapeshould be paused.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176.

Strategy1

1 six2 Willingham is a name (probably a place). It begins with

a capital letter. (Point out to students that words withcapital letters are usually names of people or places, sothey need not v/orry if they do not recognise them.)

3 someone talking on the radio; the WillinghamMuseum

4 fill in the missing information in the numbered spacefor each question

21 A noun. In (1a) it has a and 19th-century before the

space.In (15) the answer is something vrhich could be thesubiect of an exhibition because ít says an exhibitionabout.In (17) the answer is a kind of building. The gap has abefore it.In (18) the answer is a place or a building.lthas thebefore it and it is something which can be outside thetov/n.

2 (16) a day or a date because it says o/r.3 (19) must be an adjective because it has the before and

signs (a noun) after it.

5one or tv/o (It is possible that students may need to writethree words, but this is very unusual.)

3a)b)

rm TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1

Listening Part 3 key14 streetí5 shoes16 14(th) July / July t 417 prison18 castle19 green

Language practice: Listening Part 31 Grammar: prepositions1 around 6 in2 outside 7 in3 from 8 of4 to 9 until5in 10on2 Vocabulary: compound nounsa) dining is made ftom dine + ing - dine becomes dln when

we add -ing

b) 1 driving2 swimming3 sleeping4 washing5 waiting6 frying7 writing8 walking

3 Vocabulary: places to visit1 paintings2 sculotures3 café-4 exhibition5 guided tour6 old books7 souvenirs8 gift shop

Part 4Teacher's noteso Part 4 is always a conversation between two people.

Both of them usually give their opinions aboutsomething and agree or disagree.

. The instructions are the same on the recording and theexam paper.

. The ouestions come in the same order as theinformation on the recording.

. Encourage students to read through the questionsbefore they listen to get a good idea of what they aregoing to hear.

. Students should mark the ans\ r'ers on the exam paperand copy them onto the answer sheet later.

. A beep on the recording indicates where the tapeshould be paused.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176.

Strategy1

1 six2 two3 William4 Sophie5 in a music shop6 decide if each sentence is correct

the box under A for yes or underor incorrect and tickB for no

3 Suggested answers:mother; shopping; Birmingham; band; CD; birthday

Listening Part 4 key20 B She works there. i.e. Birmingham, not in their home town21 B I get anxious about getting lost.22 A lf we had a map it wouldn't be a problem for me.

23 A -.. their music has got a lot better recently.24 B I'm going to get the one I planned to buy.25 A I really prefer surprises.

Language practice: Listening Part 4Vocabulary: words with similar meanings1 feels2 prefers3 suggests4 thinks5 is keen6 recommends7 is disappointed8 persuade

Grammar: lf sentences (unreal situations)1da^L43b4e5f6cSuggested answers:I'dlI would buy a sports car.I'dll would go to lots of parties.I'd live on an island.I'dlI would invite him/her for dinner.I'd/I would be really huppy.I,d/I would Ývear a hat all the time.

PAPER 3 SpeakingFor notes and a guide to assessment, seepage 203.

Teacher's notes. The Speaking Test is taken in pairs, although if there is

an odd number of students, the final three candidatesmay go in together.

. There are always two examiners, but only one willinteract with the students. The other will make notes.Reassure students that they should not v/orry about this.

. In Part 1 the examiner will address each studentseparately; in Parts 2-4 the students talk mainly toeach other.

o It is essential that students practise in pairs. Theexercises are designed to help students get experienceof this. It is important for students to know how to askquestions and respond to ansvr'ers, as well as being ableto give information and opinions.

o It is very sensible for students to learn useful. expressions and vocabulary, but it is not advisable for

them to pÍepale whole speeches as they will bepenalised for this.

. Candidates are assessed on their general abiliý tocommunicate. This includes pronunciation of sounds,intonation and stress. They are not assessed on theirgeneral knowledge or educational level and should bereassured about this. Students should be prepared totalk about everyday subjects in a relaxed atmosphere.They will not be expected to discuss anything outsidetheir own experience.

1

b)

2b)

c)1

2?4

6

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 1 ffi

. The sample Speaking Test is intended to illustrate theformat of the test in a realistic way. It offers only anexample of the content and scope of possible ans\ /ersand can be used as a pedagogical tool. Students shouldnot be encouraged to learn the conversations by heart,but should be aware of what to expect. It does notcontain any student errors in order that it can be usedas a model. Students should be reassured that they donot have to speak as fast as these candidates and thatthey can get very good marks even if they make somegrammatical, lexical or phonological errors. Thissample test would get full marks.

Part íTeacher's notes. Part 1 requires students to respond to questions from

the examiner about themselves.o Students will be asked to spell something.

1 Sample interviewPlay the recording of Part 1.a) The examiner might ask any of these questions, but

not all of the same student.Ir'2 r' The examiner uses the word surname but the

question means the same.3r'4t/5X6r'7r'8r'9 X The examiner asks about the previous evening10r'b) 1 the candidates' mark sheets (they will have been

given these just before they go into the exam room)2 Michael, the other examiner3 their surnames4 I'm sorry, I don't understand. Can you repeat that,

please?5 I'm at school /... and then I watched a football

match on television.

ideas.. Point out to students that the examiner may offer to

repeat the instructions and they will not be penalised ifthey say'yes'.

1 Sample interviewPlay the recording for Part 2.a) You are going to make some plans for a day out

together. Talk together about which three places you'llgo to. Decide which one you will go to first.

b) market, mall, swimming pool

2 Functions: making plansa)7r' 6 r' 11 X2X 7 r' 12 r'3r' 8 / 13 r(4X 9 r' 14 r'sr' 10 r' 15 /b)Z e

3b4a5c6ď8a

9b10b11 d12c13c14d15e

2 Spellinga)l1 lailE trtX leksl

K lkeila lkjutlu lj.u-lO laulV lvr:/W /d,rbelju:/

H leftllR lo:lA leilZ lzedlS /es/C lsitlG ldsitlJ ldseilY lwail

2 double + name of letter, e.g. double em

b) Students do not ask each other questions at this stagein the actual exam, but working in this way will givethem plený of practice and help to understand whatthey are asked by the examiner.

Pant 2Teacher's notes. In Part 2, students take paÍt in a simulated discussion.

They are asked to make and respond to suggestions,discuss different possibilities and agree or disagree.r It is not necessary for students to agree abouteverything as long as they have a sensible discussion.o They are given line drawings as a prop to give them

c)1 about 7 shall/can2 do / see 8 Let's3 sure 9 idea4 would 10 like5 about 11 Let's6 see/do

Part 3Teacher's notes. In Part 3, the students are each given a colour

photograph which they are asked to describe.

1 Describing where things are in a picturea) Suggested answers:

Picture B is probably a room in a school or a club.Picture C shows a boy and a girl watching TV.

7 tablefootball 13 rug8 cupboard 1,4 cushion9 noticeboard 15 sofa

10 curtains 16 lamp11 television12 video

2 Describing peoplea) 1 In Picture A, a boy is sitting at the table. I think

he's about 15 years old. There's a book openin front of him, but he isn't studying. He's lookingat something else. He's wearing a dark jumper.There's a lamp on the table.

2 In Picture B, a boy and a girl are playing tablefootball. The boy's on the left and he's wearing astriped sv/eater and jeans. The girl's wearing aT-shirt and shorts. There's a noticeboard on the wall.

c) In Picture C, a girl and a boy are sitting on the sofawatching TV. They're both laughing so probably they'rewatching a funny programme. There's a lamp in thecorner and a cushion on the floor.

b) 1 bookcaseZ bed3 chest of drawers4 mirror5 wardrobe6 shelf

:refil TEAcHER's curDE AND ANswER KEy - TEsr 1

4a)

b)

Sample interviewtalk about them

Carlo Annawhat kind of room it is ý ýwhat people he/she can see ý r'what the people are wearingwhere the people are in the room r'what things he/she can see r' r'his/her opinion about the things r'what the people are doing ý ýhow the people are feeling r'

Pant 4Teacher's noteso In Part 4, students are asked to respond to situations

in the photographs, to talk about likes and dislikes,experiences and give opinions.

1 Sample interviewPlay the recording of Part 4.

a) talk together about the kind of places you prefer to studyin - find out how you each like to organise your work

b) Anna: Do you prefer to study alone Carlo?Carlo: What about you?

PAPER í ReadingPart íForTeacher's notes, see Page 177.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page L74.

Strategy1

I I1VC2 what each text says3 on the ans\^řer sheet (but if students prefer, they can

mark their ans\,/ers on the exam paper and copy themwhen they have finished this Part)

21

Z

45

31

2.J

+

567

Reading Part í key1A2 B First, tell the receptionist your name, then go to the waiting

room.3 C we're staying -.. for a few days = having a break from

travelling4 A at least twenty-four hours in advance = doesn't take

bookings the same day5 A correct money = €xact amount ... in cash

Language practice: Reading Part 1

1 Grammar: time words and phrasesa) before, after, when, then, until, at present, at the

moment, in advance, later, the same day, twenty-fourhours a day, within the next two daYs

b) 1 I'm on holiday until TuesdaY.Z That film is no longer showing.3 The museum is closed for lunch, but it will be open

later.4 There,s a tram from here to the ciý centre every

fifteen minutes.5 I promise I'll reply to your request within a fortnight.6 Hárry's not here at the moment, can I take a message?7 We need to know how many people are coming to

the performance in advance.8 You must be here in time to catch the ferry.

5X6r'7r(8r'

c)1r'2r'31/4r

2a)

Vocabulary: words you see in slgns1 out of order; assistant2 urgent; reception3 discount; credit card4 on time; cancelled5 available; emergency6 arrival; responsible7 forbidden; permitted8 securiý; staff

b) Suggested answers:1 shop, station, etc.2 office3 travel agent, station, etc.4 station5 surgery6 school sports centre7 university8 airport, station, factory

on someone's computercall the cinemaLet me knowbefore they go to the cinemahe should call (= phone) the cinema, not 8o to the cinema

bin a railway Station; tickets, traínyesyes; any train afrer that = ttains later than 10.1.5noA can be used on, any train after thatB cost isn't mentionedC the message says that saver tickets can be used on

other trains

Grammar: beforel after + -ing1 You must.take a shower before using the swimming

oool.2 Please clear the table after eating a meal.3 You'll have to ask permission before using this

teleohone.4 Doň,t forget to pick up your rubbish after finishing

your picnic.5 Employees must wash their hands before preparing

a meal.6 Remember to lock the door after putting out the

rubbish.7 Passengers must buy a ticket before getting on the

train.8 Switch off your mobile before entering the theatre.

3b)

4 Vocabulary: money words1 credit card 6 correct money2 cheaper 7 exPensive3 discount 8 sell4 change 9 cost extra5 pay

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TESTS 1 AND 2 IM

3a)1

LJ4

Part 2For Teacher's notes, see pages 177-178.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

1 five2 They \ /ant to watch a film on TV.3 films4 eight5 which film would be most suitable for the five people6 on the ans\Mer sheet (Students should be advised not to

\ /rite on the answer sheet until they have answered allthe questions in case they change their minds.)

b)7

No, he likes old-fashioned ones.comediesfamous onesmusicals and thrillers

Tom's hobby is reading and he enjoys watchingfilms on TV whose stories are taken from literature.His favourite books are those by famous authors ofthe past. He reads books about the cinema too andIikes watching famous actors.Elena likes to relax by watching the latest romanticfilms on TV, especially if they make her laugh. Sheparticularly likes those which have some music inthem.Belinda enjoys \ /atching thrillers. She prefersadventures which actually happened to people inreal life, as she is interested in the lives of other people.Carol loves listening to pop music and readingmagazines about it. She doesn't mind what sort offilm she sees, if it's a new one about pop stars ortheir music.

b) yet; already; just; still; recently

c) 1 ago; still2 in/during; during/in3 already; just4 yet; later5 last month; for

3 Grammar: time expressions1 's/has been2 since she wrote3 started4 's/has just5is4 Vocabulary: word sets

b) see underlined words above

c) t headline2 websites3 movie4 contents5 director

6 Writing: an e-mail or letter about a film1 about2 keen3 prefer4 favourite5 funny6 like7 best/funniest8 when9 iust10 actors

Part 3ForTeacher's notes, see pages 178-179.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

1 ten2 advice for new students at a university3 the text on the opposite page4 if each sentence is correct or incorrect5 if the sentence is correct6 if the sentence is not correct

10

4a) 1 A,E

2EReading Part 2 key6E7 D novel written two hundred years ago8 B fall in love ... songs ... amusing parts9 F adventure film ... this actually happened

10 C music of this group ... everyone's favourite

Language practice: Reading Part 21 Vocabulary: expressions with similar meanings'lo

2c3f4d5a6e7b2 Grammar: present perfecta)1c

a^

3d4f5o6b7e

2b18c 11d 1.2

e13f20

o 1Qó'-h17i 1.4j1s

Film Music Magazine Computeractor CD article CDcamera conceÍt contents gamecinema drummer crossword kelzboarddirector guitarist headline mousemake-up kevboard photograph movremovle musician storv programscreen rock scÍeenstory software

website

IIN TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 2

3As a new student, you've arrived two days before termstarts to look around and get settled in before your coursebegins and the place fills up. Here is some information tomake all that a bit easier (we hope!).

The Student Welfare Office is normalllz open from 4 p.m.till 8 p.m. Monday to Friday. Today and tomorrow it willbe open all day, from about 9 a.m. This is the place tocome if you have any problems, for example about moneyor accommodation (we have a list of rental agencies andalso advertise any rooms which become available in theuniversiBz hostels at the end of term). We also give out theuniversitlz identitlu cards which )zou need to ioin thelibrarlz and which allow you to get discounts at a numberof local shops (including bookshops) and places ofentertainment, such as clubs and cinemas.

On Monday and Tuesday of next week, second-yearstudents will be running a book sale in the canteen from10-3. Many of the books on your first-year reading list willbe available, and we suggest you should look here firstbefore spending too much on ne\ r' books.

The universit,v canteen (open from 7.30 a.m. till 7.30 p.m.)sells hot meals fairly cheaply, as well as snacks and drinks'but it'll save you money to cook at least some of your ownmeals. There is a basic cookery course starting next week(run by students for students, so it's realllz practical). If youdon't know how to boil an egg, this is for )zou. It's alwaysfull, so get )zour name on the list in the Welfare OfficeNOWI

The sports centre is open from today. Look on thenoticeboards there for information about athletics,swimming, team games, and so on. It is also possible toLoin some local citlz clubs, such as golf or squash, at adiscount (show them your card) if you can play at areasonable level. Addresses in the sports centre office.

The Music School welcomes all members of the universitlz,whatever their main subiect of studlz' for part-time courses'Whlu not take the opportunity to start learning the guitar'violin or piano while )zou're here? Manlz advancedstudents offer reall)z cheap lessons. There are also openevenings when anlzone can take the chance to perform infront of an audience. Look out for notices advertisingtimes and dates.

Language practice: Reading Part 31 Vocabulary: student |iÍe1 rent2 welfare office3 student card4 canteen5 club6 part-time course7 full-time course8 hostel9 reading list

10 sDorts centre11 noticeboardIZ advanced

3 Grammar: adverbs of Írequency (how often?)a) Suggested answers:

always normally often sometimes rarely

I

1.0Oo/o

5b)

c)

d)Reading Part 3 key11 B you've arrived two days before term starts12 A the Student Welfare Office is normally open from 4 p.m. till

B p.m.13 B we have a list of rental agencies and also advertise any

rooms ... in the university hostels14 A to get discounts at a number of local shops (including

bookshops)15 B second-year students will be running a book sale16 B it'll save you money to cook at least some of your own meals17 A lt's always full18 B if you can ptay at a reasonable /evel (Point out that take up

= p|ay Íor the first time.)19 B start learning the guitar. (So you don't need to play

reasonably well.)20 A anyone can take the chance to pertorm

21

2.J

lll509oŤ0ozo

frequently seldom

usually<< regularlY* >>

(* You may wish to point out that this can mean at veryinfrequent, but regular, intervals.)

Grammar: relative clauses1 which2 where3 who4 which5 when

1 A group of students share this flat which Keith'sfather owns.

2 YÝe often have a paÍty at weekends when we don,thave classes.

3 Most students live in hostels where parties aren'tallowed.

4 This is my penfriend who's coming to stay nextmonth.

5 I usually study in the college library where most ofmy friends study too.

6 lt's a pity v/e have exams in the summer when theweather is very hot.

1 where2 where I3 which was4 a person/someone/somebody who5 (some) mornings when

Part 4For Teacher's notes, see Page 179.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy1

1 the text and questions2 mark the correct letter, A, B, C or D3 on your answer sheet

a lakebecause it's his favourite place for \ /atersportsthe valley was filled with water

TEACHER'S GUTDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 2 lffl

31

Z3Á

5

u/hya personinformationopinionspersuading people to visit

Reading Pařt 4 key21 A The text reports what people think all the way through.22 D she runs a shop on the edge oÍ the |ake23 C the number of visitors ... continues to increase24 B lt is a shame25 C lt mentions Watersports, the caÍé and car-parking space.

Language practice: Reading Part 41 Function: expressing attitudesIa 5czd 6b3b 7b4c 8b2 Grammar: reported speecha) The pronoun changes; the verb goes back a tense

b) 1 He said he would visit them the next day.I'11 visit you tomorrolv.

2 She said she could help us with our luggage.I can help you \ /ith lour luggage.

3 They told us thelz weren't going to leave thatevening.We aren't going to leave this evening.

4 We told them we had already locked the door.We have already locked the door.

5 I said I hadn't been there the da)z before.I wasn't here vesterdav.

c)1is2 usually work here3 I'm/l am going4 IlWe expect5 'lllwill help6 have to pay7 'II/wlII Dhone tomorrov/8 can soeák9 Your iister has

3 Grammar: patterns after reporting verbs1 should2 you like3 forget4 will not/won't5 I'm/I am sorry (that)

4 Vocabu|aÍyi geta)1d

2a3b4c

b)a)3b)1c)4d)2

c) 1 get to school2 got to the sports club3 get it back4 get any e-mails5 get out of bed6 getting off7 get alift8 get married9 get home

10 get to know

Im TEAcHER's GUTDE AND ANswER KEy -

Part 5ForTeacher's notes, see page 180.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 174.

Strategy

the text on the opposite pagethe correct word for each spaceon the ans\/er sheet (Students should be advised towrite their ans\ r'ers in the spaces in the text first, asthis will help them to grasp the overall meaning.They can transfer their answers when they have readthe whole text and checked their answers.)

B is not the ánswer because it's wrong to say went hishome. We must say went away flom.C is not the answer because removed cannot be usedwith home here.D is not the answer because it is wrong to say departedhis home. We do not use depart with home.

1

1

ZJ

41L

Reading Part 5 key26 C (lexical)27 B (structural)28 A (lexical)29 D (lexlcal)30 A (lexical)31 B (structural)32 C (structural)33 D.(structural)34 B (lexical)35 C (lexical/structural)

Language practice: Reading Part 51 Grammar: preposition or no preposition aÍter a VerbI no preposition2 no preposition3 for4 no preposition5 no preposition6 with7 off lfrom8 no preposition9at

10 no preposition

2 Grammar: words that describe how much andhow many

a) 1 afe\/2 some3a4 some; a little5 any6 much

3 Vocabulary: likelas1 like 6 likezas/as3 like 8 like4 like 9 as5 as 10as

TEST 2

b)1 of2of3-4-5of6-

4 Vocabulary: at the airporta) Suggested answers:baggage hall - This is the place where you collect yourbags when you arrive.check-in desk - This is the place where you show yourpassport and get your seat number.čustóms officer _ This is someone who checks your bagsfor illegal things.departure lounge - This is the place where people waituntil their plane is ready to leave.duty-free shop - This is the place where you can buythings without paying tax on them.flight attendant _ Thís is the person who looks afterpeople on the plane.information désk _ This is the place where you can findout the times of trains, buses, etc.passenger - This is the person who travels in a plane (orbus, train, etc.)pilot - This is someone who flies planes.šnack bar _ This is the place where you can buysandwiches, drinks, etc.

c) Suggested answer:... go to the snack bar for a drink. Then you go to'th€duiy-free shop and then to the departure fo-ung9. Whenyou arrive, you go to the baggage hall and finally you goto the information desk.

5 Vocabulary: words that go togethera) cash some traveller's cheques

cross the borderfasten your seat beltmíss the flightpack your suitcasereach your destinationreserve a seat

b) 1 crossed the border2 cash some traveller's cheques3 reserve a seat4 pack your suitcase5 fasten your seat belt6 reach your destination

PAPER í WritingPart íForTeacher's notes, see Page 181.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175.

Strategy1

1 five (and an examPle)2 a cinema3 complete the second sentence so that it means the

same as the first4 up to threes oň ttre ans\Mel sheet (but students can try out their

ideas on the exam PaPer first)only the missing wordson the exam paper

It is near the shoPPing mall.yes

when it openedThe cinema ... here for two Yearshas been

Writing Part í keyt has been2 are3 more expenstve4 saw5 should

Language practice: Writing Part 1

1 Grammar: matching Patternsa) 2,5

3,104,r1.6,98,72

b)abcde

21

Z3

4

4,Lr)<6,93,108,I2

1 under(neath) mine 6 unless2 arc looking for 7 favourite3 don't you 8 eat4 too dirý to 9 far from5 open 10 haven't got any

Correcting mistakesMy flat is smaller than Yours.My brother belongs to the tennis club..!Ýhy don,t you come swimming with me?' suggestedmy sister.You can't get a table if you don't book.I prefer modern shops to old ones.

Pant 2For Teacher's notes, see Page 181.

For a marking guide, see Page 202.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175-

Strategy1

1 a note2 a friend called Eva3 three4 between 35 and 455 on the answer sheet

your rucksacktwo weeks agoHi EvaReturn your rucksackSuggested answer: because you want to use it thisweekend

31 B is the best ans\^řer because it includes all three points

and is the right length.2 A doesn't follow the instructions.

C has misunderstood the question.

4a) Do you remember camping in Wales last year? Would

you like to come to Ireland with me next month? Myexams finish in two weeks and my cousins haveinvited me to go with them. We can use my brother'stent because he doesn't need it.

c)

21

L

345

67

21

L

31aL

3

TEAcHER's GUIDE AND ANsWER KEY - TEST 2 IE{ír

Language practice: Writing part 21 Grammar: possessivesa) 1 Students is plural, slsfer is singular.

2 Children is plural.3 It is irregular (compare people, sheep:).

b) 1 I have two brothers and two sisters - my brothers'school is near our house, but my sisterst school isthree kilometres awav.

2 I looked through ail Íhe vřomen,s clothes in theshop, but there was nothing suitable.

3 I tried not to laugh when I saw Jane,s new hairsýle.4 !"1 friend,s' parents all agreed that the party shouldfinish at eleven.

5 I don't like borrowing other people's clothes.

2 Grammar: verbs followed by -ing or infinitive1 to learn2 to arrive3 to phone4 driving5 to buy6 to tidy7 talking8 applying9 to know

10 leaving

Writing Pafi 2Suggested answer:Dear SaskiaI'm very pleased you're coming here next Sunday. you'll meet myparents and my sister Nellie. We'll all have a barbecue lunchtogether. What would you like to do in the afternoon? We could ooto the swimming pool, if you like.LOVE,

Angie

Part 3ForTeacher's notes, see page 182.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 175.

Strategy: letter1

1 an English-speaking friend2 your new home3 on the answer sheet

B. Although both letters are the right length and coverthe content, the language in B is more acřurate.A has eight grammatical errors.Dear MarcoThanks for your letter. You \ /ant to know what thenew flat is like. Well, I love it! It,s in a block of flatsnear ef the ciý centre, but it,s in a quiet street. It,snot so small as our old one, so I don,t have to sharea room with my brother. I've got plenty of space formy computer. I painted my Íoom before we moved in.But the best thing about this flat is the balconv. It'sreally big and we have breakfast there every mbrning.I hope you'll come and see it soon.AII the bestAlex

Language practice: Writing Part 31 Vocabu|ary: describing houses and Í|ats1 window2 first floor3 garage4 ground floor5 path6 front door7 gate8 hedge9 basement

10 balcony

Strategy: story1

1 The surprise2 on your answer sheet

31 B is the best ans\ r'er.2 Alras five grammar mistakes. It also has too many

short simple sentences.3 I knew a boy called Timmy. He used to stealing things

from shops. He had lots of money. Nobody hkéd hiň.He told his friends he stole things. They weren,tinterested i*.One day he was taIking to some other boys in a café.A young man came in. He sat at the same table. Hesaid to Tlmmy, 'I don't believe you really steal things.,Timmy showed him. a CD. He,d stolen the CD that-morning. 'Do you believe me now?,he asked.'Yes,' said the young man. 'I'm arresting you. I,m apoliceman'.Timmy v/as very surprised. He didn,t know what to say.

Language practice: Writing part 31 lmproving your story: using linking words1 who2 Although3 but4 when5 and6 which7so8 that

!mproving your story: adding information1c2b3a4esdSuggested answers:1 was at the top of an old house.2 he was on holiday in Brazil.3 very loudly4 everyone had a good time.5 tells lots of funny stories.

2a)

31

ZJ

b)

ffnf TEAcHER's cutDE AND ANSWER KEy _ TEsr 2

Writing Part 3Suggested answers:7Dear Jacob,You want to know about my cousins'home? Well, they live in a flat

near the sea. |t's great because it's on|y five minutes Írom the

harbour. My uncle has a sailing boat which my cousins and I canuse. Sai|ing is quite hard Work' but we have a |ot oÍ fun. We a|so go

swimming, but not in the harbour because the Water is rďher dirty.

We cycle to a little bay outside the town. The town is quite old and it's

popular with tourists. Perhaps you'll come there with me one year.

Best wishesFred

ILast year l was i|| Íor two months. I didn't fee| very bad, but I Was

always tired and sometimes I felt depressed. One day my brothercame home With a |arge cardboaÍd box. There Were some ho|es in

the top oÍ it. .This is Íor you,'he said.I couldn't guess what was inside. He put the box on my bed. I

realised that there was an animal in it. lt was a little cat. I decidedto ca|| her Mil|y. I cou|d p|ay With her a|l day and | Íe|t quite happy.

I soon got better aÍter she aÍrived.

PAPER 2 ListeningPart íFor Teacher's notes, see page 183.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page L76.

Strategy1

1 four2 twice3 on the question paper4 copy your ans\ /ers onto the ansrver sheet.5 six minutes

5 A Her aunt is coming and she's bringing the girl's twin

cousins - they're six. The girl says: My uncle has to staybehind because he has to work and Joe, their teenageson, has decided to stay with him, so they aren't coming.

6 B |t was sunny when they |eÍt home, but c|oudy on theholiday. lt didn't rain and had been foggy the week before,but not while they were there.

7 A The desk is now under the little window opposite, notbehind the door. lt used to be behind the door and shetried it under the big window, but it was too sunny.

Language practice: Listening Part 1

1 Vocabulary: weatherSuggested answers:1 It's snowing.2 It's windy.3 It's cloudy.4 lt's raining./It's damp./It's wet.5 It's freezing. / It's frosty. / It's icy.6 It's misty./It's foggy.7 lt'sicy. lIt's freezing./It's frosty.8 It's sunny.

2 Functions: giving and understanding directionsa) 1 library

2 theatre

3 Vocabulary: clothesa) Suggested answers:

b) Suggested answers:I zrp2 pockets3 leather4 belt

Pant 2For Teacheř's notes, see page 184.

A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176-

Strategy1

1 six2 a tour guide3 a group of tourists4 a coach trip5 put a tick in the correct box for each question6 twice

21

zseventhreechoose the correct picture and put a tick in the boxbelow it

What will the boy take back to the shop?

the box under A is ticked

where they will meetA library B swimming pool C caféall of themSee key.It is where the woman is going.It is near the café.The woman says When you've parked the car, I'Il see youin the café, so this is where they will meet.

Listening Part I Key1C2 C She is |ooking Íor a coat with a wide belt, large co||ar and

two big pockets on the front.3 B The photo is oÍ the vi||age Írom the top of the mountain

before they reached the Íorest. He took Some of the sea,but they were no good.

4 C The boy says: Iake the first turning on the right, thenthe second turning on the left. My flat is just before theroundabout on the right.

31

L.')

41

234567

skirt coat iacket dress shirt bootsbelt belt belt belt

V-necksilk silk silk silk silkknee-length

knee-lensth

knee-lensth

knee-length

knee-lensth

oockets Dockets pockets pockets Docketscollar collar collar co1lar

shortsleeves

shortsleeves

shortsleeves

buttons buttons buttons buttons buttonszip ziD ZID zrp zlp

roundneck

roundneck

leather leather leather leatherhighheels

sleeveless sleeveless

wool wool wool wool woolcotton cotton cotton cotton cotton

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY _ TEST 2 Wx

Listening Part 2 key8 c But today' because we have a lot oÍ children here this

week, we?e also going to a wildlife park.9 A In the next valley we'll have a break for coffee. There's a

café near a beautiful waterŤall.10 B it's the university that made the town famous11 A we'll see lions in the park12 B we'll return to the hotel at a quarter to seven13 c iÍ anyone Wants to ask any questions, l,ll try to answer them

Language practice: Listening Part 2

2The following should be ticked:1 They will come back to the hotel in the early evening.2 They will visit a to\ /n.4 Something about the trip has changed.6 They will stop in the countryside for a drink.7 They will visit a wildlife park.

1 Grammar: possessives1 neighbour of mine2 of my brother's3 of mine4 student of hers5 cousin of theirs6 of Sally's

2 Grammar: reported questionsb) 1 when the match starts

2 what the time is3 how far it is to the cinema4 if Paula is busy tonight5 where the nearest bus stop is6 if they are coming to the cinema

c) 1 do you live2 Can we sit3 will4 Are there5 does Clare6 didn't you phone

3 Vocabulary: the environment1D2CJ-1{4B5C6B

Part 3For Teacher's notes, see page 184.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176.

Strategy1

1 sixZ awoman talking on the radio about a competition3 fill in the missing information in the numbered space

for each question

a word which describes pinter (14) (Remind studentsthat this could be a noun or an adjective, e.g. \/e cansay a new printer (adlective) or a colour printer (noun).);a word which describes a story Q6).a numbera time or place because it says takes place ina noun because it is the last thing in a list of nounsa day or date

one or two (It is possible that students may need towrite three words, but this is very unusual.)

Listening Part 3 key14 colour15 I ,50016 crime17 the Íutureí8 age19 B(th) March

Language practice: Listening Part 3

1 Writing dates and numbersa) a date - Question 19

a number - Question 15

b) (You can write dates in different ways. British Englishusually puts the day first, whereas American Englishnormally puts the month first.)Suggested answers:1 21(st) February ZOOZ I February ZfGr 2OOz2 Wednesday Z(nd) March 2005 I Wednesday March

2(nd) 2OO53 4(th) September 2OO9 I September 4(th) 20094 Thursday 19(th) April 2OZO lThursday April 19(th)

20zo

c) 1 seven and a ouarter2 one third / a thirO3 first4 second5 third6 fourth7 seventy-five per cent8 nought point three five9 one thousand five hundred and eighty

10 two hundred thousand

2 Grammar: expressions oÍ purposea)1c 4 e

2f 5a3b 6d

3 Vocabulary: computer words

keyboard, mouse, internet, speaker, printer, software,e-mail, screen

1 internet2 software3 speaker4 mouse5 e-mail

21

zJ+

K T /ý F E S U o M GB E N M A o X c V FV N Y K U F o e RG R J BIU T N R ýý EM E ErO /ý E E R K/ý T M T J A E F T AE N C A IF R R c H ER V YI E c D N PN A J T D L S z B SL B E TN R P I P

rem TEAcHER's GUTDE AND ANswER KEy - TEST 2

Pant 4ForTeacher's notes, see page 185.A photocopiable answer sheet is on page 176.

Strategy1

1 six2 two3 Marcus4 Cora5 They work in the same office.6 decide if each statement is correct or incorrect and tick

the box under A for yes or under B for no

3Suggested dnswers:late; traffic lams; cycling; buses; tomorrow; lazy(These words give the students the idea that theconversation is about different ways of travelling to workand why people use one method of transport or another.)

Listening Part 4 key20 A Only a few minutes today. But you?e never exactly early,

are you?21 A But that's where you're wrong. It's the cars that make

traffic jams.22 B I just don't accept that.23 B employers should pay part of people's bus fares.

He doesn't say they should provide buses.24 B tomorrow's my day off25 A I sometimes wonder how you manage to get out of bed in

the mornings!

Language practice: Listening Part 4Functions: agreeing and disagreeingZD4A5D6D7D8A

2 Vocabulary: traÍÍic prob|ems1 car park2 traffic lights; pedestrians3 motorway; speed limit4 traffic iam5 petrol6 Davement/ tunnel

PAPER 3 SpeakingForTeacher's notes, see pages 185-186.

For notes and a guide to assessment, seepage 203.

Part íForTeacher's notes, see page 186.

1 Giving personal inÍormationa)1b 5 CZh 6e

3d 7a4f 8c

b) 1 No (complete sentences would be unnatural)2 aandd

2 Vocabulary and pronunciation: school subjectsb) pltysics, environmental science, geography, history,

philosophy, music, computing, religion, modernlanguages, Iiterature

Pant 2ForTeacher's notes, see page 186.

2 Functions: choosing a presenta)1a

2c3a4b5 a/b6 blc

kind / sortsureideabecause / asmight/maygoingaboutbetter

Part 3ForTeacher's notes, see page 186,

2 Describing photosa)B

Part 4For Teacher's notes, see page 187.

1 Talking about your own or other people'sexperiences

1c2e3a4b5d2 Ta|king about some oÍ the peopIe in a groupa) 1 All of

2 Two of3 Both of4 One of5 None of6 All of

b)1z54

678

1

a)

TEACHER',S GUrDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 2 xxE

't

234

Photocopiable answer sheets are on pages 774-776.

ReadingPart í

B you'd be back = arrive homeA to be left at reception = give ... to the receptionistC exchange goods = change thingsB having her computer repaired = someone is doing it

for her, so she won't get e-mailsC every 75 minutes = regularly

Pant 26 F one-, two- or three-month courses; lanuary; improve

particular language skills7 H duríng the morning; three weeks; minimum age

eighteen; all levels8 A up to age sixteen; learning fun and safe; a month;

many ... acťjvities9 C aimed at beginners; English to buy tickets ... make new

friends: ts,vo weeks10 D three-month courses preparing for a certificate

Part 3A St Michael's little sister, St MargaretA in 1960 the last person left ... in 1991 two families

moved backB Three miles across the water ftom the town of Blascott

lies the group ctf islands; restaurants in BlascottB range of perfumes made flom the wíld flowersB the same path which continues to clímb to the highest

pointA Priory Beach ... is safe for swimming; Sandtop Bay ...

swimming is not advised hereB boat trips which depart flom Blascott harbour in

summet Monday-FridayA The charge for landingA The crossíng takes thirý minutesB Before you set off ... visit the exhibition centre

Part 421 A He describes the situation in the whole text and we

know it is a problem because he asks: How can Ishow ... without causing a family quarel?

22 B The text says: '... with my grandparents ... a fewaunts and uncles'.

C I was happy to have a friend in a strange place.A she can't behave so badly towards meB The writer of the answer doesn't know James

flames introduces himself at the beginning of thetext, so this must be a letter to a magazine). A andC would have to come from one of his friends. D isincorrect because James's relatives aren'tquarrelling, it is onlyJames and his cousin Sophie.

Part 526 A (lexical)27 C (lexical/structural)28 B (structural)29 C (lexical)30 D (structural)31 A (lexical)32 B (structural)33 D (lexical)

XEW TEAcHER'S GUIDE AND ANsWER KEY

34 C (lexical)35 B (structural)

Total reading marks = 35These marks are weighted to 25.

WritingPart ít had2 do you want3 his own4 can't afford5 good at

Pant 2For a marking guide, see page 2O2.6Sample dnswer:HiJimmyThanks for the great T-shirt. I really like it. Where did you getit? I'm going to wear it when I go clubbing at the weekend.Evervone will be so iealous!All the bestPietro

Part 3For a marking guide, see page 2O2.7Sample answer 7:I went to Tenerife with my parents and my brother. It's anisland in the Atlantic. The weather is warm and sunny thereand it's very popular with people from northern Europe. Mybrother and I swam every day and played tennis. We also\ďent on a tour of the island \^rith my parents. In the evenings\ /e \ /ent to the disco in our hotel. The hotel was very big,with lots of sports facilities and two swimming pools. I shareda room with my brother. We had a view of the sea. It was agreat holiday. Wouldn,t you like to go theÍe one day?Best wishes,Kurt

Sample answer 2:I went camping with some friends from my English class.We went to a village near the sea. We had three tents forseven people. Luckily one tent was quite big. The place\ /as very pretty, but the weather \ /as not very good. It wascloudy on several days and sometimes it rained. But wehad a good time in spite of the weather. We did somewalking and on two days \ /e \ /ent diving with a local club.It was very exciting. There was an old ship under the waterthat we could exolore.Was your holidaý good? Write soon.LoveBettina

8Sample answer 1:Last Wednesday started really badly for me. I woke up lateand I had to leave the house without any breakfast. Atschool, I realised I had forgotten my books, so I ran homebet\/een lessons to fetch them. I \r'as one minute late forthe next lesson.The teacher asked me why I was late and I explained. Hewas surprised because he knows where I live. 'lf you can runthat fast, you should come and play football on Saturday.'I did, and I was amazed when he offered me a place onthe team.So Wednesday was a lucky day for me!

- TEST 3

11't2

13

1415

16

'17

181920

232425

Sample answer 2:My lucky day was a few weeks ago. I needed 50 euros tobuy a new CD player, but I had saved only 40. I decided togo to the city centre to find a cheaper one. The tram costs3 euros, but there was a problem with the ticket machine.I got on the tram, but I didn't have to pay. Then I \ /ent tothe music store and saw that the CD player I wanted wascheaper than before, only 37 euros. So I was able to buy it,and I had enough money for the tram home.

Total writing marks = 25

ListeningPart í1 B Her house has bushes and flowers, no tree (that is

next door) and the bus stop is on the other side ofthe road.

B There is a huge queue of cars at the roundabout.C He says, the plates I've bought for them. The other

things are what he suggests the woman should get.A He says, on foot. He complains because he couldn't

get a bus or taxi.B He says I've hurt my knee.A He says Her hair's white now and she doesn't wear

gLasses any lnore.B She has put all the information at the bottom; she's

forgotten to put the name of the school at the top;she chose the drawing of the violin.

Part 28 A 1 was ct typicdl student, passed enough exams and

so on.I had to do a year's business course first.I learnt a lot there ... by watching people, I realisedwhat you can and can,t do with different ýpes of cloth,I slayed al home until I won a prize.I went on to spend three wonderfttl years in Milan.I was too far away from my family.

two weeks4 B bring it to your house = return it5 A serve yourself = do your photocopying; on way out =

when you leave

Part 26 H amusing novel; a famous fashion house; written by a

former model; the modem fashion world's secrets7 C autobiography ofthe internatíonal gymnastics star8 D beautifully written; Iively descriptions of some of the

great cities (of Europe) and their inhabitants, past andpresent.

9 G fast-moving adventure story, set in anof international football stars

imagined world

Photocopiable answer sheets are on pages 174-^l'76.

ReadingPart í

A if they're closed = even when the shop is closedB you are given = freeC lost properT = things people have lost; left here

after two weeks = we keep ... for a maximum of

10 A nineteenth century; won the hearts of young men;..-dresses, the beautiful rooms ... world of palaces andgardens

Part 3

tickets vou can buvA Ruby b,eing the most basicB if ... Taz have no hotels, then we will find other ...

accommodation ... in exchange for your Taz tickets.B Later the scenery becomes even tnore amazingB a half-day cruise (i.e. in a boat) ... Then ... a leisurely

driveA from where there are wonderful views of the mountaín

itself

1

Z

silk

23

4

56

7

1516

1718

9B10B

11 C12C134

11 A light traffic'12 B seruices may only run once daily.13 B it should not be too difficult to arrange things as you go14 B There is no maximum or minimum number of hotel

Part 314 fírst floor15 map16 fountain17 lifts18 a quarter past t\/o I Z.I5 I 74.15 I 2.15 p.m.19 Whitmarsh

Part 4

19

2042't B

under the big oak tree in the garden today as it's too hotinside.Miss Hayes ... says my voice isn't loud enough ... she'snot giving me another chance.You've got a louder voice than most of the other people.It won't helo.You can't p?rsuade me ... I'm going to offer to do thescenery instead.

25 A They're still looking pr someone to do that. i'e. thesceneÍy.

Total listening marks = 25

SpeakingFor assessment and marking guide, see page 203.

2O A Retum to the airPort

Part 421 D The text mentions his general behaviour, but does

not describe his business methods. However, at theend, it does suggest what he will do next inbusiness, i.e. take over another company.

22 B a colleague from his paper = a iournalist. Thecolleague was female (her).

23 D The waiter had heard of Parrish, but he didn'trecognise him.

24 A The writer says ofcourse because he agrees thatParrish doesn't look like the owner of one of theworld's most successful computer companies.

25 C This headline summarises the writer's idea aboutParrish's future.

228238248

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TESTS 3 AND 4 XS'W

Part 526 B (structural)27 C (structural)28 C (lexical)29 A 0exical)30 D (lexical)3í B (structural.)32 C (lexical)33 A (structural/lexical)34 B (structural)35 C ílexical)

Total reading marks = 35These marks are \ /eighted to 25.

WritingPart í1 moved (in)2 to live3 We don't4 bought them5 don't have /need

Pant 2For a marking guide, see page 202.Sample answer:Dear LeoThanks very much for asking me to come to the matchwith you on Saturday. I'm really looking forward to it. I'msure it'll be exciting. Would you like to come back to myhouse for a meal afterwards?Hossein

Part 3For a marking guide, see page 202.7Samole answer 7:I am sixteen and I go to school here in Bern. I am studyinga lot of different subjects, but my favourites are languagesand biology.In my free time I like to go swimming, and of courseskiing in the winter. I'm also keen on reading, especiallydetective novels. When I have time, I like to look aroundthe shops with my friends because we enjoy trying on newclothes.I'm looking forward to coming to England and meetingyou all. I hope I'll be able to visit some different cities inEngland, including London.Thank you for inviting me.Yours sincerelv.Ursula Haupt

Sample answer 2:It's very kind of you to invite me to stay with you. Isuppose you'd like to know something about me. I'mnineteen and I live and work in Malaga. I'm one of thereceptionists at a hotel. I meet lots of English tourists,so I'm looking forward to seeing England.In my free time I do \^/ateÍspolts and I go horse-riding.I enjoy playing the guitar and singing, too.I'd like to try some real English food while I'm in England.I'd also be interested to visit some famous historical places,such as Stonehenge, if that's possible.Is there anything special I can bring you from SpainTWith best wishes,Miguel

8Sample enswer:Children were afraid of our neighbour Jordan Jenkinsbecause he never spoke, but my mother said he was lonelyand she sometimes invited him to dinner.One week, my homework was to find out about theSecond World War.'AskJordan,' said my mother. 'He was a soldier.'At first I was frightened, but in the end I went to see him.We had a very interesting conversation. He showed mephotos and let me try on his aÍmy cap and helped me towrite my homework. I realised that he was shy, notunfriendly. Now we're friends and I often visit him.

Total writing marks = 25

ListeningPart í

B what I always wanted fo, i.e. to be a nurseC I'lI wait for you by the bus stationA Take the second turning on the right. The car park is on

the left-hand side.A Brian will be twentv vears old on the 15th.C He onty had two chiidien then.B this plain one that I,m wearíngC He,s |ust got off the train and is stíll on the

platform. He,ll go to the café soon.

Pant 28 C This year we're looking for the best singer9 B you must live within ftve miles of the ciý centre.

10 C you need to contact the theatre group/s secretary11 A 10.30 p.m. instead of 9'12 B there will be no charge for swimmers for the whole of

the first week13 B all four of them now live here

Part 314 4ZO,OO0'l5 bridges16 (modern) offices17 bread18 (art) gallery19 Saturday(s)

Part 420 B She has too much college work, she was listening

to music while she studied.A It was loud enough for me to be able to listen to itB Kim didn't have visitors, Rob thought she had.

I was feeling sorry for mysetf i.e. he ňas feeling sad.A I like something quiet in the backgroundA She says the traffic noise disturbs her if it's too

quiet.B ťm useless in the mornings i.e. she can't work then.

Total listening marks = 25

SpeakingFor a guide to assessment and marking, see page 2O3.

1

23

4567

2122

2324

25

XsffiX TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 4

Photocopiable answer sheets are on pages 1.74-176.

ReadingPart í1 C students arriving /aťe = students who are |.ate; must

sign ... before going = should not go ... before signing2 C exams are over = after their exams; what about trying

= suggests going toA collecting my things = bring her clothes homeB keep children off= children must not climb onC passengers for international flights = if you (people)

are going abroad

Pant 26 B artists who all live (i.e. they are painting nowadays);

the café is open for lunch; the excellent bookshop7 D It has jewellery, etc. produced in Kington (= locally)

and it is open until 9 p.m.8 F during the twentieth century = over the last hundred

yeaÍs; open every day9 G This is a rebuilt village which you can walk around,

so it is outdoors. The children can learn about lífe500 years ago and there is a playground.

10 E a separate room for each century, i.e. the museumcontains paintings from past centuries (includingover the last 300 years). It's open in the afternoonand there is a coffee shop.

Part 31 1 A a full cooked breakfast at no extra charge12 B Last orders are taken at 9 p.m., but the dining room

wíll be open after that for people to finish their meals'13 B The Coffee Shop opens at 10 a.m., but the

swimming pool is open from 7 p.m..14 B Newspapers can be ordered at reception, but they

are put in the dining room before you havebreakfast.You can ask for a key and let yourself in.For calls outside, dial 9Children must be with an adult, there are no staffavailable for thís.after 1.30 p.m. every dayCash ... can be locked awayThis is not mentioned.

4The first t\ /o paragraphs explain the situation andin the third, the writer says that Jane has a problem.a successful business with regular customersshe wasn't told that the flIm is about a restaurantwhere everything goes wrong and the pod is disgusting.The best solution ... is for her to contact the newspapers.The film is a comedy and it was filmed ín aLondon restaurant. It doesn't claim to be the truthand it will not teach you to cook.

Part 5A (structural)C (structural)B (structural)C (lexical)D (lexical)B (lexical)

A (structural)C (lexical)D (lexical/structural)A (lexical)

Total reading marks = 35These marks are \/eighted to 25.

WritingPart ít has2 as good as3 better/more than4 use5 can

Part 2For a marking guide, see page 2O2.Samole answer:Deai SelinaI'm so sorry I didn't get to the cinema on time yesterday.There was an accident on the main road and terrible trafficjams everl'where. I hope you aren't too angry with me.What about meeting next Saturday?Love,Tanya

Part 3For a marking guide, see page 202.7SamDIe answer 1:Deai AnnabelIt \ /as my friend Bobby's 21st birthday. His parents hireda room in a hotel and paid for a disco. I danced for fourhours! I took Bobby a cowboy hat as a present. It's a realone I bought in America. I guess he liked it because hewore it all evening.There were about 60 people there. I knew most of themand they all seemed to enjoy themselves very much. I metone girl who I really liked. I'm going to see her again nextweekend.In my opinion, it was a great party.All the best,Simon

Sample answer 2:Dear AnnabelYou wanted to know about my friend Luisa's birthday.We listened to some music and then we watched a video.The music \ /as great. It was a CD Luisa got for herbirthday, but the film was very silly. Luisa's older sisterMartina was there and Martina's boyfriend and four otherfriends. I hadn't met Martina before. She's very pretty, andher boyfriend told some good jokes. They are both atuniversity and they talked about that. We all had a goodtime. I took Luisa some expensive handcream and soap.She said she really liked it. Write back soon.Love fromCarla

ISamole onswer:I had iust finished getting dressed when the doorbell rang.I ran downstairs and got into the taxi. The driver took meto the television company's offices.'I'm here for the music competition,' I told the receptionist.I was taken to a waiting room. There were several otherpeople there, some of them had musical instruments.

32333435

345

Part21 C

15416B17R

18419420B

22423B

24D25D

262728293031

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY _ TEST 5 Wry

We could hear a singer in the studio next door. I was sonervous that I was shaking.At last it was time for me to oerform.I sang well, but I wasn't good enough to win. However,I made some neu/ friends while I was lvaiting and we'vestarted our o\,\in band. One day we,ll be famóus.

Total writing marks = 25

ListeningPart í1 A tltey've only got one singer; The guitarist and the

clrummer2 C She says the four blocks are close togetheÍ, but hers

is much taller, and she says the main road is noproblem.

3 A And you,d betÍer look in that pile of magazines by thebin. I'm going to throw them away. Yes! I asked youjust in time.

4 B This is how he looks now. hasn't got much hair andit's grey ... beard ... weqrs glasses

5 A She says tvvo letters and a postcard but only one ofthe letters is for the man and there's also a oarcel

6 C It was due at 9.2O and it is now 9.35, which- is whythe woman is making enquiries. It is expected at10.55, but the woman guesses she won't leave untillater than that.

7 C He was going to babysit, but he didn't have to, andhe had already done his homework earlier.

Part 2C a boys' subjectC I've spent the past couple of monthsB my original plan was to use it in my bedroomA ifyou aren't very strong, the power of electric tools can

be a real helo.A don,t expect to make anything very big or dífficult for

the Í1rst few monthsB begin with a list of everything that's going to be

necessary

Part 314 26(th) October15 blue16 (top) hairdresser17 shoes18 (a) computer19 (the) cinema

2B3C4A5B

I9

1011

12

13

11 B12813414B

16417418B

19B204

Part20B

4my uncle and aunt are goíng ... and they,ve asked meto go wíth them. They don,t live there.It's a really brilliant place for a trip, I've heard.They don't insist, although they really want him tospend his holiday with them.he's out at work all year, i.e. away from the houseisn't keen on planesWhat about my uncle and aunt's trip? If you came, it'dbe even better.

Total listening marks = 25

21 A22823B244254

SpeakingFor assessment and marking guide, see page 2O3.

Photocopiable answer sheets are on pages 774-176.

ReadingPart í1 A ring when you get to your hotel = Angus \^/ants Jen to

telephone him from her hotelDo not use... before reading = read before usingbefore moving house = to their new home; unwantedfurniture = don't \ /ant to take all their furniturecash only = you cannot pay with a credit cardwhere have you put them = is asking her motherwhere her jeans are

Part 26 D in the centre of this great ciý; one or two months this

summer; magazine journalism7 E mid-luly to September;, four girls aged three to eleven

baby boy; one month in France8 G answer phone and e-mail enquíries, check application

forms and occasionally show new visitors round;evening; until end of summer

9 C Slx days per week (any day off by at'rangement exceptFridays). Hours from 2 p.m. tiU 10 p.m. or from 6 a.m.tíll 2 p.m.; accommodation available if required

10 B in Southem Europe and Scandinavia; Excellent rates ofpay (extra for foreign language speakers); Minimum sixweeks, starting míd |uly,

Part 3

15B

there are a few true storiesthe wife of a man who was made to join the armyjoined the army .... it was thirteen years before shefound himdoctors were operating on her for an injury she hadreceived while fightingit's not certain why she left Ireland ... and went to theislands... when she got there she fell in loveshe worked with lohn to steal a shipa boy they had taken off another ship ... was Mary ReedMary had fought in the army but had stoppedpretending to be a man .. . when she marriedthe men were taken pňsoner but they avoided punishmentNobody knows what happened to them

Part 421 C The writer discusses what Antarctica is like for him

- his aim isn't to persuade other people to go there,to complain (he says he is lucky) or to suggest ÝVaysof improving life there

22 A So the hardest thing to get used to is that there are nowjust fourteen of us because I'm used to working in alarge company.

23 C Ten years ago, we were able to send faxes to friends andfamily once a month but today we can send e-mailsand talk on the phone so we don't feel so far away.

24 B We were joined together by a rope all the time in casewe fell into any holes in the ice. They're too deep toclimb out of.

25 C I was remínded how lucky I am to be here. Soon we willget amazing sunsets too. A is \l/Íong because he'sbeen there before. B is wrong because he's workedhard. D is wrong because he's only been there threemonths.

areNx TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY _ TESTS 5 AND 6

Part 526 B (structural)27 C (lexical)28 D (lexical)29 C (structural)30 A (structural)31 D (lexical)32 C (lexical/structural)33 A 0exical)34 C (structural)35 C (lexical/structural)

Total reading marks = 25

WritingPart í1 discovered2 joining3 better4 are all brilliant5 too much

Part 2For a marking guide, see page 2O2.Sample answer:Dear LeeI'm going to the party next week by bus. Why don't we gotogether? We can meet at the bus stop near my flat. Haveyou decided what present to take? I can't decide. Have yougot any ideas?

Part 3For a marking guide, see page 202.7Sample answer 1:I always go shopping on Saturdays. I get up late, then I

meet my friends in the town centre. Sometimes \ /e go toa café first, then we look at all the shops in the shoppingcentre. I like buying clothes best, but I also look for CDs.Sometimes there are sales. I'm happy then because I don'thave much money to spend. There are lots of differentshops in my toÝVn selling everything you need. We haveplenty of good clothes shops, but there aren't many goodshops for buying shoes.

Samole answer 2:I livě in a village which has only three shops _ a baker,s,a butcher's and a very small supermarket. I sometimes dothe shopping for my mother there. At the weekend I oftencatch the bus with my friends to the to" /n and we spendthe day there because there are lots of shops. A lot of themsell food, but we like looking at the sports shops. WhenI have some money, I like to buy sports equipment andtrainers. I sometimes buy CDs or clothes, but the clothesin my favourite shop are very expensive.

ISample answer:I got off the train and waved to my brother, who waswaiting on the platform. He called to me. 'Hurry'hesaid 'l've come in the car so \ /e can get home quickly.'I couldn't understand why he wanted to hurry becauseI was looking forward to having a rest at home. 'Why dowe need to hurry?' I asked. But he didn't tell me. When\^/e Ývent into the flat I noticed several suitcases in the hall.Then my mother told me. She had \r'on a holiday in

Greece in a radio competition. She told me not to unpackbecause there was no time. So instead of relaxing at home,I had a lovely holiday on the beach in Greece.

Total writing marks = 25

ListeningPart í1 A She's teaching herself the keyboard. Her violin

teacher moved away, and her brother is looking fora drummer.

2 B How about a book about painting? She's just startedsome art classes; I think my idea was best. She doesn'twant to borow her mum's books aII the time

C On Sunday it wiII be cloudy. It won't rain until MondayC see if I left my wallet in your houseA could you go out and get a lettuce; get some mushroomsC you won't be able to play tennis todayB but aren't the sleeves a bit long - only the blouse has

sleeves

Part 28 B the game didn't actually go on sale until the day after

my thirteenth birthdayC None of them let me show them the game.B Then we talked to my grandmother and my great aunt

who are quite rich. They were happy to lend us enoughto make the first thousand games.

C I was watching my sisters playing one day and I got theidea from them.

A 'Then betvveen ten and tvvelve, they enjoy games basedon knowledge - quizzes and things like that.

B I'd like to learn how to run a business so that's whatI'Il study at college.

Part 314 21015 Black / black16 guide17 bicycle /bike18 parý19 website

Part 420 B a week going to work instead of going to school.21 A Do you think it's a good idea? I'm so busy.22 B I don't even know what they look like.23 A then I'Il decide24 B I think it's better to try something you don't know about.25 A I'll do it.

Total listening marks = 25

SpeakingFor a guide to assessment and marking/ see page 2O3.

Extra pÍactice for Writing Part I1 got/bought it2 of his3 cost very4 Can I have5 must wear

6 more fun than7 taught me8 should9 used to

10 busy

34557

910

11

12

13

TEACHER'S GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - TEST 6 p$w

xWriting Pant 2 Writing Part 3

Mark Criteria

5 All content elements covered appropriately.Messaoe clearlv communicated to reader.

4 All content elements adequately dealt with.Message communicated successfully, onthe whole.

3 All content elements attempted.Message requires some effort by the reader.orOne content element omitted but othersclearlV communicated.

2 Two content elements omitted, orunsuccessÍu||y dea|t with.Message only partly communicated toreader.orScript may be slightly short (20-25 words).

'l Little relevant content and/or messagerequires excessive effort by the reader,or short (10-19 words).

0 Totally irrelevant or totally incomprehensibleor too short (under 10 words).

Mark Criteria

5 Very good attempt:. Confident and ambitious use of language.. Wide range of structures and vocabulary

within the task set.. Well organised and coherent, through use

of simple linking devices.. Errors are minor, due to ambition, and

non-impeding.. Requires no efÍort by the reader.

4 Good attempt:. Fair|y ambitious use oÍ |anguage.. More than adequate range oÍ structures

and vocabulary within the task set.. Evidence of organisation and some linkino

of sentences.. Some errors, generally non-impeding.. Requires onlv a little effort bv the reader.

3 Adequate attempt:. Language is unambitious, or if ambitious,

flawed.. Adequate range of structures and

vocabulary.. Some attempt at organisation; linking of

sentences not always maintained.. A number of errors may be present, but

are mostly non-impeding.. Reouires some effort bv the reader.

2 Inadequate attempt:. Language is simplistic/limited/repetitive.. |nadequate range oÍ structures and

vocabulary.. Some incoherence; erratic punctuation.. Numerous errors, which sometimes

impede communication.. Requires considerab|e efÍort by the reader'

I Poor attempt:. Severe|y restricted command oÍ language.. No evidence of range of structures and

vocabulary.. Seriously incoherent;absence of

punctuation.. Very poor control; difficult to understand.. Requires excessive effort bv the reader.

0 Achieves nothing: language impossible tounderstand, or totally irrelevant to task.

&W TEAcHER's curDE AND ANswER KEy - MARKTNG GUtDEs

Speaking Test

Throughout the test, candidates are assessedon their language skills, not their personality,intelligence, or knowledge of the world. Theymust, however, be prepared to develop theconversation, where appropriate, and respondto the tasks set. Prepared speeches are notacceptable. Candidates are assessed on theirown individual pedormance and not in relationto each other. Both examiners assess thecandidates according to criteria which areinterpreted at PET level. The interlocutorawards a mark for global achievement, whilstthe assessor awards marks according to fouranalytical criteria:

. Grammar and Vocabulary

. Discourse Managemeni

. Pronunciation

. Interactive Communication.

Grammar and Vocabulary - This scale refersto the accurate and appropriate use ofgrammatical Íorms and vocabu|ary, lt a|soinc|udes the range oÍ both grammatical formsand vocabulary. Performance is viewed interms of the overall effectiveness of thelanguage used in dealing with the tasks.

Discourse Management - This scale refers tothe coherence, extent and re|evance oÍ eachcandidate's individual contribution. On thisscale, the candidate's ability to maintain acoherent f|ow oÍ |anguage is assessed, eitherwithin a single utterance or over a string olutterances. Also assessed here is howrelevant the contributions are to what hasgone beÍore'

Pronunciation - This scale refers to thecandidate's ability to produce comprehensibleutterances to fulfil the task requirements. Thisincludes stress, rhythm and intonation, as wellas individual sounds. Examiners putthemselves in the position of the non-languagespecia|ist and assess the overal| impact oÍ thepronunciation and the degree oÍ eÍfort requiredto understand the candidate' DiÍferent varietiesof English, e.g. British, North American,Australian etc., are acceptable, provided theyare used consistently throughout the test.

Interactive Communication - This scalerefers to the candidate's ability to uselanguage to achieve meaningfulcommunication. This includes initiating andresponding without undue hesitation, theability to use interactive strategies to maintainor repair communication, and sensitivity to thenorms of turn{aking.

Global Achievement - This scale refers tothe candidate's overa|| eÍfectiveness in dea|ingwith the tasks in the four separate parts of thePET Speaking Test. The global mark is anindependent impression mark which reÍ|ectsthe assessment oÍ the candidate'sperformance from the interlocutor'sperspective. The interlocutor gives one globalmark Íor each candidate's peďormance acrossa|l parts oÍ the test.

Marking - As mentioned above, assessmentis based on performance in the whole test,and is not related to performance in particularparts of the test. The assessor awards marksfor each of the four criteria listed above. Theinterlocutor awards each candidate one globalmark.

TEAcHER's GUIDE AND ANSWER KEY - MARKING GUIDEs €ff'

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test. You will hear each part twice. Foreach part of the test there will be time for you to look through thequestions and time for you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper. You will have six minutesat the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet.

Part íThere are seven questions in this part. For each question, there arethree pictures and a short recording. Choose the correct picture andout a tick in the box below it.

Before we start, here is an example.

What will the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. ln Íact I on|y needed to go into one shop. |'d Seen aT-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale. And someshorts to match. I bought this jacket too but |'m not sure iÍ | |ike it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a honiblecolour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right. They |ooked diÍferent in the shop.

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for question 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear eachrecording twice.

1 What time will Paula pick Julie up?

Woman: Hi Julie. This is Paula. I'm ringing to remind you that l'll pickyou up tonight. The fi|m doesn't start unti| eight ÍiÍteen' So We can go abit later than I thought. l'll leave here at about twenty past seven so l'll

be at your house at twenty to eight. We need to allow time to park thecar and I want to get good seats. See you later then. Give me a ring if

there's a oroblem.

Now listen again.

2 What will they get first?

Girl:The most important thing I need is new trainers. I know exactlywhich ones I want. They're in the shop by the library. Let's go straightthere.

Woman: Just a minute. That's the opposite end oÍ town. I Want to geta Íi|m Íor my camera in this shop whi|e we're here.

Gir|: Don't forget we need some Íruit.

Woman: We'll get that last, after we've bought your trainers, becauseit'll be heavy.

Now listen again.

3 Where did the woman leave her keys?

Woman: Oh, I'm in a hurry and I can't find my keys. I always leavethem on the hall table.

Man: Let's see. You didn't leave them in the car, did you? That's whatI did last week.

Woman: l'll oo and look.

Man: There are some keys in the kitchen but I don't think they'reyours. l'll get them.

Woman: Those are mine. Thanks.

Now listen again.

4 What does the man decide to eat?

Woman: What wi|| you have? HoW about Íish and chips? |t's rea||y

good here.

Man: Actually I think l'll just have a drink.

Woman: You must have more than that. lt's hours since we had lunch.What about chicken then or a chicken sandwich?

Man: |Í they have sa|ad, |'|| have some with a ro|l.

Now listen again.

5 What time is the woman's new appointment?

Woman 1: Good morning. Dr Clarke's surgery.

Woman 2: Hello. Could I change the appointment I have for tomorrow,p|ease? |t's in the morning and I can't come ti|| the aÍternoon. Thename's Joanna Saunders.

Woman 1: Certainly. |'l| have a |ook and see iÍ Dr Clarke is Íree....So you can't come at a quarter past ten. Erm ... quarter to threeis availab|e or a qUarter past Íour.

Woman 2: l'll take the later one, thank you. Goodbye.

Now listen again.

6 What was cancelled?

Woman: We missed the Íirst dav of our holidav because oÍ the badWeatheÍ.

Man: Oh! Was your plane cancelled?

Woman: That wasn't the problem. And the coach was waiting to takeus to the port, but the sea was so rough we had to wait till the nextday and take a helicopter to the island. lt was much more expensiveand I Was |ooking Íorward to the feny crossing.

Now listen again.

7 What did Jason enjoy doing on Saturday?

Girl: Hi, Jason. Did you have a good day yesterday? Did you have aÍootba|| match?

Boy: Yes, but we |ost, so We a|| Íe|t a bit miserab|e. The score was 5 -0.

Girl: I went shopping with Sally. We really enjoyed ourselves. But I

know you don't like shopping.

Boy: We||, actua||y I spent Saturday aÍternoon |ooking Íor a birthdaypresent for my sister, and I had a great time in the bookshops andmusic shops. I got her a book and a CD. Then I went to the cinemato see Road tothe stars' Iwas rea||y |ooking Íorward to it' but itwasn't as good as I expected.

Now listen again.

That is the end oÍ Part 1.

XS& rAPEscRrPrs

Pant 2You will hear a woman, Vanessa, talking about a iourney she madewith her husband, Robert, and her baby, Ben. For each question, puta tick in the correct box.

You now have 45 seconds to look at the questions for Part 2.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Interviewer: Good evening Vanessa. You're going to tell us about yourjourney. Where was it Írom and to?

Vanessa: Well, my husband, Robert, and I had worked in Hong KongÍor years. We got married there six years ago and had a baby there.But last year, we gave up our jobs and decided to sail back toEngland, with the baby.

|nterviewer: And how |ong did it take you to get ready Íor the trip?

Vanessa: We had six months to buy a boat and make sure we hadeverything we needed. My Íriends didn't be|ieve I cou|d |ive in such asmall space, but I was happy about that. I was most anxious aboutouÍ hea|th, particu|ar|y the baby, and I started co||ecting medicines in

case we needed them.

Interviewer: And your ÍiÍst stop was Singapore?

Vanessa: Yes. The Íirst part oÍ the journey was the Worst _ We Were

sick all the time. I hadn't expected to hit bad weather so soon. We'd

no worries about the boat, which had already been round the world

once. |n Íact, when we reached Singapore, I wasn't sure aboutspending six more months on the boat and I considered Í|ying hometo England, but luckily decided not to. We spent six long boring weeksin Singapore waiting Íor the Weather to improve.

tnterviewer: And you were joined by your father-in-law?

Vanessa: On the next part of the journey, my father-in-law joined uswith a friend of his, who's a cook. lt was wondedul to have a cook to

prepare mea|s. This gave Robert and me more time. My Íather-in-|aw

Was Very happy to take care oÍ the baby while we sai|ed the boat'

lnterviewer: And did the baby enjoy the trip?

Vanessa: He did, I think. He loved climbing up the steps in theboat. He spent the first year of his life at sea. While he was awakewe played with him because it was dangerous to Ieave him alone.I'm sure this is why he wants us to play with him all the time now.

I worried that he wouldn't learn to walk, but he had no problems. He'll

on|y eat particu|ar Íoods, but a|| childÍen are like that' whether they'Vebeen on a boat or not.

Interviewer: And do you have any advice for other people sailing with

children?

Vanessa: Children are happy on long journeys as long as they haveplenty to do on board. lt's dangerous otherwise. We just had one childwith us, but it might be better with two or three who can play together.

lnterviewer: Well, has anyone got any questions?

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 2.

Part 3You will hear someone talking on the radio about the WillinghamMuseum. For each question, fill in the missing inÍormation in the

numbered space.

You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Now we are ready to start- Listen careÍully.You will hear the recordingtwice.

Hadio presenter: And to Íinish our progÍamme about the area, I must

advise you to visit Willingham. Cars aren't allowed into the centre, soit's very pleasant to walk around. Your first stop should be the museum,Where history is brought to |iÍe. Go back to the nineteenth century andwalk along a street which looks .iust like it did then. There's even a

horse and cart that you can ride on. The part of the museum which

really interested me was a 1950s dining room. lt was.iust like mygrandmother's house when I was a child. And there's plenty more -toys, pottery, jewellery.

lf you can wait, there's a new exhibition opening soon. Willingham is

Íamous Íor one thing in particu|ar - something a|| of us wear _ shoes.People have made them in Willingham for hundreds of years, and inthis exhibition you can see how they were made. But don't go yet

because it doesn't start until the 14th of July.

A||ow at least ha|Í a day to Visit the museum. |t's on a hi|| in a veryold building which used to be a prison. lt's a much happier place nowthan it was then, I can tell you. One room describes the history of the

buiIding itse|Í'

You can't miss the museum' |t's not in the town centre itse|Í - it's just

in front of the cast|e, and you can see that Ťrom wherever you are inthe town.

Have a |ook round the town oÍ Wi||ingham too whi|e you're there. |Í

you start in the main square and Ío||ow the green signs' they'|| takeyou to the museum. And you'll see lots of other interesting things on

the way too. Well, that's all for today ...

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3-

Pant 4Look at the six sentences for thÍs part. You will hear a conversationbetween a boy, William, and a girl, Sophie, in a music shop. Decide ifeach sentence is correct or incorrect. lf it is correct, put a tick in the

box under A for YES. lf it is not correct, put a tick in the box under Bfor NO.

You now have 20 seconds to look at the questions for Part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Sophie: Hi, William.

William: Oh, hi, Sophie.

Sophie: This is a good music shop, isn't it? BeÍore it opened' I had to

ask my mum to buy me what I wanted in Birmingham because therewasn't a good shop here.

William: Your mum went all the way to Birmingham to buy what you

wanted? lt's about twenty kilometres Írom here!

Sophie: No, silly. She works there.

William: So do you go with her sometimes in the holidays and spendthe day shopping in Birmingham?

Sophie: Well, I find the city centre a bit big, so I get anxious aboutgetting |ost' l'd Íather te|| my mum what I want and she gets it Íor me.

She doesn't mind.

Wi||iam: We||, next time you go I cou|d come with you' |Í we had amap, it wouldn't be a problem for me.

Sophie: Yes, if we were together, it'd be OK. That CD you had in your

hand when I came in ... are you going to buy it?

William: I already have. Why?

Sophie: Oh, I was thinking of getting it too. lt's the new one by that

band 521, isn't it? | didn't use to like them much, but their music hasgot a lot better recently.

William: Mmm. Don't get the same one. You can borrow mine. lf yougot a difÍerent one by the same band, then you cou|d lend that to me.

Sophie: Well ...

William: I don't think this one's very good anyway actually. Look at

these others - they've got much better songs on them.

Sophie: Mmm, I hadn't seen that one. But I'm going to get the oneI planned to buy - that's what I really want.

William: Well, here you are then. Happy birthday! I've iust bought it

foÍ you.

TAPESCRIPTS WN

Sophie: oh, thank you, but my birthday's not ti|| next Week. | Íea||yprefer surprises.

William: Well, you spoilt the surprise. I had to give it to you now tostop you buying it.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 4.

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers on to theanswer sheet.

That is the end of the test.

SpeakingPart íSample interviewExaminer: Good morning. Can I have your mark sheets please?I'm Mary, and this is Michael. He's just going to listen to us. Now,what is your name?

Carlo: I'm Carlo.

Examiner: Thank you. And what is your name?

Anna: Anna.

Examiner: Thank you. What's your surname, Carlo?

Carlo: Bianchi.

Examiner: How do you spell it?

Carlo: B-l-A-N-C-H-l

Examiner: And Anna, What's your Íami|y name?

Anna: Rimini.

Examiner: How do you spell that?

Anna: R-l-M-l-N-1.

Examiner: Where do you come from, Carlo?Carlo: ltaly.

Examiner: And do you work or aÍe you a student in |ta|y?

Carlo: I'm a student.

Examiner: What do you study?

Carlo: Er, in ltaly?

Examiner: Yes. What subjects do you study in ltaly?

Carlo: Oh. Er ... lots of subjects. I'm at school.

Examiner: Yes, I see, thank you. Anna, where do you come Írom?

Anna: I'm from ltaly too. My home's in Milan.

Examiner: What do you do there?

Anna: I work in an ofÍice. |'m a secretary.

Examiner: Thank you. What do you enjoy doing in your Íree time?

Anna: Er ... I'm sorry, I don't understand. Can you repeat that please?

Examiner: What do you enjoy doing when you're not working?

Anna: | |ike going out with my Íriends and I a|so |ike cooking.

Examiner: Really? And what did you do yesterday evening?

Anna: I did my homework Íor my English teacher, and I visited afriend.

Examiner: OK. Thank you. And what about you, Carlo? What did youdo yesterday evening?

Car|o: I did some homework too and then I Watched a Íootba|| matchon TVExaminer: Do you en.joy studying English?

Carlo: Um, sometimes.

Examiner: Do you think Eng|ish wi|l be usefu| for you in the Íuture?

Carlo: Yes.

Examiner: Whv?

Car|o: Er' because, um, it's useÍul Íor, um, it's useÍu|, it can he|p meto get a job, I think.

Examiner: Thank you.

Part 2Sample interviewExaminer: Now I'm going to describe a situation to you. You are goingto make some p|ans Íor a day out together. |'|l give you some picturesof places you can visit. Talk together about which three places you'llgo to. Decide which you will go to first. Here are the pictures. Justthink Íor Íew seconds and |'|| say that again.

You are going to make some plans for a day out together. Talktogether about which three places you'll go to. Decide which one youwi|| go to Íirst. Ready? Anna, wou|d you |ike to start?

Anna: Where would you like to go, Carlo? There's an.old castle ...

What do you think?

Car|o: We|l, can We try something e|se? |'d preÍer to go to theswimming pool because ... because ... I like swimming and diving ander, because I like taking exercise and ... What do you want to do?

Anna: Er ... I'd prefer to go somewhere for shopping, like the mall orthe market ... yeah, I think the market has some interesting clothes.OK ... so, shall we go to one place that you want - like the swimmingpool - and one place that I want - like the market?

Carlo: Yes, that sounds good. Let's do that. Let's go to the market,and you can look at the clothes, and then the swimming pool. Whatshall we do for lunch?

Anna: We||, how about, how about going to the burger bar Íor |unch?It's probably OK.

Carlo: |'m not so sure about that. |'d preÍer to eat in a restaurant.Perhaos we can Íind a restaurant in the ma|| and eat there.

Anna: That's a great idea. So, sha|| We go to the ma|| aŤter themarket?

Carlo: All right. Let's do that. l'd like to go there too. Then we can relaxat the swimming pool all the afternoon.

Anna: That's a great idea.

Examiner: Thank you.

Part 3Sample interviewExaminer: Now I'm going to give each of you a photograph of peopleindoors. Carlo, here's yours.

Carlo: Thank you.

Examiner: Would you show it to Anna and talk about it, please? Anna,l'll give you a photograph in a moment. Carlo, would you start now?

Carlo: OK, so, it's a bedroom, I think. There's a girl. She's sitting on asofa, no perhaps it's a bed. I'm not sure. She's studying. She's got

some books. Er... The television is on, but she's not looking at it.Perhaos she can hear it. Um ...

Examiner: The room's not very tidy.

Carlo: No, it isn't. Um, there's a - | don't know the word in English,um, it,s like a box' beside her. |t's Íu|| of paper and, it's for rubbish?And there's a toy, a bear. I don't like er, this room, very much.

Examiner: Thank you. Now Anna, here's your photo. Would you showit to Carlo and tell him about it. olease.

Anna: Thank you. Well, there's a girl in the photo. She's in a room, it

could be her bedroom, I can't see, but it's got a computer in it. Thereare two photos behind her, and a toy animal, a tiger.

Carlo: Yes.

Anna: lt's night, I think, because the light is on.

Examiner: Mmm"

príal TAPEScRIPTs

Anna: She's listening to, um, she's, er, on the phone. She looks

bored, I think. Er, I think she was working when the phone rang. She'slooking at the computer. Maybe her friend phoned about homework, to

talk about their homework.

Examiner: Thank you. May I have the photographs back? Thank you.

Part 4Sample interviewExaminer: Um, your pholographs showed people studying. Now, I'd

|ike you to ta|k together about the kind of p|aces you preÍer to Studyin - Íind out how you each like to organise your Work.

Carlo: Yes.

Anna: Do you prefer to study alone, Carlo?

Carlo: Er, sometimes. lf I have to write something, I like to be alone.What about you?

Anna: Me too. I can't work when there are other people in the roomWith me. But sometimes iÍ the work is hard, I Want to be wrth my friend.

Carlo: What do you mean?

Anna: You know, we can help each other, give each other some ideas ...

Carlo: Um, yes, that's OK sometimes. And when you want to learn

something, some vocabulary, something ...

Anna: Oh, yes.

Carlo: Because that's sometimes boring.

Anna: Yes, I sometimes work with my Íriend and we make games to

help remember words. But I don't want other people there, you know,

who are doing difÍerent things' like Watching te|evision'

Carlo: No.

Anna: Because I can't work iÍ they are talking.

Carlo: Yes. And if I'm bored I listen to music as well.

Anna: I agree. I often listen to music when I'm studying.

Garlo: Very loud.

Anna: Oh, yes. But not the radio because they talk too much.

Carlo: No. That's, um, that's annoying.

Anna: Yes ...

Examiner: So, do either oÍ you use a computer for your studies?

Carlo: Yes. I have a laptop and I write on it. lt's good for my spelling'

Anna: Yes. I haven't got a computer, but there are some computers In

my school. Sometimes I use the internet.

Car|o: Yes. But it's difÍicu|t to find things Sometimes'

Anna: You're right, but my teacher helps me.

Car|o: That's good Íor you, but my schoo| doesn't have enoughcomputeÍs.

Anna: No?

Carlo: We have to share.

Examiner: Thank you both. That's the end oÍ the test.

Anna: Thank you.

Carlo: Thank vou.

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test. You will hear each part twice. Foreach part oÍ the test there will be time for you to look through thequestions and time for you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper. You will have six minutesat the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet.

Part íThere are seven questions in this part. For each question, there arethree pictures and a short recording. Choose the correct picture andput a tick in the box below it.

Before we start, here is an examPle.

What will the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. In fact I only needed to go into one shop. I'd seen aT-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale. And someshorts to match. I bought this jacket too but |'m not sure iÍ | |ike it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a horriblecolour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right' They looked difÍerent in the shop.

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for question 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen careÍully' You will hear eachrecording twice.

1 Where will they meet?

Woman: oh, |'m tired oÍ sitting in this traffic queue. Do you mind if I

get out here, because I want to go to the library. When you've parked

the car, |'I| see you in the caÍé. You know, the one next to the

swimming pool.

Man: OK, I think l'll try the car park behind the swimming pool" Then

I won't have Íar to walk back. See Vou later then.

Woman: Bye.

Now listen again.

2 What is the woman looking Íor?

Man: Good morning, madam. Can I help you?

Woman: Oh yes, my daughter left her coat on the bus yesterday' lt's

dark blue with a wide belt and a large collar, and it's got two bigpockets on the Íront. She |eÍt her purse in one of them unÍortunate|y.

Man: |'|l see iÍ we've got a coat |ike that. Just a minute.

Now listen again.

3 Which photograph are they looking at?

Man: I took this on the way up beÍore we reached the forest. You cansee the village where we were staying, look. When we got to the top

of the mountain, I took |ots oÍ photos because there was a wondeffu|view of the sea Írom up there. But unÍortunately those ones Were nogood - something went wrong with the camera.

Now listen again.

4 Where is the boy's flat?

Boy: Hi, is Misha there?

Girl: No, sorry he's not. Can I take a message?

Boy: Yes, please. He's coming to see my new f|at tomoÍrow and I

need to give him directions' Can you te|| him when he gets oÍf the

bus, he needs to cross the road and take the Íirst turning on the right,

TAPESCRIPTS &&&X

then the second turning on the |eft' My Í|at is just before theroundabout on the right-hand side.

Girl: OK. I've got that. l'll tell him.

Now listen again.

5 Who is coming to stay with the girl?

Girl: My aunt's coming to visit us at the weekend. She's bringing mytwin cousins - they're six. They were babies last time I saw them, andit was really hard work for all of us because they used to cry a lot then.I'm really looking forward to seeing them again because they live inNew York, so I don't see them much. My uncle has to stay behindbecause he has to work, and Joe, their teenage son, has decided tostay with him, so that's a shame. I won't see them this time.

Now listen again.

6 What was the weather like on Tom's holiday?

Girl: How was your holiday Tom? You had lovely weather, didn't you?

Boy: Well actually, it was much better here. We left here in brightsunshine, but we didn't see the sun again for the whole week. lt didn'tactually rain, but it was very cloudy.

Girl: What about the hotel?

Boy: oh, there Was a |ove|y view Írom our room' The hote| staÍÍ saidit had rained a lot the week before. So we were luckv.

Now listen again.

7 Where is the desk now?

Boy: You look tired, Alice.

Girl: Oh, I am. I've moved all the furniture around in my bedroom.I used to have my desk behind the door, but I decided to move it.

Boy: So where have you put it?

Girl: I tried it under the big window, but it was too sunny there tostudy, so I've put it under the little window opposite the door.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 1.

Pant 2You will hear a tour guide talking to a group of tourists about a coachtrip. For each question, put a tick in the correct box-

You now have 45 seconds to look at the auestions Íor Part 2.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Tour guide: Good morning everyone. |'m your tour guide Íor today.We've made a change to the trip we usually make on Thursdays. I

hope none of you will mind. We're still going to visit the beautiful townof Brampton with its old university, and there'll be time to look roundthat as usua|. But today, because we have a |ot oÍ children here thisweek, we're a|so going to a wi|d|iÍe park which a co||eague oÍ minehas recommended.

on the Way to Brampton, we'|| drive through some beautiÍu|countryside. We'll go over the mountain and we'll have a lovely view ofthe |ake from the top' We'|| stop theÍe Íor a ÍeW minutes so you cantake some photos. In the next valley, we'll have a break for coffee.There's a caÍé near a beautifu| waterfa|| and if any of you Want to gofor a walk, you can.

We'|| gď to Brampton at about .l 1.30. |t's a love|y town. We'|| startby taking a guided tour oÍ the univeÍsity, which was bui|t in theseventeenth century. Then there'|| be time Íor a|| oÍ you to have a |ookat the shops. Most peop|e come to Brampton nowadays Íor the shops,but it's the university that made the town famous. lÍ you don't Want tolook at the shops, I suggest you visit the museum.

After lunch, we'll get back on the coach and go to the wildlife park. Weneed to stay in the coach while we drive round because we'll see

lions in the park, which can obviously be dangerous. Tell your childrennot to expect it to be like the zoo - the animals are sometimes hidingin the trees. I know some friends oÍ mine have seen some tigers, but|'ve never seen them and |'m aÍraid they no |onger have any monkeys,but you may see some giraffes.

We'|| |eave the wi|d|iÍe park at ha|f past Íive. The journey back takesabout an hour and a quarter, so we'll return to the hotel at a quarterto seven' There'|| just be time Íor you to change before dinner at aquarter past seven.

NoW then, beÍore we get on the bus, if anyone Wants to ask anyquestions |'|| try to answer them. |'m going to give each oÍ you aninformation sheet about the places we're going to visit. Some of youWere on yesterday's trip With me and l know you found the inÍormationsheet he|pfu|. So, iŤ we just move over here...'

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 2.

Part 3You will hear someone talking on the radio about a competition. Foreach question, fill in the missing information in the numbered space.

You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Radio presenter: We|l' that's about it Íor this monih's edition oÍ BookClub. We hope you've enjoyed hearing our discussion this week.

Now it's time for me to tell you about our super new competition. AndI have to say, you won't believe the prize we've got for you this month.Would you believe we're giving you the chance to win your owncomputer. And not iust a computer - it comes with a co|ouÍ printer aswell. This is a competition you really have to enter, isn't it? So, whatdo you need to know? And what do you have to do?

All you have to do is enter our short story competition. lt couldn't beeasier. We want you to write a short story up to 1,500 words long. Theru|es are very simp|e. |n Íact' they cou|d hard|y be simp|er. We want|ots oÍ entries. What you have to do is sit down and Write a shortcrime story, using your own ideas - and they can be as strange andwonderful as you like, in fact, the stranger, the better. But, and this isimportant, everything that happens in your story must be in the Íuture.So, just |et your imagination Í|y away and start writing, because thiscould be your lucky month.

Send your entries to me, Joy Jones, at the usual address. Put yourname, address, telephone number and, very important this, so don'tÍorget, your age, at the end of your story. oh, and | Íorgot to say, Íorthis competition there's an age limit. You must be under eighteenwhen you enter. Make sure you post your story in time to reach me bythe 8th of March. So good luck, good writing and good reading untilnext month.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3.

Pant 4Look at the six sentences for this part. You will hear a conversationbetween a man, Marcus, and a woman, Cora, who work in the sameoffice. Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect. lf it is correct,put a tick in the box under A Íor YES. lÍ it is not correct, put a tick inthe box under B for NO.

You now have 20 seconds to look at the ouestions for Part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen careÍully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Marcus: Hi there!

Cora: Morning, or should I say afternoon?

fXrflX rApEscRtprs

Marcus: I'm not late, am l?

Cora: on|y a Íew minutes today. But you're never exact|y ear|y, are you?

Marcus: We||, it's the traÍfic isn't it? There WeÍe queues oÍ buses

stopping anything Írom moving up the London Road'

Cora: But that's where you're wrong. lt's the cars that make trafficjams because there are so many oÍ them. And most oÍ the time they

have.iust one person in them - like you! At least the buses have more

than one person in them. Anyway, I don't know why you don't come to

Work on your bike. You'd pass a|| the jams, and you'd be Íitter.

Marcus: I just don't accept that. What about the air I'd breathe while I

was cycling? I'd get wet in the rain. And I'd arrive at work all hot and

sticky.

Cora: But you wou|dn't iÍ you a|lowed enough time to come acrossthe park. lt's really quite pleasant riding that way, and it's not much

Íurther. And it's cheaper.

Marcus: Yeah, anýhing wou|d be cheaper than the buses in this

town. |Í they Weren't so expensive, more peop|e Wou|d catch them'

They shou|d make them cheaper' or emp|oyers shou|d pay part oÍ

people's bus fares. That would cut the traffic and we'd all get to work

in much less time.

Cora: And it'd be hea|thier Íor everyone, whether they were on a bike

or not.

Marcus: |Í the buses Weren't too o|d and sme||y. Some oÍ them are

terrible.

Cora: But so are cars and lorries, of course. So' are you getting the

bus tomorrow then?

Marcus: Well, I might consider it, but unfortunately the bus stop's a

|ong way Írom my Ílat, so |'d have to get up ear|ier, and tomorrow's

my day oÍÍ anyway.

Cora: Honestly, I sometimes wonder how you manage to get out of

bed in the moÍnings!

Marcus: Well, I don't have to tomorrow.

Cora: So we'd better get on with some work now.

Marcus: OK, OK.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 4.

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers onto the

answer sheet.

That is the end of the test.

SpeakingPart íExercise 2b: Vocabulary and pronunciation

chemistry biologY Physicsgeography history PhilosoPhYcomputing religion modern languages

environmental sciencemustcliterature

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test. You will hear each part twice. For

each part oÍ the test there Witl be time for you to look through thequestions and time Íor you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper. You will have six minutes

at the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet'

Part íThere are seven questions in this part. For each question, there are

three pictures and a short recording. Choose the correct picture andput a tick in the box below it-

Before we start, here is an examPle.

What witt the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. In fact I only needed to go into one shop. I'd seen a

T-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale. And some

shorts to match. l bought this jacket too but |'m not sure iÍ | |ike it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a honible

colour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right. They |ooked diÍferent in the shop.

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for questÍon 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear eachrecording twice.

1 Which is the woman's house?

Woman: You can't miss my house. When you turn into the road, it's

on the left. lt's next to the house with a huge apple tree in the front

garden. ours has just got a Íew bushes and Í|owers. oh, and there's

a bus stop on the other side ot the road Írom us.

Now listen again.

2 Where is the traffic jam?

Man: The police are advising dřivers to avoid the city centre this

morning iÍ possib|e. Because the motorway is c|osed for repairs, theÍe

is increased traffic in the city. lf you do have to drive into the city centre'

turn right at the traffic lights in Kings Road so you avoid the roundabout

at the top of Ship Street, WheÍe there is a huge queue oÍ cars.

Now listen again.

3 Which wedding present has the man bought?

Woman: I need to buy Julie and Will a wedding present. Do you know

what they want?

Man: Well, Julie said they wanted some cups to go with the plates I've

got Íor them' But someone e|se might get those - you'|| need to check

with her. What about towels? Everyone always needs lots of those'

Woman: So boringl I'd prefer to buy them a picture or somethingmore interesting.

Man: Well, I bought Julie a picture once and she never put it on the

wa||. |t's difÍicu|t choosing Íor someone e|se.

Now listen again.

4 How did the man get home?

Man: Oh, I'm glad to be home l gave up waiting for the bus and

decided it wou|d be quicker on Íoot, but because it Was raining so

much and there's such a narrow pavement, the cars kept splashing

me as they passed.There's never a taxi when you want one'

Now listen again.

TAPESCRIPTS PT'EI

5 What did Simon hurt?

Woman: You're late home, Simon.Boy: Sony. I crashed into John while we were playing basketball atschool. I had to push my bike home because I've hurt my knee. John'shurt his hand, lucky thing, so he won't be able to do his history examtomorrow.

Woman: Let's have a look" At least you didn't break your ankle againlike last year.

Now listen again.

6 Which is the man's mother?

Man: I'm looking for my mother. She said she'd get here early, so sheshould be here. You know her, don't you?

Woman: I haven't seen her for years. ls thai her, look, with the darkhair and the glasses?Man: That's not her. Her hair's white now and she doesn't wearglasses any more. Oh, there she is, coming in now.

Now listen again.

7 Which poster are they looking at?Gir|: Can you |ook at this poster |'Ve done Íor the concert? |t Wasdifficult to get all the information on. ls it clear enough?Boy: Well, you did the right thing putting all the information at thebottom so peop|e can see it easi|y. But you'Ve Íorgotten to put thename oÍ the schoo| at the top. |t |ooks strange with just an emptysoace there.

Girl: Oh, you're right. l'll add it later. I couldn't decide between aphotograph of the schoo| or this drawíng oÍ a vio|in. l think I madethe right choice though.

Boy: Yeah, it looks more attractive than a photo.

Now listen again.

That is the end oÍ Part 1'

Paft 2You will hear a successÍul fashion designer talking about his career'For each question, put a tick in the correct box.

You now have 45 seconds to look at the questions for Part 2.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwtce.

Fashion designer: |,m quite oÍten asked how I got into Íashion. Forme, it was something I always wanted to do. However, because mymother Was a university teacher and my Íather a headmaster, theyÍound it hard to accept that Íashion cou|d be a serious career. l Wasn'tbad at school, I mean I was a typical student, passed enough examsand so on, and they could understand I might want to go to artco||ege, but Íashion just wasn't a serious subject Íor them.

Anyway, they said I had to do a year's business course first. I didn't likeit at the time, but |ater, it made a big difÍerence to me. For examp|e,when I started my art college course, I could use a word processor, I

knew about managing money, I had an idea oÍ how to ta|k aboutbusiness. None of the other students had that. And the other thing I didduring that year Was to gei a part-time job in the office oÍ a sma||Íactory making good.qua|íty c|othes' The pay was awfu|, but | |earnt alot there about that end of the industry, so I began to understandwhat's possible and what isn't. I mean, by watching people, I realisedWhat you can and can't do with different types oÍ cloth, what takes along time to make on a sewing machine, you know.

Then I did two years at the local art college. I wanted to go to Londonstraight away, but my parents insisted. I think they thought I was tooyoung, I was still only seventeen by then, but in the end it was cost.London is a very expensive place for a student. So I stayed at homeuntil I won a prize for a design which actually gave me a place at a

London college for nine months. There, I was able to make a lot ofusefu| contacts - | Was a|ready Working Íor an |ta|ian Íashion housethree months before I left. I went on to spend three wonderful yearsin Milan, then I got the job in New York for a year, which was reallyexciting, but unbelievably stressful. I think probably because I was tooÍar away Írom my Íami|y, more than any actua| prob|ems with the workitse|Í. So, I ended up in London, starting my own company, which isstressÍuI in a diÍÍerent way, but rea||y I enjoy it very much'

Now listen again.

That is the end oÍ Part 2'

Part 3You will hear a tour guide talking to some tourists about a visit to ashopping centre. For each question, fill in the missing information inthe numbered space.

You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully-You witl hear the recordingtwice.

Tour guide: BeÍore we go on to |ook at the cathedra|, we're going tospend a coup|e oÍ hours here in the shopping centre. So get out yourwallets and your credit cards. Some of you might want to get somecash first of all. There is a bank. lt's on the first floor.You can't miss it

- it's next to the cookie shop. Just follow the delicious smell!

|Í you're |ooking for particu|ar shops, it might be a good idea to have amap, The newsagent's over there has some which are Íree' Seewhere I mean? OK?When you've spent all your money, you'll want to have something toeat. lf you want a proper meal, there's a really good restaurant in themain square opposite the fountain. But if you want to spend more timeshopping, so just want to have a qutck snack there are several placeswhere you can get a sandwich and a drink, but the best one is thesnack bar just over there beside the lifts. As well as sandwiches youcan get salads and cakes. lt's open now, but it does most of itsbusiness in the morning and at lunchtime, so rt closes at a quarterpast two. lt's best to get there by about one o'clock anyway or thereisn't much choice.

Now, the last thing is very important. We're meeting again at a quarterto three. |Í you go out oÍ the centre through these doors and turn |eft'you'll see a large shop selling carpets. The coach will meet us outsidethe shop. The shop's name is Whitmarsh. Now, do you want to writethat down - |,|| spe|| it Íor you. That's W-H-|-T-M-A-R-S-H. oK? Now,have a good time and l'll see you later.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3.

Pant 4Look at the six sentences Íor this part. You WilI hear a qonversationbetween a girl, Alice, and a boy, Sam, about a play their schoot isdoing called Romeo and JulieL Decide if each sentence E correct orincorrect. lf it is correct, put a tick in the box under A for YES. lf it isnot correct, put a tick in the box under B for NO.

You now have 20 seconds to look at the questions for Part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Alice: Hi Sam. What are you doing out here? There's a practicestarting in five minutes Íor the schoo| p|ay. We've decided to do it

under the big oak tree in the garden today - it's too hot inside.

Sam: I'm not going to come.

A|ice: But you have to come.You'Íe p|aying Romeo. How can we doRomeo and JulleÍ without Romeo?

Sam: I'm not going to be Romeo any more.

Pfm TAPEScRtPTs

Alice: Oh, don't be silly. Why aren't you? You were so pleased when

Miss Hayes chose you. And you're such a good actor, too.

Sam: Well, you might think so, but Miss Hayes doesn't. She says my

voice isn't loud enough.

Alice: Oh, that's too bad. I know she asked you to speak louder at the

Íirst Íew practices we had, but you did what she said. You've got alouder voice than most of the other people acting anyway.

Sam: Well, she says she's not going to give me another chance.

Alice: I could go and talk to her. After all, I'm playing Juliet, so it'simportant I get on with the person who's acting Romeo. l'd preÍer it

to be you than anyone else.

Sam: lt won't help, and she's already asked someone else to beRomeo anyway. She ofÍered me another sma||er part, but I don'treally want it.

Alice: But it will be such a pity if you're not in the play at all. Whydon't you take the part she's offering and maybe you can have abigger part next time?

Sam: You can't persuade me. I spent such a long time learningRomeo's speeches. I can't staÍt again. l'm going to oÍfer to do the

scenery instead. They,re sti|| |ooking Íor someone to do that'

Alice: So at least l'll see you at the practices. Come on then. I expect

everyone's waiting for us.

Sam: I won't come today. I'll see Miss Hayes later and see what shethinks oÍ my idea.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 4.

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers onto the

answer sheet.

That is the end of the test-

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test.You will hear each part twice. Foreach part of the test there will be time for you to look through thequestions and time for you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper. You will have six minutes

at the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet'

Part íThere are seven questions in this part. For each question, there arethree pictures and a short recording. Choose the correct picture andput a tick in the box below it.

Before we start, here is an example.

What will the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. In fact I only needed to go into one shop. I'd seen aT-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale And someshorts to match. I bought this jacket too but I'm not sure if I like it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a horrible

colour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right. They |ooked diÍÍerent in the shop'

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for Question 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear eachrecording twice.

1 Which job does the woman do now?

Woman: All the time I was at school I wanted to be a nurse, but mymother worked in a shop and said it wasn't good to be on your feet all

day. She Wanted me to be a secretary. I did that Íor a whi|e aÍter l |eft

college, but I wasn't very keen on it, so I retrained and now I'm doing

what I always wanted to.

Now listen again.

2 Where will they meet?

Gir|: Hi Pip' |t,s Angie. |'lI see you outside ihe café tonight at seventhirty.

Boy: Oh, but I don't know where it is.

Girl: lt's easy to find. lt's opposite that new supermarket that's just

ooeneo.

Boy: I'm not sure where that is either. l'll wail for you by the bus

Station, then We can go to the caÍé togetheÍ' l'|| know Where the new

suoermaÍket is then too.

Now listen again.

3 Where is the car park?

Man: The best place to park is near the theatre. When you get to

the roundabout, go straight across, then take the second turning on

the right. The car park is on the left-hand side.

Now listen again.

4 Which date is Brian's birthday?

Man 1: John, did you know it's Brian's birthday next week, his 20th?It's on the 1Sth.

Man 2: That's Wednesday, isn't it? ls he having a party?

Man í: Yes, on the 17th at about eight.

Man 2: Oh, next Friday. I hope I get asked.

Now listen again.

5 Which photo are they looking at?

Man 1: And who's in this photograph?

Man 2: Yes. That's my brother and his family, but it was taken afew years ago. He only had two children then - he's got three now.

The third one was a boy after two girls. I don't see them very often

because they live in Australia, but I hope to see them this year'

Now listen again.

6 Which T-shirt is Beth wearing?

Girl 1: Do you like the new T-shirt? | got it in the market.

Gir| 2: |t's great Beth' l bought one there myse|Í the other day. |t's got

a pattern of black and white squares on it.

Girl 1: Oh, I didn't see those. I bought two, actually - this plain one

that |'m wearing and one with some Writing across the Íront. Theproblem is it's in a foreign language and I don't know what it says.

Girl 2: As long as it looks good, it doesn't matter.

Now listen again.

7 Where is the man?

Man: Hello Mary" The train arrived much earlier than I expected. I'm

on the platform at the moment. Shall I get a taxi? There shouldn't be

a |ong queue at this time oÍ day ... oK .'. |'l| go and have a drink in the

caÍé whi|e I Wait for you.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 1.

rAPEScRtPrs Ern

Part 2You will hear part of a radio programme calledWhat's On. For eachquestion, put a tick in the correct box.

You now have 45 seconds to look at the questions for Part 2.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Martin: Welcome. Jenny and I have got lots to tell you, haven't weJenny?

Jenny: That's right. This week, on Saturday night, Westfield Radioruns its annual competition.

Martin: What's it Íor:, Jenny?Jenny: We||' |ast year it Was to Íind the best dancer, and next year itwill be the turn of local actors to enter. But this year we're looking forthe best singer in our city. You have to perform alone and we'll providea musician.

Martin: And what are the rules?

Jenny: Not many. For examp|e, theÍe'S no Iimit on age' Whether you're65 or six it doesn't matter - but you must live within five miles of thecity centre. You need to phone your entry beÍore Saturday. We don'taccept entries through the post or by Íax. And speaking of ta|ent'there's a new theatre group starting every Saturday specia||y Íorreenagers.

Martin: And how do people get more information?

Jenny: |Í you're interested, you need to contact the theatre group'ssecretary, and I wi|| give you heř phone number |ater. TheyTe going tomeet in St Paul's School.Martin: Right. We||, it's schoo| ho|idays this week, so What,s on ofÍer?

Jenny: OK. To let as many people as possible use the sports hall thisWeek, it Wi|Í open an hour ear|ieř than usua| at 8 a.m. and shut |aterat 10.30 p.m' instead of nine. |f you Want to do one oÍ the morepopular activities, you should ring and book as usual. The indoorÍootba|| pitch is a|ways popu|ar and has to be booked in advance.Martin: But what about the swimming pool?

Jenny: Not quite such good news, |'m aÍraid. We'd hoped to te|| youthat the new swimming pool would be ready, but it's not. lt will openhowever beÍore the end of this month, that's about a Week |ater thanplanned, but good news now - there will be no charge for swimmersÍor the Whole of the Íirst week that it's open' |t's the same size as theo|d one but has much betteÍ Íaci|ities.

Martin: That's great. Now, Jenny, have you heard of the rock groupcalled Switch?

Jenny: Yup, even I've heard about them, probably because two oftheir four members were born in Westfie|d, and a|| Íour oÍ them nowlive here when they're not travelling around the world. This time lastyear they were Íour ordinary teenagers and now they're wor|d.Íamous.Well, they're doing a concert on Saturday evening in the Town Hall,and it will be very popular.

Mařtin: so get your tickets quick|y. Thank you Jenny.

Now listen again.

That is the end oÍ Part 2'

Part 3You will hear someone talking about the city of Cork. For eachquestion, fill in the missing inÍormation in the numbered space'You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Tour guide: oK. We|come, everybody. We're Iucky with the WeatheÍtoday. |t is unusua| Íor it to be so hot here at this time of Vear - we're

more used to rain, which is why everything's so green. Now, Cork islreland's second city and 420,000 people live here. That's muchsmaller than our capital city, Dublin, which has a population of onemillion, 58 thousand. The city centre is actually on an islandsurrounded by the river. When people arrive in the city by car, theyoÍten get very conÍused by a|| the bridges they keep crossing as theygo Írom one part of the city to another.

As we walk down St Patrick Street, you'll see on one side oldbuildings going back to the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Onthe other side are mainly modern offices and shops. You may want tocome back and spend some time looking at the older buildings andchurches We pass. AÍter that, we wi|| visit the Íamous covered foodmarket. lf you want to stop and buy something, I suggest the bread,which they bake severaÍ times a day or some Íresh Íruit. They a|so sel|Íresh fish, but it's a bit hot to carry that around today. In the GrandParade we'll go past some very pretty buildings, and then we'll stop inthe caÍé in the art ga||ery for a drink. This is an exce|lent p|ace to havelunch if you want to come back another day. We can't visit theuniversity and the public museum on this walk but I recommend thatyou go there another day. The museum is open every afternoonbetween two and five except Saturday, and it's also open in theevenings from Monday to Friday. Now' if you're ready, we'|| set oÍÍ.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3.

Part 4Look at the six sentences for this part. You will hear a conversationbetween a woman, Kim, and a man, Rob, who live in the same blockof flats. Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect' lÍ it is correct,put a tick in the box under A for YES. lf it is not correct, put a tick inthe box under B for NO.

You now have 20 seconds to look at the questions for Part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully- You will hear the recordingtwice.

Rob: Were you having a party in your flat last night?

Kim: What? |'ve got far too much co||ege work to do to have time Íorparties.

Rob: So what was all that music?Kim: Well, it helps me to think about my work.

Rob: I can't be|ieve it. |t was Ioud enough Íor me to be ab|e to |istento it in my flat.

Kim: Oh, was it that loud? Did it disturb you?

Rob: Actually, it sounded quite nice - in the distance. I thought youhad invited some friends round. I was thinking, why didn't she ask meand fee|ing sorry for myse|Í.

Kim: But when I have friends in, I don't play loud music, becausethen we can't have a proper conversation.

Rob: Yes, I agree. But then I do like something quiet in thebackground when we're ta|king. oÍ course, it's the opposite when |'mtrying to study.

Kim: You need complete silence, do you? With me, what happens isthat I'm listening to the traffic if it's too quiet.

Rob: No, that doesn't Worry me, I can shut that out. But | Íind iÍthere's music, I'm paying attention to that instead of the work.Kim: And What part oÍ the day do you Work best?Rob: I don't have much choice, usually it has to be in the evening,although really I'm a morning person. But I have to go into college allday most days.

Kim: |'m use|ess in the mornings. But I can work right through Íromthe early evening till the next morning if I have to.

Rob: Oh, I could never do that! | always need about three nights torecover iÍ l miss a night's s|eep.

9f,EI rAPEscRtprs

Kim: Anyway, |et me know iÍ the music keeps you awake.

Rob: I'm sure it won'l.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 4-

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers onto the

answer sheet.

That is the end of the test.

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test. You will hear each part twice. Foreach part of the test there will be time for you to look through the

questions and time for you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper. You will have six minutes

at the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet.

Part íThere are seven questions in this part. For each question, there are

three pictures and a short recording. Choose the correct picture andput a tick in the box below it.

BeÍore we start, here is an example'

What will the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. In fact I only needed to go into one shop. I'd seen a

T-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale. And someshorts to match. I bought this jacket too but |'m not sure iŤ | |ike it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a horrible

colour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right. They looked different in the shop.

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for question 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear eachrecording twice.

1 Which band did the boy watch last night?

Boy: I saw that band Firestone on television last night.They're youÍ

Íavourite' aren't they?

Girl: They used to be, but lhey're not the same now they've only got

one singer. lt was really special when they had two and they sangtogether.

Boy: But they're still really good. The guitarist and the drummer are

both still there, and they're brilliant. I really enjoyed watching them.

Now listen again.

2 Where is the woman's new flat?

Man: Where's your new flat, Kate?

Woman: lt's at the top oÍ a rea||y ta|| b|ock _ it's one oÍ four b|ocks of

Ílats which are rea||y c|ose together, but the one |'m in is much ta||er

than the others, so I've got a brilliant view

Man: What oÍ? other b|ocks oÍ f|ats?

Woman: Wel|' yes, but l can see trees and green fie|ds in the Íar

distance and the whole of the city. There's a main road outside the

Íront door to the Í|ats, but I can't hear it because |'m so high up.

Now listen again.

3 Where is the magazine?

Boy: I bought a magazine about computers yesterday and I can't

Íind it. I left it on the kitchen tab|e. Have you seen it?

Mother: Well, if I see a computer magazine, I usually put it with the others

upstairs next to the computer, so you could try there. And you'd better look

in that pi|e oÍ magazines by the bin. |'m going to throw them away.

Boy: Let's see.Yes! | asked you just in time. I won't leave it on the

kitchen table next time.

Now listen again.

4 Which is the boy's teacher?

Boy: I've.iust started learning the piano. I've got a really nice teacher'

He's called Mr Hall.

Girl: Oh, I know, he taught me when I was quite young. He's got a beard

and |ots oÍ b|ack hair' hasn't he? | used to be quite frightened of him.

Boy: Well, the Mr Hall who teaches me hasn't got much hair and it'sgrey, but he does have a beard. And wears glasses.

Girl: But it is the same man, I'm sure. I was only little when he was

teaching me.

Now listen again.

5 What did the man receive in the post?

Man: Was there any post Íor me this morning?

Woman: Yes, there was. Two letters and a postcard. Here you are.

Man: one oÍ the |etters is Íor you' |'m expecting a parce|. Did it come?

Woman: Oh yes. I put it over there, look.

Now listen again.

6 What time is the flight from New York expected?

Woman: Excuse me, |'m waiting Íor Í|ight712 from New York. |t was

supposed to arrive at nine twenty. lt's nine thirty-five now and there's

been no announcement oÍ a de|ay or anything.

Man: |'m sorry, Madam. We've just had a message to say it took ofÍ

an hour and a halÍ |ate. Arriva| time is noW ten Íifty-Íive.

Woman: That's too bad. |'ve been here since ha|Í past eight and it

probably won't arrive when you say. I expect l'll be here till midday.

That's a whole morning wasted.

Man: I can only apologise, Madam.

Now listen again.

7 What was the boy doing when the phone rang?

Girl: What did you do yesterday evening?

Boy: We||, I was supposed to look after my Íour-year-old cousin While

my aunt went to the theatre. But I wanted to watch the match on

television, so she found someone else. The annoying thing was that

the phone rang ha|Íway through, and l missed the best goa|. |'d

Íinished a|| my homework ear|y, too.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 1.

Part 2You witl hear a woman talking to an evening class about carpentry'

For each question, put a tick in the correct box.

You now have 45 seconds to look at the questions for Part 2.

Now we are ready to start' Listen careÍully' You will hear the recording

twice.

Woman: Hi. Well, it's great to see you all. When I suggested this

class, they said women don't need a carpentry class. Now, I know that

girls in school can do carpentry nowadays if they want to, but when I

TAPESCRIPTS ETreI

was at school, it was a boys'subject, and that was that. So, when I

got my own flat, I had no idea at all how to put up a shelf even. Butwhen I saw it would cost six months'wages to employ someone to fixmy kitchen cupboards, I decided to learn. That was eighteen monthsago. I've spent the past couple of months working on a chest ofdrawers, which l Íinished |ast week. |'ve decided to put it in the sittingroom or perhaps the hall, although actually, my original plan was touse it in my bedroom, but now it,s Íinished, it |ooks so good l don'tWant to hide it away! So, you see it's not too diffícu|t.

First of all, I want to say a bit about equipment. you will need to buy afew things. Usually it's a good idea to buy the best quality you canafford. Now, that doesn't mean you have to get |ots oÍ expensive electrictools. Hand too|s are Íine. They're s|ower of course, but you have morecontrol at a slower speed. However, if you aren't very strong, the poweroÍ e|ectric too|s can be a rea| help. So you shou|dn't Íee| that's cheating,if that's what you need. Make sure you take good advice on exactlywhich ones to buy before you spend any money though.The next point is, don't expect to make anýhing Very big or difficu|tfor the Íirst few months at |east. You need to deve|op your carpentry ski||sÍair|y s|ow|y, adding to them with each new thing you make.|f you don,t' you'l| make Íurniture which doesn't work weÍ|, or doesn't |ookgood enough Íor Íriends to see' and you Won't enjoy what you're doing.Last|y, you must p|an everýhing you do rea||y careÍu||y. You begin with alist of everything that's going to be necessary, and then think about theorder in which you are going to work. So, what I want you to do now is toimagine you want to put up a shelf in the bathroom - and make that list.Then we'|| |ook at the |ists together and see what you've Íorgotten! oK?

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 2.

Part 3You will hear someone talking on the radio about a Íashion show. Foreach question, fill in the missing information in the numbered space.You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Man: Today we have with us Geraldine Smith, who's going to tell usabout this autumn's fashion show. |s it the same as usual, Geraldíne?Woman: Yes, that's right. There are ten art colleges altogether fromthe area who are taking part. This year the show will be in the sportsstadium on the 26th oÍ october. That's a bit |ater than usuat - weusually do it in September - and it will start at seven thirty.

We've done something a bit different this year. We've told the studentsthat they have to make clothes in particular colours - they must all beeither grey or b|ue. So if your Íavourite co|our is red or orange, youwon,t Íind it here this year.

The show starts at seven thilty, but beÍore that at six thirty a tophairdresser will give a talk about matching the way you do your hair tolook good with the clothes you wear. That will be in the room behindthe main hall.

There'll be some stalls around the stadium selling clothes - looking atthe list, you'll be able to buy almost anything from sports clothes toWinter coats, but there won't be any shoes Íor sa|e this year, as Wehaven't really got room for people to sit down and try them on.At the end of the evening, we'|l announce who has won the prize Íorthe best design. The prize is usually money, but this year we have acomputer to give away so I'm sure that will be very useful to whoeverwrns.

Because we're ho|ding the event at the sports stadium, which is out oÍtown, there'l| be two specia| buses |eaving Írom outside the cinema atsix o'clock and seven o'clock.

Entrance tickets are only t2.50 each and they can be reserved byringing 0965 763298.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3.

Part 4Look at the six sentences for this part.You will hear a conversatrcnbetvveen a boy, lan, and a girl, Zoé, about a holiday. Decide if eachsentence is correct or incorrect. lf it is correct, put a tick in the boxunder A for YES. lf it is not correct, put a tick in the box under B for NO.You now have 20 seconds to look at the questions for part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. you witt hear the recordingtwice.

Zoé: What are you doing for your ho|iday this year?lan: I might be going to Africa.

Zoé: Wow! How can you do that?

|an: We||, my unc|e and aunt are going to Namibia Íor a month, andthey'Ve asked me to go with them. I have to pay Íor my air fare, butthat's all.

Zoě: You're so Iucky. It's a rea||y bri||iant p|ace for a trip, |'ve heard.lan: The thing is, I don't know yet whether l'll be able to. I've beensaving up, but I don't know whether I'll have enough.Zoé: Cou|dn't you borrow Írom your parents?lan: The problem is, they really want me to spend my holiday withthem, touring round the United States. They haven't said I can't go toAÍrica, but they're not going to make it easy for me.

Zoé: That's a real shame.

lan: Yes, especially as I can go to the States anytime. I've got cousinsthere, so it'd be easy.

Zoě: oh, We||, it a|| sounds very exciting. I don't expect |'|| get Íartherthan London.

|an: Sure|y your Íami|y cou|d afford to go abroad iÍ they wanted to?Zoé: oh, oÍ course We cou|d. But my dad doesn't rea||y |ike goingaway - he says he's out at work all year and he wants a week or twoin his own garden. lt certainly isn't what I want to do. And my mumisn't keen on p|anes, so she doesn't mind iÍ we don't go anywhere byarr.

lan: Would they lend you the money to go somewhere, do you think?Zoé: |t wou|d depend who with.

lan: Well, what about my uncle and aunt's trip? lf you came, it'd beeven better. And my parents might agree to help me a bit with thecost, iÍ yours he|p you.

Zoé: But wou|d I be we|come?

lan: I'm sure they'd love you to come along. Why don't I ask them?

Now listen again.

That is the end oÍ Part 4.

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers onto theanswer sheet.

That is the end of the test.

Př]AI rAPEscRtPrs

PAPER 2 ListeningThere are four parts to the test. You will hear each part twice For

each part of the test there witl be time for you to look through the

questions and time for you to check your answers.

Write your answers on the question paper' You will have six minutes

at the end of the test to copy your answers onto the answer sheet'

Part íThere are seven questions in this part For each question, there are

three pictures and a short recording- Choose the correct picture andput a tick in the box below it'

Before we start, here is an examqle.

What will the boy take back to the shop?

Girl: Did you get everything you wanted?

Boy: I did. |n Íact I only needed to go into one shop. l'd seen a

T-shirt in the window and I got the last one in the sale. And some

shorts to match. I bought this jacket too but l'm not sure iÍ | like it.

Girl: Oh, it looks great. I'd keep it. But those shorts are a horrible

colour. I should change them.

Boy: You're right. They looked different in the shop.

The first picture is correct so there is a tick in box A.

Look at the three pictures for question 1 now.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear each

recording twice.

1 Which instrument is the girl learning now?

Boy: Are you still having violin lessons?

Gir|: We||' unÍortunate|y my vio|in teacher moved away, so |'|| start

again when l Íind a new teacher. But l'm teaching myse|Í to p|ay the

keyboard. I want to play in my brother's band He needs someone to

play the drums too so if you hear of anyone...

Now listen again.

2 What will they buy Íor Lucy?

Girl: Shall we get Lucy a book for her birthday? How about one aboulpainting? She's just siarted some art classes.

Boy: oh, her mum's got |ots oÍ books about art. Why don't we get heÍ

a book about sailing - you know she's going on a sailing holiday

soon? or a cookery book? That wou|d be useÍu|.

Girl: But boring. I think my idea is best. She doesn't want to borrow

her mum's books all the time.

Boy: OK then.

Now listen again.

3 What will the weather be like on Sunday?

Woman: Here is the Weather Íorecast Íor the next Íew days. The Íine

Weather wi|| continue today and tomoÍrow' but enjoy it because on

Sunday it will be cloudy. lt won't rain until Monday, and then the rain

wil| on|y |ast a few hours' After that, We'|l get the Íine Weather back

again.

Now listen again.

4 What did the boy leave in the girl's house?

Gir|'s voice: l'm sorry |'m not heÍe at the moment. P|ease leave a

message aÍter the tone.

Boy: Oh, hi Sarah. lt's Jamie.When you get home, could you have

a look and see iÍ | |eÍt my wa||et in your house? | put it down When I

was showing you that new CD I'd bought. Oh, and by the way I've got

your mobile. You asked me to look after it when we were in town'

remember? Then | Íorgot to give it back to you. Ring me back as soon

as you can.

Now listen again.

5 What will the boY get from the shoq?

Boy: 562900.

Mother: Oh, Sam I'm going to be late home. Could you go to the

shop and get something please? I think we'll have an omelette and

some salad tonight. We've got eggs and tomatoes, but could you go

and buy a lettuce?

Boy: OK. Shall I get some cheese? | like cheese omelette'

Mother: We've got lots in the fridge. But buy some mushrooms to go

with it.

Now listen again.

6 Which sport is unavailable today?

Man: We|come to the activity centre' You have a choice oÍ sports

today - indoor or outdoor. There's gymnastics in the hall, and there's

an instructor for those of you who haven't done it before. You won't be

able to play tennis today - the courts are too wet after all the rain

we've had - but we are going to organise a game of volleyball outside

today instead.

Now listen again.

7 What is the girl wearing?

Girl: Look what I got in the sales today What do you think? lt suits

me, doesn't it?

Boy: lt's a nice colour and it goes with your jeans. But aren't the

sleeves a bit long?

Gir|: |'|ike them |ike this. lt Was VeÍy cheap anyway.

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 1.

Pant 2You will hear a radio interview with a teenage boy called Matthew who

has invented a game. For each question, put a tick in the correct box'

You now have 45 seconds to look at the questions for Part 2-

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully-You will hear the recording

twice.

lnterviewer: Welcome Matthew. You invented a game recently, didn't

you?

Matthew: I invented a mini-baseball game a few years ago now and

it's become very popular. I'm fourteen now, but I had the idea when I

was 10. lt took some time for me to persuade people to take me

seriously, so the game didn't actually go on sale until the day after my

thirteenth birthday.

Interviewer: And it's made and sold by a small American company?

Matthew: That's right, but when l Íirst tried to find a company to maKe

the game, I didn't have any luck. Some companies didn't reply and the

ones who did reply just thought it was a joke because I'm a child.

None of them let me show them the game'

Interviewer: What did you do then?

Matthew: When I couldn't get a company to help, my dad went to

the bank, but they wouldn't lend us the money. But my parents have

a friend who's a really good businessman, and he helped us to make

a business plan. Then we talked to my grandmother and my great

aunt who are quite rich. They were happy to lend us enough to make

the first thousand games. After that, we persuaded a company to

make the game for us.

TAPEscRIPTs řf,E

|ntervieweř: So have you got any more ideas?Matthew: Yes, I have actua||y. |'ve got an idea Íor a game Ťor youngerchildren. I was watching my sisters playing one day and I got the ideafrom them. Then I tried it on some other children. The company arrangesÍor me to Visit diÍÍerent schoo|s. I ask them What they enjoy and try myideas on them.

|nterviewer: So it's for youngeÍ chi|dren?

Matthew: Yes. The toy company did some research, and between theages of Íive and six, children are interested in anima|s, co|our, food _things to do with their own lives. By the time they're eight, they like theopposite - they preÍer games where they can invent things and aremore imaginative. Then, between ten and twelve, they enjoy gamesbased on knowledge - quizzes and things like that.

|nterviewer: We||, what does the Íuture ho|d for you Matthew?

Matthew: lt's OK inventing games now while I'm young, but when I

leave school, I want to do something different. I'd like to learn how torun a business, so that's what l'll study at college. I think actually l'dpreÍer to Work ÍoÍ a company rather than have my own business. Youdon't have to Worřy so much then'

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 2.

Part 3You will hear a radio announcer giving some information about acycling holiday with Pathway Holidays. For each question, fill in themissing information in the numbered space.You now have 20 seconds to look at Part 3.

Now we are ready to start. Listen carefully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Announcer: And last today on our holiday programme we have someinformation about cycling holidays.They're run by Pathway Holidays,and the next one is from Monday 12th June until Saturday 17th June.on this trip, you cyc|e from Whitehaven in the northwest oÍ Eng|and toSunderland in the northeast. On most days, you cycle around 40 km,the maximum on any day being 50 kms, so over the whole trip you'llcycle about 210 kms.

The trip passes through beautiful countryside. The routes are plannedso that you don't have to ride up too many hills. The steepest part isnear the end When you get to the highest point oÍ the ride' This isknown as B|ack Hi|| because oÍ the co|our of the rock. After that, it,sdownhill to the North Sea.The total cost of the tour is f652 and that includes your hotel, allmeals, the transport of your luggage and a guide. This is someonewho knows the area and can tell you about it on the route. In fact, theprice includes everything except bicycle hire" lt's possible to hire abicycle and you should book one in advance if you want to do that,but they recommend bringing your own bicycle. lt's often morecomfortable to ride one that you are used to.

Entertainment is provided in the Íirst hote| in Whitehaven - there'|| bea musical evening. On Wednesday evening, the hotel you're staying inwill organise a quiz, and on the last evening - that's Friday - there'llbe a party.

|Í you'd |ike more inÍormation about the trip, the company advises youto look at their website, and l'll tell you what that is in a minute. We'rejust going to talk to someone who did this cycling holiday recently...

Now listen again.

That is the end of Part 3.

Pant 4Look at the six sentences for this part. You will hear a conversationbetween a girl, Jane, and her mother about where Jane will work nextmonth- Decide if each sentence is correct or incorrect. lf it is correct,put a tick in the box under A for YES. lÍ it is not correct, put a tick inthe box under B Íor No'You now have 20 seconds to look at the questions for Part 4.

Now we are ready to start. Listen careÍully. You will hear the recordingtwice.

Jane: Mum, next month all the people in our class have to spend aweek going to Work instead oÍ going to schoo|' |t's to give us an ideaof what We Want to do When we |eave schoo|. l wondered iÍ | cou|dcome to work with you? . . . Are you listening, Mum?Motheř: Yes, |'m |istening' Do you think that's a good idea? |'m sobusy I wouldn't have time to show you anything. And it's not reallyvery exciting. Let's think of somewhere else you could go.

Jane: But I hear so much about your office. I sometimes Íee| l'veknown al| the peop|e Íor years, but I don't even know what they |ooklike.

Motheř: Bufyou don't Want to be a |awyer. You've a|ways said youWant to do something different Írom Dad and me.

Jane: But I might want to be a lawyer. I want to find out about lots ofdiÍferent |obs _ there are so many opportunities nowadays - and thenl'll decide what I'm going to do when I leave school.

Mother: What are all your friends going to do during this specialweek? Are they all going to work with their mums or dads?Jane: Most of them want to work with children in a primary school fora week, but they already know what that's like. I think it's better to trysomething you don't know anýhing about. They're |osing a goodchance to do something different.

Mother: Well, in that case you don't want to come to work with me -you said I never stop talking about it, so it's not going to be a surpriseto you.

Jane: But I want to know what it's really like and what you really do.

Mother: Well, I'm not terribly happy about it. But if it's what you reallyWant and you promise not to comp|ain iÍ you're bored, |,l| do it.

Now listen again.

That Ís the end of Part 4.

You now have six minutes to check and copy your answers onto theanswer sheet.

That is the end of the test.

řIft TApEscRtprs

Pearson Education LimitedEdinburgh GateHarlowEssex CM20 2JEEnglandand Associated Companies throughout the world.

ururw.longman.com

O Pearson Education Limited 2000This edition published 2003.

The right of Louise HashemrBarbara Thomas to be identified as authors of this Work has beenasserted by them in accordance with the Copyright, Designs andPatents Act 1988.

A1l rights reserved; no part of this publicatlon may be reproduced,stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, oÍ otheÍil/isev/ithout the prior \ir'Íitten permission of the Publishers.

First published 2000This edition published 2003Fifth impression 2006

ISBN- 1 3 : 9 7 8-O- 582-82427 -8ISBN- 1 0: 0 - 582-82421.- 4

Set in 10pt Stone Serif

Printed in Malaysia, LSP

Publisher's acknowledgements

We are grateful to the following for permission to reproduce copyrightphotographs:

Ace Photo Library for page 40; Action Images for page 169 top; ArtDirectoÍs & TRIP for pages 91 bottom, 115' 170 bottom, I72top, I73bottom; Corbis Images for pages 69 bottom, 17O top, 171 top; JamesDavis Travel for page 169 bottom; Greg Evans International for page171 bottom; Getty Images for pages 91 top, 168 bottom; Kit Houghtonfor page 172 bottom; Impact Photos for page 168 top; Penguin UK forpage 25; Photolibrary.com for page 69 top; Rex Features for page 173top

We are indebted to University of Cambridge ESOL Examinations forpermission to reproduce PET/OMR answer sheets for Reading Paper,Writing Paper and Listening Paper and Cambridge ESOL material.

Illustrated by Gary Rees (Linda Rogers Associates), Stefan Chabluk(Linda Rogers Associates), Katherine Ward (Simon Gurling Illustration)Designed by Linda MalesProject Managed by Catriona Watson-Brown

rsBN 0-582-82421-4

ilil|ilillilffiIil